I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372 O n l y
Date Training Center
S A P
Instructors Education Website
P a r t n e r
Participant Handbook Course Version: 95 Course Duration: 3 Day(s) Material Number: 50099629
An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
U s e
P a r t n
e r
SAP ERP - Production
I n t e r n a l
Execution Steps (XSteps)
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Copyright Copyright © 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.
O n l y e r P a r t n S A P U s e
•
ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.
•
INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated.
•
UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.
•
Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®, VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.
•
HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
•
JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
•
JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape.
•
SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Disclaimer
g201071711410
O n l y
THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE, INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS CONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOST PROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDED SOFTWARE COMPONENTS.
e r
I n t e r n a l
IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®, S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.
P a r t n
•
S A P
Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
U s e
•
I n t e r n a l
Trademarks
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
About This Handbook Typographic Conventions
Type Style
Description
Example text
Words or characters that appear on the screen. These include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as well as menu names, paths, and options.
Names of elements in the system. These include report names, program names, transaction codes, table names, and individual key words of a programming language, when surrounded by body text, for example SELECT and INCLUDE.
Example text
Screen output. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages, names of variables and parameters, and passages of the source text of a program.
Example text
Exact user entry. These are words and characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation.
Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters with appropriate entries.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
EXAMPLE TEXT
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
O n l y
Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles of graphics, and tables
e r
Example text
P a r t n
2010
S A P
S A P
Also used for cross-references to other documentation both internal and external.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographic conventions are also used.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
This handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of this course, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.
iii
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
About This Handbook
SCM372
Icons in Body Text The following icons are used in this handbook. Icon
Meaning
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
For more information, tips, or background
Note or further explanation of previous point
e r
Exception or caution
U s e
P a r t n
Procedures
S A P
S A P
Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor's presentation.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
iv
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Contents
e r P a r t n
Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration .................... 2
Unit 2: Control Recipes/Control Instructions .......................................... 35 Control Recipes/Control Instructions – Settings and Processing..................... 36
Unit 3: XSteps ................................................................................. 61 XSteps – Structure, Elements, and Properties ......................................... 63 Standard XSteps............................................................................ 80 Cross-Plant and Multi-Language Standard-XStep-Repository ....................... 95 XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions ................................................ 112 XSteps for Process Control Systems ................................................... 432
S A P
S A P
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration .....................................1
U s e
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions ..451 PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions ............................... 452 PI Sheet Enhancements .................................................................. 468
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages ................................................485
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
Process Messages – Structure and Settings .......................................... 486 Process Messages – Processing ........................................................ 531 Process Messages in the Standard SAP System ..................................... 549
P a r t n
U s e
Course Goals.................................................................................vii Course Objectives ...........................................................................vii
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Course Overview ............................................................................. vii
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
v
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Contents
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
vi
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Course Overview This training course will enable you to apply process management/process coordination. O n l y
This course is intended for the following audiences: Project members and key users who are responsible for maintaining execution steps for production and process orders to enable data to be exchanged with shop floor control systems and the conception of work instructions and PI sheets for process operators and workers in production.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
•
Course Prerequisites Required Knowledge
S A P
SCM310 Production Orders or SCM340 Process Orders
S A P
• •
Course Goals
P a r t n
U s e
This course will prepare you to: •
Use the functions of process management/process integration
e r
I n t e r n a l
Course Objectives After completing this course, you will be able to:
2010
Set up destinations for control recipes and control instructions Develop XSteps for PI sheets/work instructions and for external systems
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
O n l y
• •
I n t e r n a l
Target Audience
vii
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Course Overview
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
viii
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 1 O n l y e r
Unit Overview P a r t n
Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
U s e
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
S A P U s e
Unit Contents
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration ... 2 Exercise 1: Process Management ............................................ 19 Exercise 2: Process Integration ............................................... 25
P a r t n
• •
Explain the functions and flow of process management/process integration Name the data structures required for process management/process integration Create and send control recipes/control instructions for process orders/production orders Maintain PI sheets/work instructions Send process messages
S A P
• • •
I n t e r n a l
Process Management/Process Integration
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
1
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
SCM372
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration Lesson Overview O n l y
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• •
Explain the functions and flow of process management/process integration Name the data structures required for process management/process integration Create and send control recipes/control instructions for process orders/production orders Maintain PI sheets/work instructions Send process messages
S A P
S A P
Business Example •
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
At your company, you want to use the process management and process integration functions to maintain your process and production orders. You first familiarize yourself with the functions and flow of process management/process integration. You also find out about the data structures required when using process management/process integration functions.
P a r t n
•
U s e
P a r t n
e r
• • •
I n t e r n a l
This lesson describes the functions and flow of process management/process integration.
O n l y
2
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 1: Planning and Production
S A P
S A P
Production control in the ECC system represents the central part of a complex process chain ranging from an independent requirement (planned or customer requirements) through to the goods issue of finished products.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
3
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 2: Production Types of the SAP ECC System
P a r t n
S A P
Correspondingly, the SAP ECC system supports various production types. The topics covered in this course refer to shop floor control with process orders and production orders.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
Depending on the manufacturing process, production infrastructure, product complexity, stability of production, and further criteria, a manufacturing company has various requirements with regard to shop floor control.
O n l y
4
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 3: Process Steps of an Order
S A P
S A P
The figure shows the key activities that are carried out when a process order/production order is processed in the ECC system.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 4: Structure of a Process Order
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
5
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
O n l y
SCM372
Operations describe the different steps required during the production process. For a more detailed description of these steps, phases are assigned to the operations. Exactly one resource is assigned to an operation. This assignment of the resource is also valid for all phases that belong to the operation. The phases' processing sequence in time is defined in relationships.
Process management enables data to be exchanged with the process control level.
S A P
O n l y S A P
A process order is usually created using a master recipe and a bill of material, whereby the operation and phase structure together with its relationships and assigned resources, as well as material components and process instructions are copied to the process order.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
In material quantity calculation, you define formulas to calculate the material quantities to be used or obtained in a production process, taking into account the mixing ratios of the ingredients, yield ratios of the products and remaining materials, as well as specific material attributes (for example, active ingredient).
I n t e r n a l
The material list is made up of components representing the materials entering and leaving the production process, as well as temporarily existing materials and their planned quantities. It also defines the assignment of these material components to the phases of the order according to their appearance in the process.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
The data for process management is maintained as XSteps (Execution Steps). Using XSteps enables process instructions to be maintained in the form of reusable and referenceable modules. A Standard XStep Repository with version management is available.
O n l y
6
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 5: Structure of a Production Order
S A P
S A P
Operations describe the different steps required during the production process. Exactly one work center is assigned to an operation.
U s e
P a r t n
The chronological sequence in which operations are processed is defined using the operation number. The material list is made up of components representing all the materials and assemblies required in the order (including their planned quantities) and defines the assignment of these material components to the operations in the order.
Process integration enables data to be exchanged with the process control level. The data for process integration is maintained as XSteps (Execution Steps). Using XSteps enables process instructions to be maintained in the form of reusable and referenceable modules. A Standard XStep Repository with version management is available.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
7
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
A process order is usually created using a routing and a bill of material, whereby the operation structure is copied together with assigned work centers and material components.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 6: Synonymous Terms
S A P U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
Process integration for production orders is available as of Release ECC 6.0 Enhancement Pack 3.
P a r t n
The figure shows the key synonyms used for both order types within this course. In the training materials, both terms are always used if possible, whereby the respective term for the process orders is used first, for example, process management/process integration.
S A P
Process orders and production orders have a similar structure and similar functions.
O n l y
8
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 7: Process Management/Process Integration in Production
S A P
S A P
Process management/process integration enables data to be exchanged with the process control level. Process management/process integration can be used in fully automated, partially automated, and manually operated plants/work centers.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 8: Process Management/Process Integration
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
9
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
SCM372
Process management/process integration is the interface between SAP ECC production and the systems involved in process control. Due to its flexible structure, it can be linked to fully automated, partially automated, and manually operated lines. Process management/process integration comprises the following functions for:
•
e r
•
Data is exchanged with process control systems using the PI-PCS interface.
U s e
P a r t n
•
Receiving control recipes/control instructions with process instructions from released process/production orders. Process instructions define in detail the process steps to be executed and the process data to be reported (with process messages), for example. Sending control recipes/control instructions to the corresponding process operators/machine operators or process control systems Manual maintenance: preparing control recipes/control instructions as PI sheets/work instructions written in a natural language in the ECC system so that process/machine operators can display and maintain this data on screen. Receiving, checking, and sending process messages with actual process data from the process control system or the PI sheet/work instructions.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 9: Data Flow
Production requirements trigger the production process. Production requirements are created in material requirements planning in the form of planned orders. Planned orders define the basic dates and planned quantities for production.
10
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
Planned orders are converted into process orders/production orders, whereby basic dates and quantities are copied and actual production dates are determined from the basic dates. Process orders/production orders are created from a master recipe/routing, which is used a template. O n l y e r P a r t n
U s e
In return, process management/process integration deals with process messages from the process control level, which are forwarded to various destinations. For example, it is possible to record confirmations for the process/production order, transfer actual values of the process to functions for process data documentation and evaluation, post material consumptions or production yields as goods movements, and transfer quality data to results recording in Quality Management.
I n t e r n a l
After a process order/production order has been released for production, the process instructions maintained in the order are merged into control recipes/control instructions as part of process management/process integration and transferred to a process control system via a specific interface or displayed in the ECC system as PI sheets/work instructions) in a natural language for process/machine operators.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 10: Creating and Sending Control Recipes/Instructions Based on XSteps
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
11
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
SCM372
The data for process management/process integration is maintained as XSteps (Execution Steps). Using XSteps enables you to maintain process instructions in the form of reusable and referenceable modules. A Standard XStep Repository with version management is available. XSteps are available for process orders as of Release R/3 4.7 Extension 2.00. O n l y e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
XSteps are available for production orders as of Release ECC 6.0 Enhancement Pack 3.
I n t e r n a l
12
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
O n l y
This type of process instruction maintenance is not covered in this course.
e r
In all releases there is an older, alternative method of maintaining process instructions for process orders whereby the process instructions and control recipe destinations are assigned to the phases of the master recipe/process order.
P a r t n
U s e
S A P
S A P
Figure 11: Creating and Sending Control Recipes (II)
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 12: Monitor for Control Instructions/Control Recipes
S A P U s e
On the basis of this information, you can execute the following functions from the monitor:
•
Send control recipes if they are not automatically sent by a background job defined in Customizing. Delete control recipes.
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
P a r t n
From the monitor, you can call different logs that provide more detailed information about the individual process steps and any errors that may have occurred.
S A P
You can obtain information about the current processing status of a control recipe/control instruction by navigating to the monitor for control instructions/control recipes.
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
13
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 13: PI Sheet/Work Instructions
S A P
Depending on the process instructions contained in a control recipe/instruction, the PI sheet/work instructions may contain various elements and functions, for example:
U s e I n t e r n a l
14
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
The PI sheets/work instructions are created in HTML. The browser-based PI sheet is a further development of the original ABAP list-based PI sheet. It enables you to define your own layouts with increased flexibility and integrate different data from diverse sources, for example.
e r
Display information about the process (instructions, notes, and so on) Input fields and tables for reporting process data, input validations and signatures Batch determination and batch check Calculate process data Read and write data from internal or external applications Option of branching to QM results recording Comments for documenting and reporting process events
P a r t n
• • • • • • •
S A P
PI sheets/work instructions enable on-screen maintenance, which means that the process/machine operator can enter, confirm, report, or complete data interactively.
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 14: HTML-Based PI Sheet/Work Instructions
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 15: Flexible Data Entry with Process Messages
Process messages are data structures used to report actual process data from process control to one or more destinations.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
15
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
O n l y
SCM372
You can define your own process messages in Customizing according to your own specific requirements. The standard SAP System contains a number of predefined message categories enabling you to transfer current data from process control to the ECC System.
O n l y
U s e
P a r t n
e r
The process messages are first sent to process management/process integration. They are then checked and passed on to predefined destinations.
I n t e r n a l
The process instructions of the control recipe/control instructions for an order define which process messages are requested by PI sheets/work instructions or a process control system.
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
16
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
The standard postings for orders (goods issue, confirmation, goods receipt) can be performed using manual data entry in the ECC System or process messages from PI sheets/work instructions or a process control system.
e r
Figure 16: Standard Postings for Orders
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 17: Message Monitor
S A P
From the monitor, you can call logs that provide more detailed information on the processing of individual messages and any errors that may have occurred.
U s e
•
Complete or correct incomplete or incorrect messages Send messages if they are not automatically sent by a background job defined in Customizing Delete messages
e r
I n t e r n a l
• •
P a r t n
On the basis of this information, you can execute the following functions from the monitor:
S A P
The message monitor provides information on the current status of process messages.
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
17
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 18: Order Processing with Process Management/Integration
S A P
Caution: All the exercises are offered for process orders and production orders .
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
At the beginning of the course, customers must decide whether they want to carry out the exercises for master recipes and process orders or routings and production orders.
P a r t n
U s e
Alternatively, the order can be processed as described above with the help of process management/process integration.
S A P
The figure shows a detailed representation of the possible activities carried out when an order is processed.
18
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
Exercise 1: Process Management Exercise Objectives
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create and release process orders • Create and send control recipes • Maintain PI sheets • Display and send process messages
e r
Business Example
Hint: Complete the exercises on this topic if you want to use master recipes and process orders.
S A P
S A P
Complete the exercises on the following topic, Process Integration, if you want to use routings and production orders.
1.
Create a process order PI-ORDER-## of type PI02 for material T-SCM372-PI-## in plant 1100.
2.
Choose a order quantity of 10,000 PC and a finish date in the future.
Release your process order and create the control recipe.
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
Task 2:
Save your order.
Task 3: 1.
In the Process Management application menu, call the control recipe monitor and select the control recipes created for order PI-ORDER-##. Continued on next page
2010
P a r t n
U s e
Task 1:
1.
U s e
P a r t n
You are processing a process order using process management.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
19
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
2.
SCM372
Send the control recipes online from the monitor. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
Find the PI sheets belonging to your control recipes by selecting the relevant menu item in the Process Management application menu.
2.
Access the PI sheet for the Scales operating group in change mode and maintain some of the process steps in the PI sheet.
e r
1.
1.
From the Process Management application menu, go to the process message monitor and select the process messages created during maintenance of the PI sheet.
2.
Send the process messages online from the monitor.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
S A P
S A P
Task 5:
U s e
P a r t n
Hint: Execute signatures with your ECC user and password.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Task 4:
O n l y
20
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
Solution 1: Process Management Task 1: Create a process order PI-ORDER-## of type PI02 for material T-SCM372-PI-## in plant 1100. Standard SAP menu: Logistics → Production - Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material Material number:
T-SCM372-PI-##
Production plant:
1100
Process order type:
PI02
Process order:
PI-ORDER-##
U s e
P a r t n
e r
a)
Enter 2.
Choose a order quantity of 10,000 PC and a finish date in the future. S A P
Total quantity:
10,000 PC
Finish:
Date in the future
P a r t n
U s e
S A P
a)
Enter
Task 2:
e r
I n t e r n a l
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
1.
1.
Release your process order and create the control recipe. O n l y
Save your order. a)
In the process order: Icon
Release
Icon
Generate Control Recipe.
Save your entries. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
21
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
O n l y
SCM372
Task 3: 1.
In the Process Management application menu, call the control recipe monitor and select the control recipes created for order PI-ORDER-##. Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor Plant:
1100
Manufacturing order:
PI-ORDER-##
e r
Enter Send the control recipes online from the monitor. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. a)
In the control recipe monitor, select your control recipes and choose Send.
S A P
S A P
To check whether the control recipes have been sent, choose Refresh.
U s e
P a r t n
2.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
a)
The control recipes should have Sent status.
Task 4:
U s e
Find the PI sheets belonging to your control recipes by selecting the relevant menu item in the Process Management application menu. Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find
e r
Plant:
1100
Process order:
PI-ORDER-## O n l y
I n t e r n a l
a)
Execute (F8) icon
Continued on next page
22
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
1.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
2.
Access the PI sheet for the Scales operating group in change mode and maintain some of the process steps in the PI sheet. Hint: Execute signatures with your ECC user and password. Select the PI sheet for the Scales operating group and choose Maintain PI Sheet.
Task 5: From the Process Management application menu, go to the process message monitor and select the process messages created during maintenance of the PI sheet. Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Message → Message Monitor Plant:
1100
Process order:
PI-ORDER-##
S A P
S A P
a)
Enter Send the process messages online from the monitor.
P a r t n
U s e
2.
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. In the message monitor, select your process messages and choose Send Message.
e r
I n t e r n a l
a)
To check whether the messages have been sent, choose Refresh.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
O n l y
The messages should have Sent status.
2010
U s e
P a r t n
e r
1.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
a)
23
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
24
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
Exercise 2: Process Integration Exercise Objectives
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create and release production orders • Create and send control instructions • Maintain work instructions • Display and send process messages
e r
Business Example
Hint: Complete the exercises on this topic if you want to use routings and production orders.
S A P
S A P
Complete the exercises on the previous topic, Process Management, if you want to use master recipes and process orders.
1.
Create a production order PP-ORDER-## of type PP02 for material T-SCM372-PP-## in plant 1000.
2.
Choose a order quantity of 10 PC and a finish date in the future.
P a r t n
U s e
Task 1:
Release your production order and create the control instructions.
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
Task 2: 1.
Save your order.
Task 3: 1.
In the Process Integration application menu, call the control instructions monitor and select the control instructions created for order PP-ORDER-##. Continued on next page
2010
U s e
P a r t n
You are processing a production order using process integration.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
25
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
2.
SCM372
Send the control instructions online from the monitor. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
Find the work instructions belonging to your control instructions by selecting the relevant menu item in the Process Integration application menu.
2.
Access the work instructions for the Work Center 1 operating group in change mode and maintain some of the process steps in the work instructions.
e r
1.
U s e
P a r t n
Hint: Execute signatures with your ECC user and password.
1.
From the Process Integration application menu, go to the process message monitor and select the process messages created during maintenance of the work instructions.
2.
Send the process messages online from the monitor.
S A P
S A P
Task 5:
P a r t n
U s e
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Task 4:
e r
I n t e r n a l
Hint: Choose Send Message and not Start Send Job.
O n l y
26
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
Solution 2: Process Integration Task 1: Create a production order PP-ORDER-## of type PP02 for material T-SCM372-PP-## in plant 1000. a)
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
1.
Standard SAP menu:
Material number:
T-SCM372-PP-##
Production plant:
1000
Order type:
PP02
Order:
PP-ORDER-##
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Order → Create → With Material
Enter
S A P
S A P
2.
Choose a order quantity of 10 PC and a finish date in the future.
Total quantity:
10 PC
Finish:
Date in the future
P a r t n
U s e
a)
I n t e r n a l
Enter
O n l y
1.
e r
Task 2: Release your production order and create the control instructions.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
27
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
SCM372
Save your order. a)
In the production order: Choose the Release icon Choose the Generate Control Instructions icon
O n l y
Save your entries.
e r
Task 3: In the Process Integration application menu, call the control instructions monitor and select the control instructions created for order PP-ORDER-##. ECC → Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Control Instructions → Monitor Control Instructions/Recipes Plant:
1000
Manufacturing order:
PP-ORDER-##
S A P
S A P
a)
U s e
P a r t n
1.
Enter
U s e
Send the control instructions online from the monitor.
P a r t n
2.
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. In the monitor, select your control instructions and choose Send. To check whether the control instructions have been sent, choose Refresh.
e r
I n t e r n a l
a)
I n t e r n a l
(or: Choose XSteps / XSteps → Control Instructions/Recipe → Generate)
The control instructions should have Sent status. O n l y
Continued on next page
28
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
Task 4: 1.
Find the work instructions belonging to your control instructions by selecting the relevant menu item in the Process Integration application menu. Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Work Instructions → Find Plant:
1000
Manufacturing order:
PP-ORDER-##
e r
Execute (F8) icon Access the work instructions for the Work Center 1 operating group in change mode and maintain some of the process steps in the work instructions.
U s e
P a r t n
2.
Hint: Execute signatures with your ECC user and password.
S A P
Select the work instructions for the Work Center 1 operating group and choose Change Work Instructions.
S A P
a)
From the Process Integration application menu, go to the process message monitor and select the process messages created during maintenance of the work instructions. Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Process Messages → Message Monitor 1000
Order:
PP-ORDER-##
O n l y
Plant:
Enter
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
a)
P a r t n
U s e
Task 5: 1.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
a)
29
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 1: Process Management/Process Integration
2.
SCM372
Send the process messages online from the monitor. Hint: Choose Send Message and not Start Send Job. a)
In the message monitor, select your process messages and choose Send Message. I n t e r n a l
O n l y
To check whether the messages have been sent, choose Refresh.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
The messages should have Sent status.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
30
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Functions and Flow of Process Management/Process Integration
Lesson Summary
O n l y e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
You should now be able to: • Explain the functions and flow of process management/process integration • Name the data structures required for process management/process integration • Create and send control recipes/control instructions for process orders/production orders • Maintain PI sheets/work instructions • Send process messages
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
31
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit Summary
O n l y
SCM372
Unit Summary
O n l y e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
You should now be able to: • Explain the functions and flow of process management/process integration • Name the data structures required for process management/process integration • Create and send control recipes/control instructions for process orders/production orders • Maintain PI sheets/work instructions • Send process messages
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
32
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
e r P a r t n S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
S A P P a r t n
U s e
S A P
U s e e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r P a r t n S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
S A P P a r t n
U s e
S A P
U s e e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit Summary
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
33
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit Summary
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
34
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 2 O n l y
Unit Overview
e r
This unit shows you how to set up and process control recipes/control instructions.
After completing this unit, you will be able to: •
S A P U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
Lesson: Control Recipes/Control Instructions – Settings and Processing ... 36 Exercise 3: Control Recipes ................................................... 49 Exercise 4: Control Instructions ............................................... 53
P a r t n
Unit Contents
S A P
• • •
Explain the possible types of control recipe destinations/control instruction destinations Create a control recipe destination/control instruction destination in Customizing Describe how to process control recipes/control instructions Create, send, and monitor control recipes/control instructions for process orders/production orders
U s e
P a r t n
Unit Objectives
I n t e r n a l
Control Recipes/Control Instructions
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
35
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 2: Control Recipes/Control Instructions
SCM372
Lesson: Control Recipes/Control Instructions – Settings and Processing Lesson Overview O n l y
Lesson Objectives
e r
• • •
Explain the possible types of control recipe destinations/control instruction destinations Create a control recipe destination/control instruction destination in Customizing Describe how to process control recipes/control instructions Create, send, and monitor control recipes/control instructions for process orders/production orders
S A P
S A P
Business Example At your company, you want to use the functions of process management/process integration to process your process orders/production orders.
U s e
Depending on the type of destination, the control recipes/control instructions are:
I n t e r n a l
You then generate and send control recipes/control instructions for an order and monitor the status in the corresponding monitor. Finally, you familiarize yourself with the status sequence of control recipes/control instructions and the corresponding orders.
36
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
In Customizing, you first familiarize yourself with the structure of the destinations for control recipes/control instructions.
e r
•
Displayed in the ECC system as PI sheets/work instructions to be processed interactively Transferred to a process control system through the PI-PCS interface
P a r t n
To do this, you must transfer process instructions for the process orders/production orders to shop floor control using control recipes/control instructions.
•
U s e
•
P a r t n
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
I n t e r n a l
This lesson describes how to process the settings for control recipes/control instructions.
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Control Recipes/Control Instructions – Settings and Processing
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P U s e
• •
2010
Create control recipes/control instructions of an order at different times Create multiple control recipes/control instructions for the same destination for an order
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
37
O n l y
All control recipes/control instructions of an XStep tree are always generated at the same time. Control recipes/control instructions of different XStep trees can be generated separately, which means that by using multiple XStep trees, you can, for example:
e r
After the order has been released, process management/process integration generates one control recipe/control instruction for each control recipe destination/control instruction destination of an XStep tree.
P a r t n
You define XSteps for process orders/production orders in XStep trees in the underlying master recipes/routings. An XStep tree comprises XSteps and process instructions. A control recipe destination/control instruction destination is defined for each XStep.
S A P
You use XSteps to define structures with which you can describe exactly how a process order/production order is produced. You can use XSteps to control data exchange with external systems or generate interactive PI sheets/work instructions for process operators/machine operators in the production.
I n t e r n a l
Figure 19: XSteps: Generating Control Recipes/Control Instructions
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 2: Control Recipes/Control Instructions
O n l y
SCM372
Depending on the destination type, the control recipes/control instructions are displayed internally in the ECC system as PI sheets/work instructions or are transferred to an external system through the PI-PCS interface.
O n l y e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
A context (order, operation, or phase) is also defined for each XStep. A context object (for example, a certain phase or operation) can be assigned to any number of XSteps. As a result, the same context objects can be used more than once in different control recipes/control instructions, and therefore also in different PI sheets/work instructions of an order.
You define control recipe destinations/control instruction destinations in Customizing.
e r
I n t e r n a l
The destination types shown in the above figure are available when you use XSteps.
P a r t n
U s e
S A P
S A P
Figure 20: XSteps: Control Recipe Destinations/Control Instruction Destinations
O n l y
38
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Control Recipes/Control Instructions – Settings and Processing
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
•
•
P a r t n
Activate the digital signature and specify whether signature strategies are required for particular process steps or if deviations occur Activate a log for particular process steps
The following types of signatures are supported in PI sheets/work instructions: Signature without password check: You do not need special authorization to enter this type of signature in the PI sheet/work instructions. The system does not check the signature you entered. Digital signatures: This type of signature ensures the unique and forgery-proof identification of a user and the logging of the signed operation. There are two SAP signature methods: System Signature with Authorization by User/Password and User Signature with Ext. Security Product (for example, a card reader). If the control recipe destination/control instruction destination is an external system, you can set the Creation with XSteps indicator in the detailed data.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
39
O n l y
•
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
S A P
For destinations with control recipes/control instructions that are to be displayed as PI sheets/work instructions, you can also:
U s e
Figure 21: XSteps: Destination Details
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 2: Control Recipes/Control Instructions
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 22: XSteps: "External System" Destination Type S A P
S A P
As soon as at least one control recipe/control instruction has been created for a destination, process management/process integration sends all existing control recipes/control instructions for this destination.
U s e
•
BAPIs with synchronous RFCs can also be used to enable communication between ECC and the process control systems.
40
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Thanks to the RFC technology, the application is completely free of communication handling on the ECC level. The tRFC ensures that each call is executed only once. The sequence of the calls is not changed. If the target system is not active when the call takes place, the RFC is repeated according to a repetition rate and duration that can be set by the user.
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
P a r t n
From a technical point of view, ECC can communicate with the process control systems through a tRFC (transactional remote function call). The communication partners transfer data using Common Program Interface Communication (CPI-C) based on TCP/IP.
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Control Recipes/Control Instructions – Settings and Processing
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 23: Monitor for Control Instructions/Control Recipes
S A P U s e
On the basis of this information, you can execute the following functions from the monitor:
•
Send control recipes/control instructions if they are not automatically sent by a background job defined in Customizing Delete control recipes/control instructions: –
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
41
O n l y
–
When using XSteps, you can only delete control recipes/control instructions if the corresponding orders have been deleted. When using process instructions maintained by phase in process orders, you can delete control recipes as soon as they have been discarded, terminated, or exited.
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
P a r t n
From the monitor, you can call different logs that provide more detailed information on the individual process steps and any errors that may have occurred.
S A P
You can obtain information about the current processing status of a control recipe/control instruction by navigating to the monitor for control instructions/control recipes.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 2: Control Recipes/Control Instructions
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 24: XSteps: Recipe/Instruction Status and Order Status
S A P
The PI_CRST message category is used for both process orders and production orders.
U s e
(*) An order has status XSez only if at least one control recipe/control instruction of the order has the status Created or Sent.
42
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Order status XSez: Control recipe in process Order status XSgn: XStep generated Order status XSpr: Control recipe created
e r
• • •
P a r t n
The figure above shows the status sequence of a control recipe/control instruction together with the corresponding order status when XSteps are used. Process orders and production orders can have one of the following statuses:
S A P
Process messages of category PI_CRST are used to update the statuses of control recipes/control instructions and the corresponding orders.
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Control Recipes/Control Instructions – Settings and Processing
S A P U s e
(Remember: If you are using XSteps, multiple control recipes can be generated for a control recipe destination).
O n l y
A phase can be assigned to one control recipe only. (Remember: If you are using XSteps, a phase can be assigned to multiple control recipes and, therefore, also to multiple PI sheets).
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
For each order, one control recipe is created for the control recipe destination.
P a r t n
After a process order or the relevant phases are released, the process instructions stored in the order are grouped into control recipes and transferred to process management.
S A P
In all releases there is an older, alternative method of maintaining process instructions for process orders whereby the process instructions and control recipe destinations are assigned to the phases of the master recipe/process order. One control recipe destination and any number of process instructions can be assigned to each phase. A control recipe destination can be assigned to multiple phases.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 25: Process Instruction Maintenance by Phase: Creating Control Recipes
43
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 2: Control Recipes/Control Instructions
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
You define control recipe destinations in Customizing. The control recipe destination specifies:
For destinations with control recipes that are to be displayed as a PI sheet, you can also:
e r
U s e
To where a control recipe is to be transferred (for example, to an operating group that maintains PI sheets or a specific process control system) How the data is to be transferred (for example, initiated by ECC or the process control system) Which process instructions are to be generated automatically if a control recipe is created for a destination
P a r t n
• •
• •
Activate the digital signature and specify whether signature strategies are required for particular process steps Activate a log for particular process steps
If a control recipe destination is an external system, you can assign the process instruction categories defined for this system to the destination. When you maintain process instructions for a control recipe destination in the master recipe or process order, the system offers as possible entries only those process instruction categories that are assigned to the control recipe destination.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
•
44
S A P
S A P
Figure 26: Process Instruction Maintenance by Phase: Control Recipe Destinations
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Control Recipes/Control Instructions – Settings and Processing
S A P
S A P
The following types of signatures are supported in the PI sheet: •
Signature without password check:
U s e
Signatures with a simple password check (for type 1 Transfer to ABAP list-based PI sheet only):
You assign plant-specific user passwords in Customizing for the control recipe destination. •
Digital signatures: This type of signature ensures the unique and forgery-proof identification of a user and the logging of the signed operation. There are two SAP signature methods: System Signature with Authorization by User/Password and User Signature with Ext. Security Product (for example, a card reader). Digital signature strategies may be requested for certain activities.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
45
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
In this case, you must enter a user name as the signuture and an application-specific password in the PI sheet.
P a r t n
You do not need a special authorization to enter this type of signature in the PI sheet. The system does not check the signature you entered. •
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 27: Process Instruction Maintenance by Phase: "PI Sheet" Destination Type
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 2: Control Recipes/Control Instructions
O n l y
SCM372
You can activate the logging of particular operations for the browser-based PI sheet.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P
Figure 28: Process Instruction Maintenance by Phase: "External System" Destination Type
U s e
•
• •
46
Thanks to the RFC technology, the application is completely free of communication handling on the ECC level. The tRFC ensures that each call is executed only once. The sequence of the calls is not changed. If the target system is not active when the call takes place, the RFC is repeated according to a repetition rate and duration that can be set by the user.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
From a technical point of view, ECC can communicate with the process control systems through a tRFC (transactional remote function call). The communication partners transfer data using Common Program Interface Communication (CPI-C) based on TCP/IP.
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
As soon as at least one control recipe has been created for a destination, process management sends all existing control recipes for this destination. Process management informs a destination about each new control recipe created. Depending on the destination, individual control recipes or all existing control recipes can be requested.
P a r t n
Depending on the destination type, control recipes can be sent to process control systems as follows:
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Control Recipes/Control Instructions – Settings and Processing
BAPIs with synchronous RFCs can also be used to enable communication between ECC and the process control systems.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
Process messages of category PI_CRST are used to update the statuses of control recipes and the corresponding orders.
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 29: Process Instruction Maintenance by Phase: Control Recipe Status and Order Status
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
47
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 2: Control Recipes/Control Instructions
SCM372
The figure above shows the status sequence of a control recipe together with the corresponding order status. The statuses have the following meaning: •
Control recipe created order status, Created or Sent control recipe status: The control recipe is created. The corresponding process instructions are locked and cannot be changed.
O n l y
Order status Control recipe discarded, control recipe status Discarded: The control recipe cannot be processed. It is discarded before the start of its execution. You can change the process instructions and then generate a new control recipe.
e r
•
Control recipe finished order status, Terminated control recipe status:
P a r t n
•
Control recipe finished order status, Processed control recipe status: Execution of the control recipe has been completed. The corresponding process instructions remain locked.
U s e
The execution of the control recipe has been started but cannot be completed. You can no longer change the corresponding process instructions. If a new control recipe is required, you can maintain new process instructions.
I n t e r n a l
•
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
48
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Control Recipes/Control Instructions – Settings and Processing
Exercise 3: Control Recipes Exercise Objectives
Business Example You are defining control recipe destinations in Customizing.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Hint: Complete the exercises on this topic if you want to use master recipes and process orders. Complete the exercises on the following topic, Control Instructions, if you want to use routings and production orders.
Task: Defining and Setting Up Control Recipe Destinations
S A P U s e I n t e r n a l
00 to 09
0A to 9A
10 to 19
0B to 9B
20 to 29
0C to 9C
30
0D
00 to 09
0E to 9E
10 to 19
0F to 9F
20 to 29
0G to 9G
30
0H
Description/Address
GR## PI 1/GR## PI Sheet 1
GR## PI 2/GR## PI Sheet 2
Specify the following properties for the control recipe destinations: –
Destination type: 4 Transfer to browser-based PI sheet
–
A digital signature is required when you enter a signature in the PI sheet. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
49
O n l y
Control Recipe Destinations t
o Be Created
e r
Exercise Groups
P a r t n
Create the following control recipe destinations for PI sheets for plant 1100 in Customizing:
S A P
1.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Define and set up control recipe destinations
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372
–
Select Log with a Digital Signature for the Activate/Deactivate operations.
–
Select No Log for the Lock/Unlock operations.
–
Select Log Without Signature for the Complete and Value Entry operations.
Copy control recipe destinations if possible.
Exercise Groups
Control Recipe Destinations t
o Be Created
00 to 09
0I to 9I
10 to 19
0J to 9J
20 to 29
0K to 9K
30
0L
Description/Address
GR## PCS / GR## Process Control System
As the destination type, select: 2 Download to ext. system, initiated by SAP process management.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Set the Creation with XSteps indicator.
S A P
S A P
Create the following control recipe destinations for an external system for plant 1100 in Customizing.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
2.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 2: Control Recipes/Control Instructions
O n l y
50
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Control Recipes/Control Instructions – Settings and Processing
Solution 3: Control Recipes Task: Defining and Setting Up Control Recipe Destinations
S A P
Control Recipe Destinations t
o Be Created
00 to 09
0A to 9A
10 to 19
0B to 9B
20 to 29
0C to 9C
30
0D
00 to 09
0E to 9E
10 to 19
0F to 9F
20 to 29
0G to 9G
30
0H
Description/Address
GR## PI 1/GR## PI Sheet 1
GR## PI 2/GR## PI Sheet 2
U s e
–
A digital signature is required when you enter a signature in the PI sheet.
–
Select Log with a Digital Signature for the Activate/Deactivate operations.
–
Select No Log for the Lock/Unlock operations.
–
Select Log Without Signature for the Complete and Value Entry operations.
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Destination type: 4 Transfer to browser-based PI sheet
e r
–
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
Specify the following properties for the control recipe destinations:
S A P
Exercise Groups
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Create the following control recipe destinations for PI sheets for plant 1100 in Customizing:
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
1.
51
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 2: Control Recipes/Control Instructions
O n l y
SCM372
Copy control recipe destinations if possible. a)
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Management → Control Recipes/PI Sheets → Control Recipe Destinations → Define and Set Up Control Recipe Destinations (for plant 1100)
O n l y
Double-click a destination to maintain its details. Create the following control recipe destinations for an external system for plant 1100 in Customizing.
S A P
Control Recipe Destinations t
o Be Created
00 to 09
0I to 9I
10 to 19
0J to 9J
20 to 29
0K to 9K
30
0L
Description/Address
GR## PCS / GR## Process Control System
As the destination type, select: 2 Download to ext. system, initiated by SAP process management.
U s e
See previous exercise
e r
I n t e r n a l
a)
P a r t n
Set the Creation with XSteps indicator.
S A P
Exercise Groups
U s e
P a r t n
e r
2.
I n t e r n a l
Choose New Entries to create a control recipe destination.
O n l y
52
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Control Recipes/Control Instructions – Settings and Processing
Exercise 4: Control Instructions Exercise Objectives
Business Example You are defining control instruction destinations in Customizing.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Hint: Complete the exercises on this topic if you want to use routings and production orders. Complete the exercises on the previous topic, Control Recipes, if you want to use master recipes and process orders.
Task: Defining and Setting Up Control Instruction Destinations
S A P U s e I n t e r n a l
00 to 09
0A to 9A
10 to 19
0B to 9B
20 to 29
0C to 9C
30
0D
00 to 09
0E to 9E
10 to 19
0F to 9F
20 to 29
0G to 9G
30
0H
Description/Address
GR## WI 1/GR## Work Instruction 1
GR## WI 2/GR## Work Instruction 2
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
53
O n l y
Control Instruction Destinations to Be Created
e r
Exercise Groups
P a r t n
Create the following control instruction destinations for work instructions for plant 1000 in Customizing:
S A P
1.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Define and set up control instruction destinations
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 2: Control Recipes/Control Instructions
SCM372
–
Destination type: 4 Transfer to browser-based work instruction
–
A digital signature is required when you enter a signature in the work instruction.
–
Select Log with a Digital Signature for the Activate/Deactivate operations.
–
Select No Log for the Lock/Unlock operations.
–
Select Log Without Signature for the Complete and Value Entry operations.
e r
Copy control instruction destinations if possible.
S A P
Control Instruction Destinations to Be Created
00 to 09
0I to 9I
10 to 19
0J to 9J
20 to 29
0K to 9K
30
0L
Description/Address
GR## PCS / GR## Process Control System
As the destination type, select: 2 Download to ext. system, initiated by SAP process management.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Set the Creation with XSteps indicator.
P a r t n
Exercise Groups
S A P
U s e
Create the following control instruction destinations for an external system for plant 1000 in Customizing.
U s e
P a r t n
2.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Specify the following properties for the control instruction destinations:
O n l y
54
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Control Recipes/Control Instructions – Settings and Processing
Solution 4: Control Instructions Task: Defining and Setting Up Control Instruction Destinations
e r P a r t n S A P
00 to 09
0A to 9A
10 to 19
0B to 9B
20 to 29
0C to 9C
30
0D
00 to 09
0E to 9E
10 to 19
0F to 9F
20 to 29
0G to 9G
30
0H
Description/Address
GR## WI 1/GR## Work Instruction 1
GR## WI 2/GR## Work Instruction 2
U s e I n t e r n a l
–
A digital signature is required when you enter a signature in the work instruction.
–
Select Log with a Digital Signature for the Activate/Deactivate operations.
–
Select No Log for the Lock/Unlock operations.
–
Select Log Without Signature for the Complete and Value Entry operations.
O n l y
Destination type: 4 Transfer to browser-based work instruction
e r
–
P a r t n
Specify the following properties for the control instruction destinations:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
S A P
Control Instruction Destinations to Be Created
U s e
Exercise Groups
I n t e r n a l
Create the following control instruction destinations for work instructions for plant 1000 in Customizing:
O n l y
1.
55
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 2: Control Recipes/Control Instructions
SCM372
Copy control instruction destinations if possible. a)
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide: Production → Shop Floor Control→ Integration → Process Integration → Control Instructions/Work Instructions→ Destination of Control Instructions → Define and Set Up Control Instruction Destinations (for plant 1000)
O n l y
Double-click a destination to maintain its details. Create the following control instruction destinations for an external system for plant 1000 in Customizing.
S A P
Control Instruction Destinations to Be Created
00 to 09
0I to 9I
10 to 19
0J to 9J
20 to 29
0K to 9K
30
0L
Description/Address
GR## PCS / GR## Process Control System
As the destination type, select: 2 Download to ext. system, initiated by SAP process management.
U s e
See previous exercise
e r
I n t e r n a l
a)
P a r t n
Set the Creation with XSteps indicator.
S A P
Exercise Groups
U s e
P a r t n
e r
2.
I n t e r n a l
Choose New Entries to create a control instruction destination.
O n l y
56
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Control Recipes/Control Instructions – Settings and Processing
Lesson Summary
O n l y e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
You should now be able to: • Explain the possible types of control recipe destinations/control instruction destinations • Create a control recipe destination/control instruction destination in Customizing • Describe how to process control recipes/control instructions • Create, send, and monitor control recipes/control instructions for process orders/production orders
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
57
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit Summary
O n l y
SCM372
Unit Summary
O n l y e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
You should now be able to: • Explain the possible types of control recipe destinations/control instruction destinations • Create a control recipe destination/control instruction destination in Customizing • Describe how to process control recipes/control instructions • Create, send, and monitor control recipes/control instructions for process orders/production orders
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
58
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
e r P a r t n S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
S A P P a r t n
U s e
S A P
U s e e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r P a r t n S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
S A P P a r t n
U s e
S A P
U s e e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit Summary
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
59
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit Summary
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
60
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3 O n l y
Unit Overview XSteps – Structure, Elements, and Properties Standard XSteps XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions XSteps for External Systems
U s e
P a r t n
e r
• • • •
I n t e r n a l
XSteps
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
S A P U s e
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
61
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps – Structure, Elements, and Properties ........................ 63 Lesson: Standard XSteps........................................................... 80 Lesson: Cross-Plant and Multi-Language Standard-XStep-Repository ...... 95 Exercise 5: Cross-plant and Multi-language Standard-Xstep-Repository (optional)......................................................................... 103 Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions ............................... 112 Exercise 6: Outputs in PI Sheets ............................................. 147 Exercise 7: Outputs in Work Instructions.................................... 211 Exercise 8: Entries and Calculations in PI Sheets ......................... 275 Exercise 9: Entries and Calculations in Work Instructions ................ 315 Exercise 10: Entries and Process Messages in PI Sheets ............... 355 Exercise 11: Entries and Process Messages in Work Instructions ...... 377 Exercise 12: Function Calls in PI Sheets.................................... 399
e r
I n t e r n a l
Unit Contents
P a r t n
• •
Explain the structure, elements, and properties of XSteps Describe how to use standard XSteps from the standard XStep repository Maintain standard XSteps in the cross-plant standard-XStep-repository and in multiple languages Create XSteps for PI sheets/work instructions Create XSteps for process control systems
S A P
• • •
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Exercise 13: Function Calls in Work Instructions .......................... 415 Lesson: XSteps for Process Control Systems .................................. 432
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
62
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps – Structure, Elements, and Properties
Lesson: XSteps – Structure, Elements, and Properties Lesson Overview
O n l y e r
At your company, you want to use the functions of process management/process integration to process your process/production orders.
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Explain the structure, elements, and properties of XSteps
In XSteps (execution steps), you therefore specify the data structures for defining the structure of control recipes/control instructions and PI sheets/work instructions along with the related process message requests.
S A P U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
Finally, you familiarize yourself with XStep maintenance for PI sheets/work instructions and external systems.
P a r t n
You then familiarize yourself with the structure, elements, and properties of XSteps and the application of standard XSteps from the standard XStep repository.
S A P
First, you familiarize yourself with the elements and functions of PI sheets/work instructions.
U s e
Business Example
I n t e r n a l
Lesson Objectives
P a r t n
This lesson provides information about the structure, elements, and properties of XSteps.
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
63
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
You define XSteps for process orders/production orders in XStep trees in the underlying master recipes/routings.
I n t e r n a l
64
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
You can create multiple XStep trees in a master recipe/routing and use them in a process order/production order (for more information, see the Control Recipes/Control Instructions unit).
e r
An XStep tree can comprise XSteps, process instructions, and standard XStep references. An XStep in an XStep tree can, in turn, comprise further XSteps, SXS references, and XStep process instructions.
P a r t n
You use XSteps to define structures with which you can describe exactly how a process order/production order is produced. You can use XSteps to control data exchange with external systems or create interactive PI sheets/work instructions for process operators/machine operators in the production.
S A P
S A P
Figure 30: XSteps - Definition and Structure
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps – Structure, Elements, and Properties
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 31: Elements of an XStep Tree
S A P
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
65
O n l y
•
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
XSteps: An XStep can contain additional, subordinate XSteps. Properties of the superordinate XSteps, such as scope of generation, control recipe destination, and XStep context, are inherited by the subordinate XSteps as long as the properties specified are not explicitly defined in these subordinate XSteps. For example, if you have defined the Order XStep context in the superordinate XStep, this also applies to all subordinate XSteps until an XStep is reached for which a different XStep context has been defined. SXS references: An XStep can reference versions of a standard XStep. Standard XSteps are managed in the SXS repository. If you explode the reference, the system creates a copy of the valid version of the standard XStep in your XStep tree for the key date. XStep process instructions: You use process instructions to define outputs, entries, and control functions such as function calls and process messages for an XStep.
P a r t n
U s e
•
S A P
You can create the following elements under an XStep tree:
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 32: Elements of an XStep Tree (Example)
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 33: Properties of an XStep - General
For each XStep, you can specify properties that define the XStep in more detail.
66
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps – Structure, Elements, and Properties
General tab page: This tab page displays information about the properties, the status of the control recipe/control instruction, and administration data.
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 34: Properties of an XStep - Parameters
For every XStep parameter, you must specify whether it should:
e r
• • • • •
2010
Be assigned a parameter value from the higher-level XStep (category Input) Transfer its own value to an XStep parameter in the higher-level XStep (category Output) Be used within the same XStep, or its value be transferred to the subordinated XStep (category Local) Exchange a value with a higher-level XStep (category Exchange) Exchange a value with a subordinate XStep (category Exchange, Local)
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
67
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
For each XStep, you define parameters for contents with values that are not yet known or changeable. The XStep parameters are only valid for the XStep in which they have been defined, that is, they do not apply to subordinate or superordinate XSteps. If you want to use the values of these XStep parameters in a subordinate or superordinate XStep, you must forward them using a reference.
P a r t n
U s e
Parameters tab page:
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
You define the data type of a parameter by assigning a characteristic with the required format. The characteristic only defines the data type of the XStep parameter. It can, therefore, be used multiple times.
O n l y e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
Caution: Note that some business characteristics (such as PPPI_MATERIAL or PPPI_BATCH) contain input help and input validation. In the PI sheet/work instruction, input fields for which such characteristics are assigned as the data type can only be filled with a permitted value.
P a r t n
U s e
S A P
S A P
Figure 35: Properties of an XStep - Valuation
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
On the Valuation tab page, you specify a valuation type for each XStep parameter and, if necessary, you enter a value and a valuation symbol.
68
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps – Structure, Elements, and Properties
Depending on the category selected, you can valuate XStep parameters as follows: •
P a r t n
S A P
LIVE Parameter: You valuate using a live parameter when you want to exchange data between two different PI sheets/work instructions. In this case, you must set the LIVE Parameter indicator in the XStep parameter of both XSteps.
U s e
•
S A P
e r
•
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
None: The XStep parameter is not to be valuated, or is not to be valuated until a later processing stage. Automatically: The value of the XStep parameter is to be determined automatically by the system when a control recipe/control instruction is generated. Here, you must specify a valuation symbol. Depending on the current XStep context, the application automatically replaces the valuation symbols with concrete values. You can specify, for example, that the number of the header material is to be valuated automatically. Fixed Value: You define a fixed value. In addition, you can also specify a valuation symbol. This is useful, for example, if you want the system to automatically valuate a material number with the corresponding material description in the PI sheet/work instructions. Reference: You valuate an XStep parameter with the value of a different XStep parameter. When doing so, you can only reference XStep parameters that you have already defined in the subordinate or superordinate XStep. As a valuation, you specify an XStep parameter from the subordinate or superordinate XStep whose value is to be copied over into the current XStep parameter. Note that the categories of the two XStep parameters must be identical.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 36: Data Flow Between XSteps (Reference Valuation)
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
69
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Data exchange is only possible between XSteps of the same XStep tree. Within an XStep tree, the context of one XStep is not dependent on another. This means, for example, that identical parameter names can be used in different XSteps of an XStep tree without causing conflicts.
•
You define XStep parameters as input parameters, output parameters, or exchange parameters if you want to exchange with other XSteps of the same XStep tree. The system writes these XStep parameters to the parameter interface of the XStep. You define XStep parameters as local parameters if you want to use them within the same XStep or forward them to the XStep directly below in the hierarchy.
e r P a r t n
Parameter values are exchanged through a reference valuation.
U s e
You can exchange data directly between XSteps only if one is directly above or below the other in the hierarchy. If you want to exchange data between two XSteps that are on the same hierarchy level, you must first transfer the parameter value to a local parameter of the superordinate XStep, so that it can then be read by an input parameter of the subordinate XStep (see figure).
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 37: Permitted Valuation Types and Categories
Permitted valuation types for categories: Depending on the category you have defined for an XStep parameter, only certain valuation types are permitted. The figure above provides an overview of which combinations can be used.
70
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps – Structure, Elements, and Properties
Permitted categories for parameter references: If you have defined an XStep parameter to be assigned a value through a reference to another XStep parameter, the categories of the XStep parameters (subordinate and superordinate) must match. The figure above provides an overview of which combinations can be used.
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 38: Properties of an XStep - Generation
U s e
Use An XStep, which has been assigned a scope of generation, and its subordinated XSteps are used as a template for the XSteps that are to be generated. Using the scope of generation, you specify whether the system should copy the template automatically for the assigned scope during the generation.
e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
•
P a r t n
Generation tab page: On this tab page, you assign a scope of generation (for example, For All Reservation Items) to the XStep.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
71
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 39: XStep Generation: Example 1
Example
e r
S A P U s e
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
•
P a r t n
•
The control recipe/control instruction is to contain information about the material components used. These are entered in the material list for the order. The system can, therefore, automatically create the corresponding XSteps and fill them with all the material data. To do this, you define an XStep with scope of generation For all Ingredients, which is used as the template for the XSteps to be created. For this XStep, you maintain all required parameters (for example, a parameter to output the material description) and the context in which the generation is to be executed. During the generation process, the system creates a copy of the template automatically for each material component and valuates the parameters using the data of the respective material that is contained in the material list.
S A P
•
72
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps – Structure, Elements, and Properties
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 40: XStep Generation: Example 2
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
73
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Features •
Execution of XStep generation You can trigger the generation of XSteps as follows:
e r P a r t n
–
S A P
•
As soon as the generation has been executed, manual maintenance is restricted, which means that you can no longer maintain data that requires the XStep tree to be generated again. These restrictions also apply when new XSteps are inserted. System activities after the generation has been deleted If a control recipe/control instruction in an XStep tree is not productive, you can delete the generation for the XStep tree. In doing so, the system: 1. Resets all exploded SXS references 2. Deletes all copies 3. Deletes all valuations for parameters that are to be valuated automatically
e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
–
P a r t n
U s e
–
S A P
•
The system carries out the following activities during the generation process: 1. SXS references that have not yet been exploded are exploded 2. Templates are copied 3. Parameters that are to be valuated automatically are assigned values Restrictions after the generation process
U s e
•
When creating a control recipe/control instruction: In this case, the system triggers the generation automatically. The generated XSteps are inserted into the order. – When maintaining the XSteps in the XStep editor: If you want to check and, if necessary, change the generated XSteps before creating the control recipe/control instruction, you can trigger the generation in the process order manually. During this process, repetitions and parameter valuations are fixed, which means that subsequent changes to the order data are not taken into account in the XStep tree. To refresh the data, you must execute the Delete Generation function and repeat the generation. System activities during the generation process
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
–
74
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps – Structure, Elements, and Properties
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 41: Properties of an XStep - Destination
S A P
S A P
Destination tab page: On this tab page, you assign the XStep a destination type (external system or PI sheet/work instructions) or a concrete control recipe destination/control instruction destination. The destination is inherited down the XStep tree until a new concrete destination is found. The inheritance hierarchy then starts again from this concrete destination.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
75
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 42: Properties of an XStep - Context
S A P
S A P
Context tab page: On this tab page, you specify whether the XStep is to apply to the entire order, a certain operation, or a certain phase. The system requires the XStep context, for example, when generating XSteps and assigning values automatically. As with the destination, the context is inherited down the XStep tree until a new context is found. The inheritance hierarchy then starts again from this new context.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
76
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps – Structure, Elements, and Properties
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 43: XStep Process Instructions
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 44: XStep Process Instructions for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
77
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
For destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions, you define XStep process instructions for PI sheets/work instructions that are to be processed by process operators/machine operators. You maintain the elements of a process instruction using the context menu.
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 45: XStep Process Instructions for External Systems
U s e
•
e r
•
78
If the “Creation with XSteps” indicator is set for the destination, do not maintain any process instructions. In this case, the control recipes/control instructions are generated from the XStep parameters. If the “Creation with XSteps” indicator is not set, maintain the information for the external system in the characteristic overview of process instructions. For some external systems, you may also need to specify a process instruction type and a process instruction category.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
(*) Whether you have to maintain process instructions for the XStep depends on the Customizing settings for the destination:
P a r t n
You create XStep process instructions for external systems for destination type External System (type 2: Download to ext. system, initiated by SAP process management).
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps – Structure, Elements, and Properties
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the structure, elements, and properties of XSteps
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
79
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Lesson: Standard XSteps Lesson Overview O n l y
I n t e r n a l
This lesson provides information about using standard XSteps.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
e r
•
Describe how to use standard XSteps from the standard XStep repository
At your company, you want to use the functions of process management/process integration to process your process/production orders.
S A P
First, you familiarize yourself with the elements and functions of PI sheets/work instructions.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
Finally, you familiarize yourself with XStep maintenance for PI sheets/work instructions and for external systems.
P a r t n
You then familiarize yourself with the structure, elements, and properties of XSteps and the application of standard XSteps from the standard XStep repository.
S A P
In XSteps (execution steps), you therefore specify the data structures for defining the structure of control recipes/control instructions and PI sheets/work instructions along with the related process message requests.
U s e
P a r t n
Business Example
O n l y
80
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: Standard XSteps
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 46: Standard XSteps: Use and Structure
e r
S A P I n t e r n a l
•
Standard XSteps are XSteps that you create as master data in the standard XStep repository (SXS repository). You can reuse standard XSteps by creating a reference to them in the SXS repository from an application (master recipe, routing, process order, production order, or standard XStep). Using references to standard XSteps (SXS references) considerably reduces the effort required to maintain data. If standardized process flows change, for example, these changes do not have to be made in each individual master recipe. Instead, you make the changes centrally in the SXS repository. All master recipes that contain references to these standard XSteps are changed automatically.
P a r t n
U s e
•
S A P
Use
Structure of a Standard XStep
2010
A standard XStep can comprise multiple versions. Each version contains an XStep tree. You create XSteps within the XStep tree, which describe the exact contents of the standard XStep.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
81
O n l y
•
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 47: Standard XSteps: Versioning
S A P
•
e r
U s e
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
• •
You can create multiple versions of a standard XStep with different validity periods. Only one version of a standard XStep can be valid at any one time. If you explode an SXS reference from an application (for example, in the order when generating a control recipe/control instructions) or in the SXS repository itself, the system searches for the SXS version that is valid and released on the key date (that is, with the status Released or Released for Test). You can then choose any name for the version. The version names are only unique within a standard XStep.
S A P
Use
82
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: Standard XSteps
Automatic Number Assignment •
U s e
P a r t n
e r
•
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
In Customizing, you can specify that numbers are to be assigned automatically to the versions of a standard XStep. The first new version of a standard XStep is assigned the number 0001. If multiple versions of a standard XStep already exist, the system selects the newest version. If the key of the newest version comprises numbers, the system increases the number by one. If the system does not find any valid preceding numbers, it assigns the number 0001. If you have activated the automatic number assignment function, you cannot change the version numbers manually. If you want to change the version numbers manually, you must first undo the Customizing setting.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Figure 48: Automatic Calculation of the Validity Period
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
83
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Automatic Calculation of the Validity Period •
•
e r
–
• The valid-to date of the earlier version is changed to one day before the valid-from date of the new version. • The valid-to date of the new version is changed to one day before the valid-from date of the later version.
S A P
S A P
– –
U s e
P a r t n
–
If the valid-from date of the new version lies before the valid-from date of the old version, the valid-to date of the new version is changed to one day before the valid-from date of the new version. If a new version is released with a validity period that lies between those of two released versions, the above rule also applies:
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
In Customizing, you can specify that the system is to determine the valid-to date of a version. You cannot then enter the valid-to date manually. Only one version of a standard XStep can be valid at any one time. If you change the status of a version to Released or Released for Test, the system checks the validity of the versions. If a valid version already existed previously, the validity period of this version is limited to the valid-from date of the new version. Note the following points:
The date of the new version cannot not lie before the current date. The new and old versions cannot have the same valid-from date.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 49: SXS Version: Simple Status Management
84
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: Standard XSteps
Use •
e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
Each version of a standard XStep (SXS version) is assigned a status. The current status of an SXS version determines which business activities can be carried out for the version. In addition to the official approval procedure for standard XStep versions described later, a simple status management procedure also exists, which is described here first. You can use this status management procedure only if you are not working in an environment in which approvals are mandatory, since status changes cannot be fully documented and restricted to authorized persons.
P a r t n
U s e
S A P
S A P
The table above shows which operations can be performed depending on the status of an SXS version. For more detailed information, see the current version of the documentation at help.sap.com.
•
Status Released for Test: The version can only be changed to a limited extent if a version exists that has been released and released for testing; for example, you can no longer change the category of a parameter. Status Released: Limited changes are permitted (for example, a parameter description). The XStep tree of a version can still be changed, but you can no longer change the category of an XStep parameter, for example.
You can check and simulate all XSteps in the standard XStep repository regardless of their status.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
85
O n l y
•
e r
I n t e r n a l
Figure 50: SXS Version: Simple Status Management II
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
An archived version is still displayed in the standard XStep repository.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l S A P
S A P
Figure 51: SXS Version: Approval Procedure
Use
U s e
•
•
86
In Customizing, you have made the settings for the digital signature, set the SXS Version: Approval Procedure Active indicator, and specified whether a simple signature or a signature strategy for which multiple persons have signature authorization is to be used to set the Released, Approved, or Obsolete, Discarded statuses.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Prerequisites
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
The approval procedure for standard XSteps includes the monitored status management procedure and the digital signature for certain statuses so that changes to a version can be documented comprehensively. You can specify that a digital signature is required to set the Released, Approved and Obsolete, Discarded statuses. These statuses can then only be assigned by persons with signature authorization. In production, you can only use released and approved standard XStep versions. You cannot make any changes to released and approved standard XStep versions. If you need to make changes, you must create a copy of this standard XStep version and discard the original version.
P a r t n
•
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: Standard XSteps
Approval Procedure with Signature Strategy • •
O n l y
U s e
P a r t n
e r
•
I n t e r n a l
•
If you use signature strategies, the Running Signature Process status is used to show that the approval procedure is in process. The Running Signature Process status only allows you to continue the process that has started, that is, either the approval and release of an XStep or the discarding of an XStep. You can terminate the signature process. The XStep is then assigned the status it had before the signature process started. Once the last required signature has been provided, the Released, Approved or Obsolete, Discarded status is set.
S A P
S A P e r
The figure above shows which operations are allowed during the approval procedure depending on the status of an SXS version. For more detailed information, see the current version of the documentation at help.sap.com. The way this procedure differs from simple status management is highlighted in the figure above. (*) If you want to change released, approved XStep versions, you must copy these versions and use them as a template. Discard the old version and assign the Released, Approved status to the new version.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
87
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Figure 52: SXS Version: Approval Procedure II
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n
At the standard XStep level, you can generate a where-used list using the context menu. The where-used list checks whether the standard XStep is referenced in process orders, production orders, recipes, standard routings, or in the XStep repository.
U s e
S A P
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 53: Standard XSteps: Where-Used List
U s e
88
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
•
You can display the routing or order by double-clicking the symbol in the Application column. If you double-click a referenced standard XStep, the system navigates to the position in the standard XStep repository where the standard XStep is used. You can display the details for an order status by double-clicking the entry in the Order Status column.
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
P a r t n
Navigating to applications:
S A P
The result of the where-used list is shown as a table in the lower screen area of the XStep repository.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: Standard XSteps
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 54: SXS References and Parameterization
S A P U s e
XStep parameters on the interface of the standard XStep:
•
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
89
O n l y
•
If the version of a standard XStep is released or released for testing, the system automatically copies all XStep parameters of type Input, Output, and Exchange that are defined at the highest node in the XStep tree to the parameter interface of the standard XStep. Local XStep parameters are not affected by this. The XStep parameters remain at the interface of the standard XStep even if they are deleted after the version is released, or if the version no longer has status Released. After releasing an XStep, you must not make any further changes to these XStep parameters. If you have to make changes, these must be compatible, that is, the categories of the XStep parameters must stay the same. If the standard XStep is referenced, the parameters appear at the parameter interface of the SXS reference and can be valuated.
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
P a r t n
You can parameterize the referenced standard XSteps according to the respective requirements and assign relevant values to the parameters in the different routings/orders.
S A P
You can reference standard XSteps that you have created in the SXS repository in the master recipe, process order, routing, production order, and within another standard XStep.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 55: Explosion of a Standard SXS Reference
S A P
•
e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
•
As soon as an SXS reference is exploded in the process order, production order, master recipe, or routing, the system creates a copy of the version that is valid on the key date. The entire original XStep tree of the SXS is visible and can be changed in the master recipe and routing. Whether it can be changed in the order depends on the status of the control recipe/control instruction. In the order, an SXS reference is exploded automatically when the control recipe/control instruction is generated. For SXS references within the SXS repository, fixed values of XStep parameters are not displayed because these can vary depending on the version. The XStep parameter is then classified as non-valuated.
P a r t n
U s e
•
S A P
Explosion of an SXS reference:
90
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: Standard XSteps
P a r t n
Using the XML-based export and import functions, you can transfer contents from one XStep repository to another. This can be useful, for example, if you want to import data from your test system to your validation or production system.
U s e
S A P
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 56: Standard XSteps: Export and Import
U s e
Standard XStep folder Standard XStep Standard XStep version XStep tree Individual XStep nodes
e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
• • • • •
S A P
You can export the following objects of a standard XStep, save them locally, and then import them again:
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
91
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Conditions for carrying out an import: •
O n l y e r
•
U s e
P a r t n
For more detailed information about exporting and importing standard XSteps, see the documentation at help.sap.com.
I n t e r n a l
•
When importing XML files, the system creates new SXS objects (subtree structures) for the imported XML data. The new objects are assigned, as subobjects, to the repository object you have selected. When doing so, the system checks whether the hierarchical relationship between the objects is taken into account. To be able to reconstruct the exported subtree structures in the target system, you also have to export the data from referenced standard XSteps. When importing XML files, the system checks whether the files contain all information required to reconstruct the SXS referenced in the SXS reference nodes.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Use •
92
Sample standard XStep building blocks are available as downloads in the SAP Portal in the SAP Community Network.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Figure 57: Standard XSteps Library
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: Standard XSteps
Activities • •
O n l y
• •
e r
–
–
For more information about this topic, see the BPX Community for Manufacturing at https://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/sdn/bpx-manufacturing.
U s e
P a r t n
–
Flexible Building Blocks for Shop Floor Instruction Sheets – Basic Standard XStep Templates Flexible Building Blocks for Shop Floor Instruction Sheets – Standard XStep Library Flexible Building Blocks for Shop Floor Instruction Sheets – Advanced Standard XStep Templates
I n t e r n a l
•
To access the SAP Community Network, choose https://www.sdn.sap.com in the SAP Portal. Choose "Downloads" from the horizontal menu bar; this takes you to the Download Catalog. Choose Templates, Plug-ins, and Samples / for Manufacturing from the list of available downloads. Choose Core Manufacturing from the list of manufacturing downloads. Finally, choose Click here for download and then the following download links:
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
93
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe how to use standard XSteps from the standard XStep repository
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
94
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Cross-Plant and Multi-Language Standard-XStep-Repository
Lesson: Cross-Plant and Multi-Language Standard-XStepRepository O n l y
This lesson gives a short overview of the cross-plant and multi-language Standard-XStep-Repository available with Business Function LOG_PP_XS_01.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Hint: The exercise of this lesson is meant to be optional and should not be done before having finished all exercises of lesson XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Maintain standard XSteps in the cross-plant standard-XStep-repository and in multiple languages
Business Example
e r
U s e
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
You use XSteps and maintain standard XSteps in the SXS-Repository. Previously, you had to create your own standard XSteps for each plant. You can now use a cross-plant repository as the central storage facility for your XSteps instead of the plant-dependent repository. You can create a standard XStep once centrally and then use it in any number of plants. In this way, you can reduce the effort of maintaining master data and thus ensure a standardized way of working in all plants. Furthermore, previously you could create a standard XStep in one language only. It was not possible to translate the texts of a standard XStep into other languages. Now you can translate the texts of a standard XStep into any number of languages.
S A P
S A P
•
I n t e r n a l
Lesson Overview
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
95
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Business Function LOG_PP_XS_01
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 58: Business Function LOG_PP_XS_01
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 59: XSteps – Cross-Plant Repository and Language Dependency
96
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Cross-Plant and Multi-Language Standard-XStep-Repository
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
Figure 60: Customizing
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Cross-plant Standard-XStep-repository
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Figure 61: XSteps – Cross-Plant Repository: Old Situation
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
97
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 62: XSteps – Cross-Plant Repository: New Situation
S A P
S A P
Multi-language Standard-XStep-Repository
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 63: XSteps – Language Dependency: Translatable Text Elements
98
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Cross-Plant and Multi-Language Standard-XStep-Repository
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 64: XSteps – Language Dependency
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 65: XSteps – Language Dependency Translation Overview
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
99
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
U s e
Figure 66: XSteps – Language Dependency: Technical Lang. vs. Preferred Stand. Language I
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
100
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
O n l y
Figure 67: XSteps – Language Dependency: Technical Lang. vs. Preferred Stand. Language II
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Cross-Plant and Multi-Language Standard-XStep-Repository
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 68: XSteps – Language Dependency: Technical Lang. vs. Preferred Stand. Language III
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
101
O n l y
Figure 69: XSteps – Language Dependency: Technical Lang. vs. Preferred Stand. Language IV
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
102
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Cross-Plant and Multi-Language Standard-XStep-Repository
Exercise 5: Cross-plant and Multi-language Standard-Xstep-Repository (optional) Exercise Objectives O n l y
Business Example
Hint: The exercise of this lesson is meant to be optional and should not be done before having finished all exercises of lesson XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions.
S A P U s e
1.
Define Reference Plant for Cross-Plant Standard XStep Repository Plant 1100 has to be defined as reference plant for the following exercises.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
103
O n l y
Choose the following Customizing activity (transaction CMX22): (SPRO: SAP Reference IMG: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Management → Execution Steps (XSteps) → Standard XStep Repository → Define Reference Plant for Cross-Plant Standard XStep Repository)
e r
I n t e r n a l
In a first step you have to define a reference plant in Customizing to activate the cross-plant standard-XStep-repository. The reference plant is a technical aid that is needed only to enable the release of the necessary characteristic groups for process instructions and process messages.
P a r t n
You want to use the cross-plant standard-XStep repository to reduce the effort of maintaining your standard XSteps and thus to ensure a standardized way of working in all plants. In the cross-plant standard-XStep repository you can create standard XSteps once centrally and then use it in any number of plants.
S A P
Task 1:
U s e
P a r t n
e r
You maintain standard-XSteps in the cross-plant standard-XStep-repository and in several languages.
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Maintain standard-XSteps in the cross-plant standard-XStep-repository and in several languages.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Task 2: In your ERP system, you find for historical reasons standard XSteps (SXS) in the plant-dependent standard-XStep-repositories (CMXSV) and in the cross-plant standard-XStep-repository (CMXSVN).
O n l y
You also check, that after having defined a reference plant in Customizing, you can only define new SXS References in the XStep editor of your plans with reference to SXS of the cross-plant repository.
To adopt constituents of a plant-dependent repository in the cross-plant repository, you must create this data in the cross-plant repository again. You can use the XML export and import functions for this purpose. Choose transaction CMXSVN (SAP menu: Logistics → Production-Process → Master Data → Cross-Plant Standard-XStep-Repository) to enter the Cross-Plant Standard-XStep-Repository. In the cross-plant repository you find for example a folder DPP65 which contains cross-plant SXS for this training course.
U s e
Choose transaction CMXSV (SAP menu: Logistics → Production-Process → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository) to enter the Standard XStep Repositories for plant 1000 and then for plant 1100.
3.
Choose transaction CA02 (SAP menu: Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →Routings → Standard Routings → Display) to change the standard routing for
Continued on next page
104
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
You cannot find SXS that have been maintained in the cross-plant repository (CMXSV). For example, you cannot find folder DPP65.
e r
I n t e r n a l
2.
P a r t n
You cannot find SXS that have been maintained in the plant-dependent repositories (CMXSV).
S A P
S A P
1.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
But still existing SXS References which were defined with reference to a plant-dependent repository (CMXSV) before activating the cross-plant repository will remain valid.
I n t e r n a l
You check, that the cross-plant standard-XStep-repository (CMXSVN) is a separated repository. XSteps maintained in the cross-plant repository are not available in the plant-dependent repositories and vice versa.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Cross-Plant and Multi-Language Standard-XStep-Repository
4.
Material:
T-SCM372-PP-##
Plant:
1000
Group counter:
9
Choose symbol XSteps or Goto → XSteps to enter the XStep editor.
O n l y
Choose the context menu for the XStep Tree (right mouse click) and then Create → SXS Reference. Double click the new SXS Reference and go to the Reference tab.
e r
Only SXS of the cross-plant repository can be assigned as reference.
I n t e r n a l
In the XStep editor, create a new SXS Reference:
You have production plants in several countries. Therefore you translate your standard XSteps in several languages.
S A P
You can check in a translation overview what elements of a SXS has not been translated yet
U s e
Choose the following Customizing activity: (SPRO: SAP Reference IMG: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Management → Execution Steps (XSteps) → Standard XStep Repository → Define Preferred Default Language)
e r
Language EN is defined as preferred language. 2.
For the following exercise steps you have to logon to your ERP system three times: Logon in languages EN (English), DE (German), and FR (French).
3.
For each language: Choose transaction CMXSVN (SAP menu: Logistics → Production-Process → Master Data → Cross-Plant Standard-XStep-Repository) to enter the Cross-Plant Standard-XStep-Repository. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
105
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Define Preferred Default Language
P a r t n
1.
S A P
You normally create SXS in language EN English. Therefore you define language EN as your preferred language in Customizing. Texts that not have been translated in all other languages yet will be displayed in English as default.
U s e
P a r t n
Task 3:
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Display the texts of all translatable elements with respect to folder DPP65 in the translation overview. Choose the context menu for folder DPP65 (right mouse click) and then Display Translations.
O n l y
Finally simulate the work instruction / PI sheet for SXS Cross-plant & multi-language example SXS.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Choose the context menu for the XStep Tree (right mouse click) and then Simulate.
I n t e r n a l
You get an overview of all existing translations in an ALV grid view. A Missing Translation flag is set if a text is maintained for any other language but not for the current language. You can jump to an element to be translated by double click.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
106
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Cross-Plant and Multi-Language Standard-XStep-Repository
Solution 5: Cross-plant and Multi-language Standard-Xstep-Repository (optional) Task 1: O n l y e r
In a first step you have to define a reference plant in Customizing to activate the cross-plant standard-XStep-repository. The reference plant is a technical aid that is needed only to enable the release of the necessary characteristic groups for process instructions and process messages. Choose the following Customizing activity (transaction CMX22): (SPRO: SAP Reference IMG: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Management → Execution Steps (XSteps) → Standard XStep Repository → Define Reference Plant for Cross-Plant Standard XStep Repository)
U s e
P a r t n
1.
I n t e r n a l
You want to use the cross-plant standard-XStep repository to reduce the effort of maintaining your standard XSteps and thus to ensure a standardized way of working in all plants. In the cross-plant standard-XStep repository you can create standard XSteps once centrally and then use it in any number of plants.
Define Reference Plant for Cross-Plant Standard XStep Repository S A P
S A P
Plant 1100 has to be defined as reference plant for the following exercises. a)
---
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
107
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Task 2: In your ERP system, you find for historical reasons standard XSteps (SXS) in the plant-dependent standard-XStep-repositories (CMXSV) and in the cross-plant standard-XStep-repository (CMXSVN).
O n l y
You also check, that after having defined a reference plant in Customizing, you can only define new SXS References in the XStep editor of your plans with reference to SXS of the cross-plant repository.
To adopt constituents of a plant-dependent repository in the cross-plant repository, you must create this data in the cross-plant repository again. You can use the XML export and import functions for this purpose. Choose transaction CMXSVN (SAP menu: Logistics → Production-Process → Master Data → Cross-Plant Standard-XStep-Repository) to enter the Cross-Plant Standard-XStep-Repository. In the cross-plant repository you find for example a folder DPP65 which contains cross-plant SXS for this training course.
U s e
a)
Choose transaction CMXSV (SAP menu: Logistics → Production-Process → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository) to enter the Standard XStep Repositories for plant 1000 and then for plant 1100.
a) 3.
---
Choose transaction CA02 (SAP menu: Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings →Routings → Standard Routings → Display) to change the standard routing for Continued on next page
108
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
You cannot find SXS that have been maintained in the cross-plant repository (CMXSV). For example, you cannot find folder DPP65.
e r
I n t e r n a l
2.
---
P a r t n
You cannot find SXS that have been maintained in the plant-dependent repositories (CMXSV).
S A P
S A P
1.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
But still existing SXS References which were defined with reference to a plant-dependent repository (CMXSV) before activating the cross-plant repository will remain valid.
I n t e r n a l
You check, that the cross-plant standard-XStep-repository (CMXSVN) is a separated repository. XSteps maintained in the cross-plant repository are not available in the plant-dependent repositories and vice versa.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Cross-Plant and Multi-Language Standard-XStep-Repository
Material:
T-SCM372-PP-##
Plant:
1000
Group counter:
9
a)
---
Choose symbol XSteps or Goto → XSteps to enter the XStep editor. In the XStep editor, create a new SXS Reference: Choose the context menu for the XStep Tree (right mouse click) and then Create → SXS Reference.
e r
Double click the new SXS Reference and go to the Reference tab.
a)
---
U s e
P a r t n
Only SXS of the cross-plant repository can be assigned as reference.
Task 3:
S A P
You normally create SXS in language EN English. Therefore you define language EN as your preferred language in Customizing. Texts that not have been translated in all other languages yet will be displayed in English as default.
U s e I n t e r n a l
e r
Choose the following Customizing activity: (SPRO: SAP Reference IMG: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Management → Execution Steps (XSteps) → Standard XStep Repository → Define Preferred Default Language)
P a r t n
You can check in a translation overview what elements of a SXS has not been translated yet
S A P
You have production plants in several countries. Therefore you translate your standard XSteps in several languages.
1.
I n t e r n a l
4.
O n l y
S A P
Define Preferred Default Language
a) 2.
---
For the following exercise steps you have to logon to your ERP system three times: Logon in languages EN (English), DE (German), and FR (French). a)
--Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
109
O n l y
Language EN is defined as preferred language.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
3.
For each language: Choose transaction CMXSVN (SAP menu: Logistics → Production-Process → Master Data → Cross-Plant Standard-XStep-Repository) to enter the Cross-Plant Standard-XStep-Repository.
O n l y
Choose the context menu for folder DPP65 (right mouse click) and then Display Translations.
e r
You get an overview of all existing translations in an ALV grid view. A Missing Translation flag is set if a text is maintained for any other language but not for the current language. You can jump to an element to be translated by double click.
U s e
P a r t n
Finally simulate the work instruction / PI sheet for SXS Cross-plant & multi-language example SXS. Choose the context menu for the XStep Tree (right mouse click) and then Simulate. a)
I n t e r n a l
Display the texts of all translatable elements with respect to folder DPP65 in the translation overview.
---
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
110
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Cross-Plant and Multi-Language Standard-XStep-Repository
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Maintain standard XSteps in the cross-plant standard-XStep-repository and in multiple languages
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
111
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
O n l y
Business Example
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Create XSteps for PI sheets/work instructions
P a r t n
In XSteps (execution steps), you therefore specify the data structures for defining the structure of control recipes/control instructions and PI sheets/work instructions along with the connected process message requests.
S A P
You then familiarize yourself with the structure, elements, and properties of XSteps and the use of standard XSteps from the standard XStep repository.
P a r t n
Finally, you familiarize yourself with XStep maintenance for PI sheets/work instructions and external systems.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
First, you familiarize yourself with the elements and functions of PI sheets/work instructions.
U s e
At your company, you want to use the process management and process integration functions to process your process and production orders.
I n t e r n a l
Lesson Objectives
e r
Lesson Overview
O n l y
112
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 70: XStep Process Instructions for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
S A P
S A P
For destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions, you define XStep process instructions for PI sheets/work instructions that are to be processed by process operators/machine operators. You use the context menu to maintain the elements of a process instruction.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 71: XStep Process Instructions – Features
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
113
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
You can use XStep process instructions in the PI sheets/work instructions to define the following contents and functions: •
•
e r
Data format
•
For most XStep process instructions, a characteristic that defines the data format of the value is suggested by default. If you want to use a different format, you can select a different characteristic from the input help or create a new one. You can create your own characteristics in Customizing for Production Planning for Process Industries under Process Instructions → Process Instruction Characteristics → Define Characteristics for Process Instructions.
U s e
P a r t n
•
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
Outputs: You can output information using different data types such as long texts, numeric values, and images. Inputs: You can use input fields to request production-relevant data that the process operators/machine operators are to enter in the PI sheet/work instructions. Control data: You can use control data to request process messages, make calculations, call functions, and read and write data points to and from other applications using manufacturing data access, for example.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 72: Long Text Outputs – Exercise Example
114
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Output of Long Text •
O n l y
U s e
P a r t n
e r
•
I n t e r n a l
•
This function provides you with a selection of characteristics, such as PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT, which support the long text format. You can define a text of your choice in the SAPscript editor. The long text is displayed in the left-hand area of the PI sheet/work instructions. If you also want to use HTML fragments to format your long text, you can choose characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML (HTML Fragment). You can use this characteristic to include a user-defined HTML source text. You can create a note for characteristic PPPI_NOTE that can be shown and hidden in the PI sheet/work instructions.
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n e r
Output a Character String •
2010
The data format of characteristic PPPI_SHORT_TEXT is suggested by default. In this case, you can output a title and a user-defined alphanumeric value of 30 characters.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
115
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 73: Outputs of Different Types – Exercise Example
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Output a Numerical Value •
Output a Date
e r
•
The data format of characteristic PPPI_EVENT_DATE is suggested by default. In this case, you can output a description and a date in the format DD.MM.YYYY.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
The data format of characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE is suggested by default. In this case, you can output a numerical value with 10 digits and 3 decimal places. You can also display a unit of measure for a numeric value. If you output the unit of measure as a character string using characteristic PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE, the unit of measure is displayed to the right of the output field.
•
The data format of characteristic PPPI_EVENT_TIME is suggested by default. In this case, you can output a description and a fixed time in the format HH.MM.SS.
S A P
•
U s e
•
116
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
•
You can include and display images in the format GIF, JPG, BMP, or AVI (video). To do this, you specify a URL at which the image file is stored, for example, http://help.sap.com/banner/saplogo_a.gif. The image is displayed in the left-hand area of the PI sheet/work instructions. The following characteristics are provided for defining a hyperlink to the corresponding file: PPPI_IMAGE_AVI Image in AVI Format (video) PPPI_IMAGE_BMP Image in BMP Format PPPI_IMAGE_GIF Image in GIF Format PPPI_IMAGE_JPG Image in JPG Format.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Output an Image
P a r t n
•
Enter the address of the Internet or intranet page that you want to reference, for example, http://help.sap.com (SAP Help Portal). The link is displayed in the left-hand area of the PI sheet/work instructions. The following characteristics are provided for defining a hyperlink: PPPI_HYPERLINK Hyperlink PPPI_HYPERLINK_ASCII Hyperlink to ASCII Document PPPI_HYPERLINK_HTML Hyperlink to HTML DocumentPPPI_HYPERLINK_XML Hyperlink to XML Document
S A P
Output a Hyperlink
U s e
P a r t n
Output a Time
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Output an Object •
O n l y e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
•
You can also include any other object, such as an MS Word document. To do this you specify a URL at which the file is stored for characteristic PPPI_OBJECT (Any Object) If you use the standard XSL style sheet, characteristic PPPI_OBJECT leads to HTML element . Example: Characteristic: PPPI_OBJECT, value: \\server\folder\document.doc
P a r t n
U s e
S A P
S A P
Figure 74: Outputting Parameters (1) – Exercise Example
•
2010
In the PI sheet/work instructions, you can display XStep parameter values that you have defined in the XStep. To do this, you enter a description and the name of the XStep parameter. The example in the figure shows the output of local, input, and output parameters for a hierarchical XStep structure. Lesson XSteps – Structure, Elements, and Properties describes the data exchange between XStep parameters in more detail.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
117
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
•
e r
Outputting Parameters
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
I n t e r n a l
e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
U s e
P a r t n
Figure 75: Outputting Parameters (2) – Exercise Example
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 76: Outputs with Text Symbols – Exercise Example
118
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Text symbols • •
O n l y
U s e
P a r t n
e r
•
I n t e r n a l
•
You can use XStep parameters as variables for outputting individual parts of a text. To do this, you define valuation symbols && for the XStep parameters, the values of which are to replace individual parts of a text (titles, short texts, long texts). In the figure, for example, the value of parameter LV_TITLE_1 is used for the title of a long text output and the value of parameter LV_INSTR is used to output a part of the long text. Parameters to which a long text is assigned as a value (parameters LV_INSTR and IV_INSTR in the figure), can only be output in a long text of characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 77: Outputs in Tables (1) – Exercise Example
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
119
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Tables •
e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
You can use process instructions of type Repeated Data Request to output elements of a set of process instructions as a table in the PI sheet/work instructions. To do this, you create control data of type Table for the process instruction, which causes type Repeated Data Request to be set as default, or you manually set the type of data request in the grouping of a process instruction.
P a r t n
U s e
S A P
S A P
Figure 78: Outputs in Tables (2) – Exercise Example
•
•
120
In the PI sheet/work instructions, input and output fields and functions that you have defined in XStep process instructions of type Simple Data Request can be output as a table. This enables you to display information of the same type in a way that is structured and easy to understand. In this function, all XStep process instructions that have the same logical structure as regards input and output fields are grouped together. For repeated data requests, however, a process instruction is copied and output in a table. Example: By grouping generated XStep process instructions in which the material components are copied automatically, you receive a clearly laid out material list in the PI sheet/work instructions.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
•
e r
Lists
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Prerequisites •
So that the system can group XStep process instructions of the same type and output them as a list in the PI sheet/work instructions, the XStep process instructions must fulfill the following conditions:
O n l y
U s e
P a r t n
e r
–
They must be of type Simple Data Request. They must have the same logical structure as regards input and output fields and control data. No text symbols can be used in the labels.
I n t e r n a l
– –
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n e r
Entries You can use XStep process instructions to mark input fields in the PI sheet/work instructions that a process operator is to fill with values. The data types available for input fields are listed above in figure XStep Process Instructions – Features. For more detailed information, see the documentation at help.sap.com.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
121
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 79: Entry with Default Value and Value Check – Exercise Example
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
You can also define the following functions for the value to be entered: •
Default value
–
When the PI sheet/work instructions are opened, the input field is filled with the defined default value. The default value is displayed in blue. It is not displayed in black until you have accepted it by choosing Enter or changed it. You can define a default value in the XStep process instruction as follows: As a fixed value
e r
As a parameter value: Enter a parameter whose value is to be copied as the default value. You define parameters as default values if you want to copy the default value from the superordinate XStep of the same XStep tree. Input validation –
If you want to restrict the value range for a concrete input value, define input validation in the XStep process instructions. In the input validation, you specify:
S A P
Þ Whether invalid values are to be copied to the PI sheet/work instructions and, if so, how they are to be copied You can specify the validation rule for the input validation as follows in the XStep process instructions: Þ As a check formula (numeric values) Þ As a check function (all values)
Þ Always Accept Þ Never Accept Þ Only with Signature (options: without a password check, with digital signature, with signature strategy, with special authorization). You can use a process message to confirm the entered value.
122
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
You can select the following options for accepting invalid values:
e r
–
P a r t n
U s e
–
S A P
Þ The validation rule used to check the input value in the PI sheet/work instructions
U s e
P a r t n
•
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
–
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Calculations In the PI sheet/work instructions, you can make calculations based on a calculation formula. If required, you can use a process message to confirm a calculated value.
S A P
Prerequisites/Features –
You must have already defined the following parameters for the XStep:
U s e
Þ Optional: Parameter into which the calculated value is to be written •
Making the Calculation You can make the calculation as follows in the PI sheet/work instructions:
e r
Þ Manually: Choose the corresponding symbol in the PI sheet/work instructions. Þ Event-controlled: In the XStep process instruction, you can specify an event of internal interface Manufacturing Data Access that automatically triggers the calculation as soon as the specified event occurs.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
123
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
–
P a r t n
Þ Parameters that you use as variables in the calculation formula (for example, VALUE1+VALUE2)
S A P
•
U s e
P a r t n
Figure 80: Calculating a Value – Exercise Example
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 81: Table Entry, Calculation, and Signature – Exercise Example
XStep Parameters for Table Values
S A P U s e
–
–
124
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
–
One single row value of a table column only: Add the affix [1], [2], [3] , and so on after the parameter names for each table row, for example, LT_PARAM[1], LT_PARAM[2], LT_PARAM[3]. The total of all row values contained in the table column: Add the affix [SUM] to the parameter name, for example LT_PARAM[SUM]. The number of row values contained in the table column: Add the affix [COUNT] to the parameter name, for example LT_PARAM[COUNT].
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
P a r t n
•
If you want to reuse values from a table (repeated data request) using XStep parameters, you must also set the "Tabular Value" indicator on the "Parameters" tab page when you define the parameter. This XStep parameter is then valid for all values of a table column. You can, for example, use XStep parameters for table values in calculation formulas, transfer them to a function module, or output them in another table in the PI sheet/work instructions. For XStep parameters for table values, you can use the parameter extension to transfer the following values:
S A P
•
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Entering a Signature for Validating a Process Step or Table Row (for more information, see lesson PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions)
•
•
S A P
S A P
•
U s e
P a r t n
e r
•
In these cases, you classify the signature as an input value in the normal step sequence of the PI sheet/work instructions or in the last table column. The data format of characteristic PPPI_SIGNATURE is suggested by default. In this case, you can enter a signature in this input field in the PI sheet/work instructions or in a table row. Entries and formula results of a work step or table row are checked for completeness when the signature is entered and are then closed, which means that you can no longer change values and that corresponding messages are transferred to process management/process integration so they can be sent. If you have set the Digital Signature indicator at the control recipe destination/control instruction and also defined a signature strategy if necessary, the system separately checks the signature entered in the input field. In an XStep process instruction, on the Value Input tab page, you can also specify that you want to use an alternative signature strategy to that defined in the destination. Signature strategies can be carried out as synchronous or asynchronous signature processes. If the asynchronous signature is the last input field in the PI sheet/work instructions, the PI sheet/work instructions are automatically closed. You can specify that a user requires a specific maintenance authorization for the work instructions to be able to provide the signature. The system then checks whether the activity specified in the process instruction is defined in authorization object C_CRPI_BER in the user master record.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
125
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Requesting a process message
e r
U s e
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
• •
In process instructions, you can define the request of process messages. In the process instruction, you specify the message category that you want to request and choose appropriate valuations for the message characteristics. All mandatory message characteristics must be valuated. The figure shows the request of a message of category TEXT-99 as an example. The message characteristics are valuated using parameter values of the XStep. The value for parameter LV_INSTR is entered in the PI sheet/work instructions. The other parameters are valuated automatically.
P a r t n
• •
S A P
S A P
Figure 82: Requesting a Long Text Message – Exercise Example
126
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 83: Confirmation and Material Consumption – Exercise Example
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 84: Material Receipt – Exercise Example
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
127
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 85: Function Calls – Exercise Examples
S A P
•
•
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
You can use this function to call certain SAP functions from the PI sheet/work instructions or to carry out certain calculations and checks in the PI sheet/work instructions. The function call is realized by ABAP function modules that have been created for these purposes. The SAP system contains a series of predefined function modules that you can use in the function call. You can also define your own function modules. You can find an overview of the predefined function modules in the documentation at help.sap.com. Executing the Function
P a r t n
U s e
•
S A P
Function Calls
The function can be executed as follows:
–
–
128
Manually: Choose the corresponding pushbutton in the PI sheet/work instructions. Event-controlled: You can specify an event of internal interface Manufacturing Data Access that triggers the function automatically. The system executes the function automatically as soon as the event is triggered. Manually and event-controlled: You can execute the function manually, and in parallel to this the function can be triggered automatically by a defined event. For this you specify an event.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
–
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 86: Live Parameters – Example
S A P
•
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
•
You use valuation by a live parameter if you want to exchange data between two different PI sheets/work instructions. In this case, you must set the LIVE Parameter indicator in the XStep parameter of both XSteps. The data exchange is made technically possible automatically by internal interface Manufacturing Data Access.
S A P
Live Parameters
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
129
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 87: Manufacturing Data Access
S A P
The figure shows the applications currently registered as services on the interface.
U s e
This allows values from one or more data points to be read or written synchronously: •
I n t e r n a l
e r
•
On request (for example, if the user chooses a pushbutton in the PI sheet/work instructions) Event-controlled, which means that when applications are running, an event triggers the automatic reading or writing of data without requiring user interaction
P a r t n
All applications that are registered as services on the interface can make data points and events available to the other services and receive these from the other services.
S A P
Internal interface Manufacturing Data Access makes it possible to exchange data and events between different applications.
Events can also be processed if there are different system logons running in parallel. O n l y
130
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 88: PI Sheets/Work Instructions and Manufacturing Data Access
S A P
•
U s e
•
Read values of data points from another application in the PI sheet/work instructions Write values from the PI sheet/work instructions to data points of another application In the PI sheet/work instructions, subscribe to external events of another application or internal events of the PI sheet/work instructions
–
The PI sheet is then automatically informed of these events as soon as they occur. This allows you to, for example, subscribe to value changes. In addition, events can contain parameters that you can read while processing an event.
e r
I n t e r n a l
–
P a r t n
•
S A P
You can use internal interface Manufacturing Data Access to:
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
131
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 89: Subscribing to Events
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 90: Manufacturing Data Access – Reading SYS (Example)
The figure shows an example in which data points from application SYS System Information are read in the PI sheet/work instructions.
132
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
The data points are read automatically via internal event DOCUMENT.GENERATED during the generation of the PI sheet/work instructions and can also be read manually by choosing a pushbutton.
In a second PI sheet, the sending of category DP using event MDA:BROADCAST:DP triggers data points to be read from applications MDA and SYS.
P a r t n
The value that was sent for category DP is read together with other parameters for category DP from application MDA.
e r
U s e
The figure shows an example in which a parameter value is sent from a PI sheet/work instructions to application MDA Generic Services with an MDA category DP.
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 91: Manufacturing Data Access – Reading and Writing MDA (Example 1)
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
133
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 92: Manufacturing Data Access – Reading and Writing MDA (Example 2)
S A P U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
The value that was sent for category DP is read together with other parameters for category DP from application MDA.
P a r t n
In the application Automatic Process Message Creation, the sending of category DP using event MDA:BROADCAST:DP triggers the automatic creation of a process message. Data points are copied from applications MDA and SYS in corresponding process message characteristics (see also unit Process Messages).
S A P
The figure shows an example in which a parameter value is sent from a PI sheet/work instructions to application MDA Generic Services with an MDA category DP.
O n l y
134
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P
Figure 93: Manufacturing Data Access – Reading and Writing MDA (Example with Process Manufacturing Cockpit)
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
135
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Process manufacturing cockpit •
• • •
•
Include cockpits in PI sheets/work instructions or in other cockpits without restrictions – Use cockpits as independent data entry screens Examples of possible application areas for cockpits: –
S A P
The same cockpit can be used simultaneously.
S A P
–
As a data entry screen with which you can, for example, enter measured values or malfunction reports and send this data to plant maintenance using a process message As a toolbox with which you make information and function calls that are required time after time available at a central point.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
–
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
The figure shows an example in which a parameter value is sent from a process manufacturing cockpit to application MDA Generic Services with an MDA category DP. Process manufacturing cockpits are screen templates that you define in Customizing using process instruction characteristics. Maintenance using XSteps is not supported. Cockpits are registered as services on the Manufacturing Data Access interface. Cockpits have the same basic functionality as PI sheets/work instructions. You can:
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 94: OPC
136
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
O n l y
OPC clients and OPC servers are currently PC-based systems on which a Microsoft operating system runs.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
You can get further information on the OPC Foundation Internet sites http://www.opcfoundation.org and www.opceurope.org.
I n t e r n a l
OPC stands for OLE for Process Control and Openness, Productivity, and Connectivity and is an industry standard that uses COM/DCOM technology to define manufacturer-independent interfaces for the industrial usage area. The OPC standard was designed especially for the process control level. OPC servers enable you to access different data sources (for example, process control systems, memory programmable controls, temperature sensors) and thus provide process data which can be requested by OPC clients. SAP ECC, with the component SAP ODA, is an OPC client that can communicate with OPC servers. This considerably simplifies the data exchange between applications.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
SAP R/3 Enterprise SCM Extension 1.10 (EA_APPL 110) provides you with the componentSAP OPC Data Access (SAP ODA). It supports the data exchange between SAP ECC and process control systems of different manufacturers. You can use SAP ODA to automatically write data points and events in the SAP ECC System from the process control level, or to receive them on request and write values.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
137
O n l y
Figure 95: OPC Specifications and the Scope of SAP ODA
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
SAP ODA is based on the industry standard OPC (OLE for Process Control), which defines manufacturer-independent interfaces for process control technology. OPC servers provide process data that can be requested by OPC clients. SAP ECC is an OPC client that communicates with OPC servers. One part of SAP ODA is the SAP ODA Connector, which is installed on a PC outside the SAP System.
O n l y e r
The OPC Foundation defines various specifications. SAP ODA currently supports the following OPC server functions: •
OPC Data Access, which means
•
Synchronous reading and writing of values from any and into any OPC Data Access servers – Subscribing value changes from OPC Data Access servers OPC alarms/events, that is,
subscribing events from OPC alarms/events servers and exiting events
S A P
S A P
The OPC functions supported by SAP ODA provide a general interface that is available for all SAP applications. This interface is currently being used in the process management/process integration area.
U s e
P a r t n
–
I n t e r n a l
To use SAP ODA, you do not have to make any additional developments or use any middleware. In contrast to the existing PI-PCS interface, for SAP ODA you do not need to have the individual process control systems certified by SAP. Therefore the installation and configuration overhead is very small.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 96: SAP OPC Data Access
138
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
The SAP ECC system, SAP ODA Connector, OPC server, and a subsidiary system communicate as follows:
•
The SAP ECC system sends a data request by RFC, for example, to the SAP ODA Connector, which (from the perspective of the SAP ECC system) acts as an RFC server. The connector converts the RFC call into an OPC-compatible call and sends it to the corresponding OPC server by COM. From the OPC point of view, it is acting as an OPC Client. The data requested is returned to the connector the same way via COM, and from there via RFC to the SAP ECC system.
e r
DCOM mechanisms are not currently supported by SAP ODA. Therefore, the SAP ODA Connector and OPC server must run on a host. However, any number of SAP ODA Connectors can be installed on different hosts.
U s e
P a r t n
You can download the SAP ODA Connector from the SAP Service Marketplace.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 97: PI Sheet/Work Instructions, PI-PCS, and SAP ODA
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
139
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 98: Example: Weighing System
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 99: SAP ODA and PI-PCS
The SAP ODA and PI-PCS interfaces provide different communication options and thus complement one another.
140
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 100: Process Instructions with Commands S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
141
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Commands (functions that can be executed automatically) •
•
You can use these functions to define conditions that automatically trigger the execution of functions such as Deactivate Process Instruction or Lock Process Step in the context menu. Example:
O n l y e r
–
S A P
You can define conditions for executing commands as follows:
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
In a formula In a function module In the form of a manufacturing event
P a r t n
– – –
S A P
•
The figure lists the possible commands. Activities are used to control whether the command is executed automatically, cannot be executed, or can be executed manually. Conditions
U s e
P a r t n
•
You want the entry of quantities of a certain material to depend on the current pH value of the mixture in the vessel. It must only be possible to enter the material quantity once the process operator has read a pH value of less than seven (< 7). – After the PI sheet/work instructions are opened, the input field for entering the material quantity would initially be locked. Only once a pH value of less than seven has been entered in the previous input field is the input field for the material quantities unlocked, making the field input-ready. Features and Activities
I n t e r n a l
–
O n l y
Figure 101: Layout of a PI Sheet/Work Instructions
142
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
You can freely define the layout of PI sheets/work instructions and process manufacturing cockpits. If you have not specified the corresponding declaration, the system automatically uses the default layout for PI sheets/work instructions or process manufacturing cockpits.
O n l y e r
The following storage locations are currently provided in the SAP system for document management purposes: •
Business Document Service: If you are using SAP Basis Release 4.6C, manage your documents in the BDS when defining your own stylesheets.
Web Repository: •
You can use the Web Repository in the following situations:
S A P
–
Release 4.6C as of SP45 Release 4.6C and Support Package earlier than SP45, but with SAP Note 481463 installed in the system and Internet Explorer 6.0 Releases higher than 4.6C (especially if these work with Unicode)
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
Detailed information about defining layouts is provided in the SAP documentation at help.sap.com.
S A P
– –
U s e
P a r t n
–
I n t e r n a l
To be able to use an individual layout for PI sheets/work instructions and process manufacturing cockpits, you must create and manage a series of files in the SAP system. You must store these files centrally in the SAP system so that the system can access the corresponding XSL stylesheet and other files when generating the PI sheet/work instructions or process manufacturing cockpit.
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
143
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
S A P
S A P
You use characteristic PPPI_LAYOUT to change the default layout or to replace it with another layout. If you are using XSteps:
U s e
•
For the XStep, define a process instruction in which you enter characteristic PPPI_LAYOUT in the characteristic overview. Specify an XML definition in the long text of characteristic PPPI_LAYOUT. The figure shows an example of an XML definition.
•
•
144
In the master recipe, you can define characteristic PPPI_LAYOUT in a process instruction of type 0 at the beginning of a control recipe. In Customizing, you can define characteristic PPPI_LAYOUT in a process instruction category of type 0, and configure it in the control recipe destination as a process instruction to be generated. Store the XML definition in the long text of characteristic PPPI_LAYOUT.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
•
e r
For PI sheets for process orders that are still maintained using the old method of process instruction maintenance:
P a r t n
•
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 102: Defining Layouts in PI Sheets/Work Instructions – PPPI_LAYOUT
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
For cockpits: • •
You can define characteristic PPPI_LAYOUT in the first process instruction (of type 0) in the Customizing of the cockpit definition. Store the XML definition in the long text of characteristic PPPI_LAYOUT.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
Some of this additional data is: • •
•
Always generated automatically (for example, the order number) Only generated automatically if it is contained in the control recipe/control instruction or in the cockpit as valuated characteristics (for example, the short or long text for a phase, table titles) Only generated automatically if the corresponding process message characteristics are declared in the long text of characteristics PPPI_LAYOUT
To generate characteristics that are not generated automatically in the XML document, enter one of the XML definitions shown in the figure in the layout definition in the long text of characteristic PPPI_LAYOUT.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
145
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
In the default layout, additional information is output in the form of metadata using the standard XSL stylesheet on header, phase/operation, and instruction level (for example, the order number in the header, the phase/operation number in the phase/operation, the instruction text in the instruction).
P a r t n
U s e
Figure 103: PPPI_LAYOUT – Defining Metadata
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
You can also create your own characteristics in addition to those contained in the standard delivery (for example, for displaying the production version). You can also generate these as metadata and display them individually using the layout definition.
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 104: Generating PI Sheets/Work Instructions
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
146
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Exercise 6: Outputs in PI Sheets Exercise Objectives
O n l y e r P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create XStep trees • Create long text outputs • Output various data types • Input and output local parameters • Create outputs with text symbols • Create standard XSteps for long text outputs • Create standard XSteps for outputs in tables
U s e
Business Example You are defining outputs in PI sheets.
S A P
Complete the exercises on the following topic, Outputs in Control Instructions, if you want to use routings and production orders.
1.
Open the master recipe in plant 1100 for production version 0009 SCM372 XStep Functions of material T-SCM372-PI-##.
2.
In the recipe, open the XStep editor.
O n l y
U s e
First, delete any XStep trees that are already in the XStep editor. Create an XStep tree with the label Functions of the Execution Steps.
Task 2: Creating Long Text Outputs 1.
Under the XStep tree, create an XStep with the description Outputs. Assign your destination GR## PI Sheet 1 of type PI Sheet to the XStep. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Creating an XStep Tree for the Practice Recipe
P a r t n
Task 1:
S A P
Hint: Complete the exercises on this topic if you want to use master recipes and process orders.
147
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
2.
Under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Outputs Without Parameters.
3.
Under XStep Outputs Without Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Output of Long Texts.
4.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description My Work Instructions and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Enter the following long text:
P a r t n
e r
Hint: The long text to be entered is stored in transaction SO10 as standard text SCM372_01 and can be included in the SAPscript editor.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Assign context Phase 0110 to the XStep.
--------------------------U s e
The elements of process instructions are output in PI sheets within work instructions.
S A P U s e
--------------------------Simulate the PI sheet. For the process instruction, create another output of a long text with the description My Title and characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment.
e r
I n t e r n a l
5.
P a r t n
Characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT is suggested by default for creating a long text. You enter the long text for this characteristic in the SAPscript editor using the formatting options and functions provided by this tool.
S A P
A FIRST long text output in a process instruction opens the area of a new set of work instructions. The description of the long text output (in the example: My Work Instructions) is used as the description of the new set of work instructions.
Enter the following long text:
---------------------------
Continued on next page
148
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Hint: The long text can be copied from the standard text SCM372_02 (transaction SO10) using cut and paste.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
FURTHER long text outputs in the same process instruction are output within the same set of work instructions. The descriptions are used as titles for the long texts. An unlimited number of HTML source texts can be entered for characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML, for example to include elements from various different sources. Format the text using HTML elements . I n t e r n a l
O n l y
--------------------------Simulate the PI sheet. 6.
For the process instruction, create another output of a long text with the description My Note and characteristic PPPI_NOTE Note.
P a r t n
e r
Enter the following long text:
U s e
Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_03. Notes in the background are entered for characteristic PPPI_NOTE. Simulate the PI sheet.
S A P
S A P
Task 3: Under XStep Outputs Without Parameters, create another process instruction with the description Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME.
2.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new set of work instructions.
e r
I n t e r n a l
1.
P a r t n
U s e
Outputting Various Data Types
3.
O n l y
Simulate the PI sheet. For the process instruction, create the output of a character string with the description Output Character String (CHAR), characteristic PPPI_SHORT_TEXT, and value My Character Output. Simulate the PI sheet. 4.
For the process instruction, create the output of a numerical value with the description Output Numerical Value (NUM), characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE, and value 9999. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
149
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Simulate the PI sheet. 5.
For the process instruction, create the output of a date with the description Output of Date (DATE), characteristic PPPI_EVENT_DATE, and value 12.04.2010. Simulate the PI sheet. For the process instruction, create the output of a time with the description Output of Time (TIME), characteristic PPPI_EVENT_TIME, and value 16:40:00. Simulate the PI sheet.
Task 4: 1.
Under XStep Outputs Without Parameters, create another process instruction with the description Output of Hyperlinks .
2.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Hyperlinks and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new set of work instructions.
S A P
For the process instruction, create the output of a hyperlink with the description Hyperlink to SAP Home Page, characteristic PPPI_HYPERLINK Hyperlink, and value http://www.sap.com. Simulate the PI sheet. For the process instruction, create the output of another hyperlink with the description Hyperlink to SAP Logo (gif), characteristic PPPI_HYPERLINK Hyperlink, and value http://www.sap.com/global/images/SAPLogo.gif.
e r
I n t e r n a l
4.
Simulate the PI sheet.
O n l y
Task 5: Entering and Outputting Parameters 1.
Under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Output of Parameters. Assign context Phase 0120 to the XStep.
2.
Define the following parameters for the XStep: Continued on next page
150
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
U s e
3.
S A P
Simulate the PI sheet.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Outputting Hyperlinks
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
6.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
e r
Description
Category
Characteristic
LV_PARAM_1
Parameter 1 from Entry
Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LV_PARAM_2
Parameter 2 from Subordinate XStep
Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LV_PARAM_F
Parameter with Fixed Value
Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LVA_TIME
Time with Local Symbol Valuation
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Name
Valuation None
LV_PARAM_2
None
LV_PARAM_F
Fixed Value Valuation Time, Local Time Zone
Value
9999 S A P
S A P
Symbol
LV_PARAM_1
LVA_TIME
Automatically
4.
Under XStep Output of Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Entry of Parameter 1.
5.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Entry of Local Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text.
P a r t n
Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new set of work instructions.
e r
U s e
PPPI_EVENT_TIME
U s e
P a r t n
Name
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_1 Parameter 1 from Entry.
7.
Under XStep Output of Parameters, create another process instruction with the description Output of Local Parameter.
8.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Output of Local Parameter and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
151
O n l y
6.
2010
I n t e r n a l
3.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new set of work instructions. 9.
For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output of Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_1.
O n l y
Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_F.
e r
11. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Time with Symbol Valuation and characteristic PPPI_EVENT_TIME.
P a r t n
13. Under XStep Output of Parameters, create an XStep with the description Output of Input Parameters.
Category
Characteristic
IV_PARAM_1
Parameter from Superordinate XStep
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
U s e
Description
Name
Symbol
IV_PARAM_1
e r
Valuation
Value
Reference
LV_PARAM_1
16. Under XStep Output of Input Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Output of Input Parameters. 17. For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Output of Input Parameters and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text.
Continued on next page
152
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
15. Define the following reference valuation for the input parameter:
P a r t n
Name
S A P
14. Define the following input parameter for the XStep:
Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_2.
U s e
12. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output of Parameter 2 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
S A P
Assign parameter name LVA_TIME.
I n t e r n a l
10. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output Parameter Fixed Value and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new set of work instructions. 18. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output of Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name IV_PARAM_1.
Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
OV_PARAM_2
Parameter for Superordinate XStep
Output
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
U s e
O n l y P a r t n
e r
20. Define the following output parameter for the XStep:
21. Define the following reference valuation for the output parameter: Name
Symbol
S A P
Valuation
Value
Reference
LV_PARAM_2
22. Under XStep Entry of Output Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Entry of Output Parameters.
U s e
Assign parameter name OV_PARAM_2. 25. Your maintenance activities for XStep Output of Parameters cannot be tested fully in the simulation of the PI sheet in the recipe. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet according to the following procedure: Create a process order of type PI02 with order number TEST-## for material T-SCM372-PI-## in plant 1100. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
153
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
24. For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Parameter 2 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
e r
Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new set of work instructions.
P a r t n
23. For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Entry of Output Parameters and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text.
S A P
OV_PARAM_2
I n t e r n a l
19. Under XStep Output of Parameters, create an XStep with the description Entry of Output Parameters.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Choose an order quantity of 500 PC and a finish date in the future. Check whether production version 0009 is selected when you open the order. Generate a control recipe for the test and save the order. In the control recipe monitor, send the test control recipe. I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
e r
Outputs with Text Symbols 1.
Under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Outputs with Text Symbols. Assign context Phase 0130 to the XStep.
S A P U s e
Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
LV_INSTR
Long Text
Local
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LV_TITLE_1
Description 1
Local
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LV_TITLE_2
Description 2
Local
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LVA_DATE
Date
Local
PPPI_EVENT_DATE
P a r t n
3.
O n l y
(Symbol Valuation) Define the following valuations for the parameters:
Continued on next page
154
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Define the following parameters for the XStep:
S A P
2.
U s e
Task 6:
P a r t n
Select and process the corresponding test PI sheet. Check that the process instructions defined above are processed correctly using input and output parameters.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Name
Symbol
LV_INSTR
Value
Fixed Value
Text for LV_INSTR; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
LV_TITLE_2
Fixed Value
Valuation Date, Local Time Zone
Automatically
e r
LVA_DATE
Text for LV_TITLE_2; see below
P a r t n
Text for LV_INSTR:
U s e
My long text output, line 1 My long text output, line 2 My long text output, line 3
S A P
4.
Under XStep Outputs with Text Symbols, create a process instruction with the description Outputs with Text Symbols .
5.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the text symbol description &LV_TITLE_1& and characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment. Enter the following long text with text symbols:
P a r t n
U s e
current date
S A P
Text for LV_TITLE_2:
e r
I n t e r n a l
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
LV_TITLE_1
Valuation
--------------------------&LV_TITLE_2&: &LVA_DATE&
--------------------------6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the text symbol description &LV_TITLE_2& and characteristic PPPI_EVENT_DATE. Assign parameter name LVA_DATE.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
155
O n l y
&LV_INSTR&
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
7.
Simulate the PI sheet and check that the process instructions for outputs with text symbols defined above are processed correctly.
Task 7: Creating a Standard XStep for Long Text Outputs O n l y
Access plant 1100 in the standard XStep repository. Under folder Standard XSteps, create your own folder with the description GR## SCM372 and the text GR## Practice Data SCM372.
e r
2.
In your folder, create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Work Instruction and the text GR## Work Instructions with Input Parameters. Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999
P a r t n
For the XStep tree, enter the description Work Instruction with Input Parameters.
U s e
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_INSTR
Work Instruction
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
IV_TITLE
Description of Work Instruction
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LVA_PHTEXT
Short Text of Phase
Local
PPPI_PHASE_SHORT_TEXT
e r
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Name
Symbol
IV_INSTR
Valuation
Value
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Name
None
IV_TITLE
Description of the Automatically XStep
LVA_PHTEXT
Phase Description Automatically
Continued on next page
156
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
4.
Define the following parameters for the XStep tree:
S A P
S A P
3.
U s e
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree.
I n t e r n a l
1.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
5.
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Work Instruction.
6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the text symbol description &IV_TITLE& and characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment.
O n l y
&IV_INSTR& 7.
In the Characteristics view, assign characteristic PPPI_PHASE_SHORT_TEXT with the value &LVA_PHTEXT& to the process instruction.
8.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct.
9.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Note: This means that when this XStep is used and the phase context is known, the corresponding short text for the phase is automatically copied over into the phase title of the PI sheet.
I n t e r n a l
Enter the following long text with text symbol:
10. Save your SXS. S A P
S A P
Task 8: Text Output Using the Standard XStep in the Recipe
U s e
In your practice recipe, under XStep Outputs with Text Symbols, create an SXS reference with the label My SXS Instruction. Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction. Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Description
Symbol
Work Instruction
Work Instruction
Valuation
Value
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
Parameter text: My long text output for standard XStep Work Instructions . Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
157
O n l y
Description
e r
I n t e r n a l
2.
P a r t n
1.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
3.
Simulate the PI sheet.
Task 9: SXS: Output in Tables; PI Type Repeated Data Request In your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Order Information and the text GR## Tabular Output of Order Information. Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. For the XStep tree, enter the description Tabular Order Information.
e r
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree.
S A P U s e
Description
Category
Characteristic
LVA_BATCH
Production Batch
Local
PPPI_BATCH
LVA_INSP
Inspection Lot
Local
PPPI_INSPECTION_LOT
LVA_ORDER
Order
Local
PPPI_PROCESS_ORDER
LVA_PROD
Product
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL
LVA_PROD_Q
Production Quantity
Local
PPPI_ORDER_QUANTITY
LVA_PROD_T
Product Description
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL_SHORT_TEXT
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Local
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
e r
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Symbol
Valuation
LVA_BATCH
Batch
Automatically
LVA_INSP
Inspection Lot
Automatically
LVA_ORDER
Order
Automatically
LVA_PROD
Main Product
Automatically
O n l y
Name
Value
Continued on next page
158
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
Name
S A P
3.
Define the following parameters for the XStep tree:
U s e
P a r t n
2.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
1.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Symbol
Valuation
LVA_PROD_Q
Quantity Produced
Automatically
LVA_PROD_T
Description of Material
Automatically
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Automatically
Value
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Tabular Order Information.
5.
For the process instruction, create the following parameter outputs one after the other:
S A P
P a r t n
e r
4.
Description
Parameter Name
Order
LVA_ORDER
Product
LVA_PROD
Description
LVA_PROD_T
Production Quantity
LVA_PROD_Q
UoM
LVA_UOM
Batch
LVA_BATCH
Inspection Lot
LVA_INSP
S A P
For the grouping, enter the description Order Information and as the data request type choose REPEATED Repeated Data Request.
7.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct and then simulate it.
8.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
9.
Save your SXS.
e r
6.
Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. 11. For your copied standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR ## Operation Information and the text GR## Tabular Output of Operation Information. Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
159
O n l y
10. Copy the standard XStep SXS: Operation Information from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Outputs to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372.
2010
P a r t n
U s e
Name
U s e
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999 12. Analyze the structure of the standard XStep. 13. Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct and then simulate it. 14. Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. O n l y
Task 10: 1.
In your practice recipe, under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Output in Tables.
2.
Under XStep Output in Tables, create an XStep with the description PI Type Repeated Data Request. Assign context Phase 0210 to the XStep.
3.
Under XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, create an SXS reference with the description Type Repeated Data Request.
S A P
4.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Description
Symbol
U s e I n t e r n a l
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
e r
Description of Work Instruction
Value P a r t n
Work Instruction
Valuation
S A P
Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Recipe: Output in Tables; Repeated Data Request
I n t e r n a l
15. Save the SXS.
Parameter text:
The elements of process instructions of type Repeated Data Request are output in a table. The description of the grouping serves as the title of the table. Simulate the PI sheet. Continued on next page
160
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_04.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
5.
Under XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, create another SXS reference with the description SXS: Order Information. Assign reference SXS: GR## Order Information.
6.
Under XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, create another SXS reference with the description SXS: Operation Information.
O n l y
Save your recipe.
e r
7.
Your maintenance activities for outputs in tables cannot be fully tested in the simulation of the PI sheet in the recipe. The symbol valuations for some parameters can only be made in the order. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet according to the following procedure:
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order. Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for production version 0009.
S A P
Generate an inspection lot for the order.
S A P
On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt, assign batch number BATCH##.
U s e
P a r t n
Change your process order with order number TEST-##.
I n t e r n a l
Assign reference SXS: GR## Operation Information.
Generate a control recipe for the test and save the order. P a r t n
U s e
In the control recipe monitor, send the new test control recipe. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
I n t e r n a l
Task 11: SXS: Output in Tables; XSteps of the Same Structure 1.
In your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Material List and the text GR## Material Information for All Components. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
161
O n l y
Also check whether the short texts for the phases have been copied to the titles of phases 0130 and 0210 due to the use of SXS reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction.
e r
Select and analyze the corresponding test PI sheet. Check that the standard XSteps for outputs in tables defined above are processed correctly.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999 For the XStep tree, enter the description Material List. Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree.
O n l y
2.
For XStep tree Material List, create an XStep with the description Material List.
e r
Assign generation For Confirmed Reservation Items to the XStep.
S A P
LVA_BATCH
Component Batch Local
PPPI_BATCH
LVA_COMP
Material Component
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL
LVA_COMP_Q
Component Quantity
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL_CONSUMED
LVA_COMP_T
Component Description
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL_SHORT_TEXT
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Local
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
Value
e r
U s e
Description
P a r t n
Category
Characteristic
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Name
Symbol
Valuation
LVA_BATCH
Batch
Automatically
LVA_COMP
Material
Automatically
LVA_COMP_Q
Requirement Quantity Automatically (= Reserved Qty)
LVA_COMP_T
Description of Material
Automatically
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Automatically
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Name
Continued on next page
162
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
S A P
4.
Define the following parameters for the XStep:
U s e
P a r t n
3.
I n t e r n a l
Hint: To speed up the exercise, instead of creating the SXS, the corresponding SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion).
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Material List.
6.
For the process instruction, create the following parameter outputs one after the other:
e r
O n l y
5.
Description
Parameter Name
Material
LVA_COMP
Description
LVA_COMP_T
Requirement Quantity
LVA_COMP_Q
UoM
LVA_UOM
Batch
LVA_BATCH
I n t e r n a l
7.
For the grouping, enter the description Material List and as the data request type enter Simple Data Request.
8.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct and then simulate it.
S A P
9.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
U s e
P a r t n
10. Save your SXS.
Task 12: Recipe: Output in Tables; XSteps of the Same Structure
I n t e r n a l
Under XStep Output in Tables, create an XStep with the description Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure.
e r
1.
S A P
Hint: The generation can only be executed in the order. The output values are not therefore displayed in a table.
U s e
P a r t n
P a r t n e r
Assign context phase 0230 to the XStep. Under XStep Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure, create an SXS reference with the description XSteps of the Same Structure. Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction. 3.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
163
O n l y
2.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Description
Symbol
Work Instruction
O n l y
Value
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
Parameter text:
e r
Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_05.
P a r t n
U s e
If multiple XSteps of the same process instruction structure are output one after the other, their elements are automatically displayed in a table. The description of the grouping serves as the title of the table. In our example, a structurally identical XStep with material information is output as a result of the definition of a generation for all material components of the phase.
I n t e r n a l
Description of Work Instruction
Valuation
Simulate the PI sheet.
S A P
Under XStep Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure, create another SXS reference with the description SXS: Material List.
S A P
4.
Assign reference SXS: GR## Material List.
U s e
Your maintenance activities for the output of a material list cannot be fully tested in the simulation of the PI sheet in the recipe. The generation is only carried out in the order, and the symbol valuations for some parameters can only be made in the order. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet according to the following procedure:
e r
I n t e r n a l
5.
P a r t n
Save your recipe.
Change your process order with order number TEST-##.
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for production version 0009. On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt, assign batch number BATCH##. Generate an inspection lot for the order. Continued on next page
164
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Carry out a batch determination for all material components of the order. Generate a control recipe for test purposes. Navigate to the XStep editor of the order and check whether the generation has been carried out for XStep Material List. Save the order. O n l y
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Select and analyze the corresponding test PI sheet. Check whether the material components assigned to phase 0230 are displayed in a material list.
I n t e r n a l
In the control recipe monitor, send the new test control recipe.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
165
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Solution 6: Outputs in PI Sheets Task 1: Creating an XStep Tree for the Practice Recipe Open the master recipe in plant 1100 for production version 0009 SCM372 XStep Functions of material T-SCM372-PI-##.
e r
a)
Logistics → Production – Process → Master Data → Production Versions Plant:
1100
Material:
T-SCM372-PI-##
P a r t n
Enter
U s e
Select production version 0009 Choose Recipe In the Parameters for Recipe Maintenance dialog box:
S A P
S A P
Choose Edit Recipe (Enter) 2.
In the recipe, open the XStep editor. First, delete any XStep trees that are already in the XStep editor.
U s e
P a r t n
Create an XStep tree with the label Functions of the Execution Steps. a)
In the recipe, choose the XSteps icon. In the XStep editor, Delete XStep trees via the context menu.
In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep tree).
e r
Description: Functions of the Execution Steps
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
In the XStep editor, choose XStep Tree.
Task 2: Creating Long Text Outputs 1.
Under the XStep tree, create an XStep with the description Outputs.
Continued on next page
166
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
1.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign your destination GR## PI Sheet 1 of type PI Sheet to the XStep. a)
In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Create → XStep In the context menu of the XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep).
O n l y
On XStep tab page Destination, find destination GR## PI Sheet 1 and assign it by double-clicking it.
e r
2.
Under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Outputs Without Parameters.
a)
In the context menu of XStep Outputs, choose Create → XStep
S A P
Description: Outputs Without Parameters On XStep tab page Context,
U s e
3.
Under XStep Outputs Without Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Output of Long Texts. a)
In the context menu of XStep Outputs Without Parameters,
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Output of Long Texts 4.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description My Work Instructions and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
167
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
choose Create → Process Instruction
P a r t n
assign phase 0110 by double-clicking it.
S A P
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep).
U s e
P a r t n
Assign context Phase 0110 to the XStep.
I n t e r n a l
Description: Outputs
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Enter the following long text: Hint: The long text to be entered is stored in transaction SO10 as standard text SCM372_01 and can be included in the SAPscript editor. --------------------------O n l y e r
A FIRST long text output in a process instruction opens the area of a new set of work instructions. The description of the long text output (in the example: My Work Instructions) is used as the description of the new set of work instructions.
P a r t n
--------------------------Simulate the PI sheet.
S A P
In the context menu of the process instruction,
S A P
a)
choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties (or double-click the long text output).
P a r t n
U s e
Description: My Work Instructions Characteristic: PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text Choose Long Text.
I n t e r n a l
e r
Enter the long text as described in the exercise. Simulate the PI sheet by choosing
O n l y
XSteps → Simulate 5.
For the process instruction, create another output of a long text with the description My Title and characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment.
Continued on next page
168
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
U s e
Characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT is suggested by default for creating a long text. You enter the long text for this characteristic in the SAPscript editor using the formatting options and functions provided by this tool.
I n t e r n a l
The elements of process instructions are output in PI sheets within work instructions.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Enter the following long text: Hint: The long text can be copied from the standard text SCM372_02 (transaction SO10) using cut and paste. --------------------------O n l y e r
An unlimited number of HTML source texts can be entered for characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML, for example to include elements from various different sources. Format the text using HTML elements .
P a r t n
---------------------------
a)
U s e
Simulate the PI sheet.
I n t e r n a l
FURTHER long text outputs in the same process instruction are output within the same set of work instructions. The descriptions are used as titles for the long texts.
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Output → Long Text
S A P
S A P
In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties (or double-click the long text output). Description: My Title
U s e
P a r t n
Characteristic: PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment Enter the long text as described in the exercise. Simulate the PI sheet by choosing
6.
e r
I n t e r n a l
XSteps → Simulate For the process instruction, create another output of a long text with the description My Note and characteristic PPPI_NOTE Note.
O n l y
Enter the following long text: Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_03. Notes in the background are entered for characteristic PPPI_NOTE.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
169
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Simulate the PI sheet. a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties (or double-click the long text output). I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Description: My Note Characteristic: PPPI_NOTE Note Choose Long Text.
e r
Enter the long text as described in the exercise. Simulate the PI sheet by choosing
U s e
P a r t n
XSteps → Simulate
Task 3: Outputting Various Data Types
S A P
Under XStep Outputs Without Parameters, create another process instruction with the description Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME. a)
In the context menu of XStep Outputs Without Parameters,
S A P
1.
choose Create → Process Instruction
U s e
Description: Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text.
Continued on next page
170
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new set of work instructions.
e r
I n t e r n a l
2.
P a r t n
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction).
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Simulate the PI sheet. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME, choose Create → Output → Long Text
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties (or double-click the long text output). Description: CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME Characteristic: PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text Do not enter a long text.
e r
Simulate the PI sheet by choosing
3.
For the process instruction, create the output of a character string with the description Output Character String (CHAR), characteristic PPPI_SHORT_TEXT, and value My Character Output.
U s e
P a r t n
XSteps → Simulate
Simulate the PI sheet.
S A P
S A P
a)
In the context menu of process instruction Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME, choose Create → Output → Character String
U s e
P a r t n
In the context menu of the character string, choose Properties (or double-click the character string). Description: Output Character String (CHAR)
I n t e r n a l
Characteristic: PPPI_SHORT_TEXT
e r
Value: My Character Output Simulate the PI sheet by choosing
4.
O n l y
XSteps → Simulate For the process instruction, create the output of a numerical value with the description Output Numerical Value (NUM), characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE, and value 9999.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
171
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Simulate the PI sheet. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME, choose Create → Output → Numeric Value
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the numeric value, choose Properties (or double-click the numerical value). Description: Output Numerical Value (NUM) Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE Value: 9999
e r
Simulate the PI sheet by choosing
5.
For the process instruction, create the output of a date with the description Output of Date (DATE), characteristic PPPI_EVENT_DATE, and value 12.04.2010. Simulate the PI sheet.
S A P
In the context menu of process instruction Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME,
S A P
a)
choose Create → Output → Date
U s e
Description: Output of Date (DATE) Characteristic: PPPI_EVENT_DATE Value: 12.04.2010
P a r t n
In the context menu of the date, choose Properties (or double-click the date).
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
XSteps → Simulate
Simulate the PI sheet by choosing XSteps → Simulate For the process instruction, create the output of a time with the description Output of Time (TIME), characteristic PPPI_EVENT_TIME, and value 16:40:00.
Continued on next page
172
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
6.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Simulate the PI sheet. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME, choose Create → Output → Time
O n l y
Description: Output of Time (TIME) Characteristic: PPPI_EVENT_TIME Value: 16:40:00
e r
Simulate the PI sheet by choosing
U s e
P a r t n
XSteps → Simulate
Task 4: Outputting Hyperlinks Under XStep Outputs Without Parameters, create another process instruction with the description Output of Hyperlinks . a)
In the context menu of XStep Outputs Without Parameters,
S A P
S A P
1.
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the time, choose Properties (or double-click the time).
choose Create → Process Instruction
U s e
Description: Output of Hyperlinks For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Hyperlinks and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new set of work instructions.
e r
I n t e r n a l
2.
P a r t n
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction).
O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
173
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Simulate the PI sheet. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Hyperlinks and Images, choose Create → Output → Long Text
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties (or double-click the long text output). Description: Hyperlinks Characteristic: PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text Do not enter a long text.
e r
Simulate the PI sheet by choosing
3.
For the process instruction, create the output of a hyperlink with the description Hyperlink to SAP Home Page, characteristic PPPI_HYPERLINK Hyperlink, and value http://www.sap.com.
U s e
P a r t n
XSteps → Simulate
Simulate the PI sheet.
S A P
S A P
a)
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Hyperlinks, choose Create → Output → Hyperlink
U s e
Description: Hyperlink to SAP Home Page Characteristic: PPPI_HYPERLINK Hyperlink
e r
I n t e r n a l
Enter the text: http://www.sap.com
P a r t n
In the context menu of the hyperlink, choose Properties (or double-click the hyperlink).
Simulate the PI sheet by choosing XSteps → Simulate
O n l y
4.
For the process instruction, create the output of another hyperlink with the description Hyperlink to SAP Logo (gif), characteristic PPPI_HYPERLINK Hyperlink, and value http://www.sap.com/global/images/SAPLogo.gif.
Continued on next page
174
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Simulate the PI sheet. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Hyperlinks, choose Create → Output → Hyperlink In the context menu of the hyperlink, choose Properties (or double-click the hyperlink). I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Description: Hyperlink to SAP Logo (gif) Characteristic: PPPI_HYPERLINK Hyperlink Enter the text: http://www.sap.com/global/images/SAPLogo.gif
e r
Simulate the PI sheet by choosing
P a r t n
XSteps → Simulate
U s e
Task 5: Entering and Outputting Parameters 1.
Under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Output of Parameters.
S A P
S A P
Assign context Phase 0120 to the XStep. a)
In the context menu of XStep Outputs, choose Create → XStep
U s e
Description: Output of Parameters
e r
I n t e r n a l
On XStep tab page Context, assign phase 0120 by double-clicking it. 2.
P a r t n
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep).
Define the following parameters for the XStep: O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
175
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372
e r
Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
LV_PARAM_1
Parameter 1 from Entry
Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LV_PARAM_2
Parameter 2 from Subordinate XStep
Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LV_PARAM_F
Parameter with Fixed Value
Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LVA_TIME
Time with Local Symbol Valuation
a)
PPPI_EVENT_TIME
On XStep tab page Parameters,
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
3.
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Symbol
Valuation
LV_PARAM_1
None
LV_PARAM_2
None
LV_PARAM_F
Fixed Value
LVA_TIME
9999
Automatically P a r t n
a)
Valuation Time, Local Time Zone
Value
S A P
S A P
Name
U s e
U s e
P a r t n
define the parameters as described in the exercise.
On XStep tab page Valuation,
4.
Under XStep Output of Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Entry of Parameter 1. In the context menu of XStep Output of Parameters,
O n l y
a)
e r
I n t e r n a l
define the valuations as described in the exercise.
choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Entry of Parameter 1
Continued on next page
176
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
5.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Entry of Local Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new set of work instructions.
O n l y
In the context menu of process instruction Entry of Parameter 1,
I n t e r n a l
a)
choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties (or double-click the long text output).
e r
Description: Entry of Local Parameter 1 Characteristic: PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text
6.
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_1 Parameter 1 from Entry.
S A P
In the context menu of process instruction Entry of Parameter 1,
S A P
a)
choose Create → Entry → Parameter Value
U s e I n t e r n a l
7.
Under XStep Output of Parameters, create another process instruction with the description Output of Local Parameter.
O n l y
a)
In the context menu of XStep Output of Parameters, choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Output of Local Parameter
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
Parameter name: LV_PARAM_1 Parameter 1 from Entry
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
P a r t n
In the context menu of the parameter value, choose Properties (or double-click the parameter value). Description: Entry of Parameter 1
U s e
P a r t n
Do not enter a long text.
177
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
8.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Output of Local Parameter and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new set of work instructions.
O n l y
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Local Parameter,
I n t e r n a l
a)
choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties (or double-click the long text output).
e r
Description: Output of Local Parameter Characteristic: PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text
9.
For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output of Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_1.
S A P
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Local Parameter, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value
U s e I n t e r n a l
Parameter name: LV_PARAM_1 Parameter 1 from Entry
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
10. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output Parameter Fixed Value and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
e r
Description: Output of Parameter 1
P a r t n
In the context menu of the output, choose Properties (or double-click the output).
S A P
a)
U s e
P a r t n
Do not enter a long text.
O n l y
Continued on next page
178
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_F. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Local Parameter, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value In the context menu of the output, choose Properties (or double-click the output).
O n l y
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered) Parameter name: LV_PARAM_F Parameter with Fixed Value
P a r t n
e r
11. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Time with Symbol Valuation and characteristic PPPI_EVENT_TIME.
I n t e r n a l
Description: Output Parameter Fixed Value
Assign parameter name LVA_TIME. In the context menu of process instruction Output of Local Parameter, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value
S A P
Description: Time with Symbol Valuation
U s e
Parameter name: LVA_TIME Time with Symbol Valuation
a)
e r
Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_2. In the context menu of process instruction Output of Local Parameter, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value In the context menu of the output, choose Properties (or double-click the output). Description: Output of Parameter 2 Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered) Parameter name: LV_PARAM_2 Parameter 2 from Subordinate XStep Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
179
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
12. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output of Parameter 2 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
P a r t n
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
S A P
In the context menu of the output, choose Properties (or double-click the output).
U s e
a)
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
13. Under XStep Output of Parameters, create an XStep with the description Output of Input Parameters. a)
In the context menu of XStep Output of Parameters, choose Create → XStep
O n l y
Description: Output of Input Parameters
Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_PARAM_1
Parameter from Superordinate XStep
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
a)
U s e
P a r t n
e r
14. Define the following input parameter for the XStep:
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep).
On XStep tab page Parameters, define the parameter as described in the exercise.
S A P
S A P
15. Define the following reference valuation for the input parameter: Name
Symbol
a)
Value
Reference
LV_PARAM_1
On XStep tab page Valuation, define the valuation as described in the exercise.
In the context menu of XStep Output of Input Parameters, O n l y
I n t e r n a l
a)
choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Output of Input Parameters 17. For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Output of Input Parameters and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Continued on next page
180
e r
16. Under XStep Output of Input Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Output of Input Parameters.
P a r t n
U s e
IV_PARAM_1
Valuation
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new set of work instructions. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Input Parameters, choose Create → Output → Long Text
O n l y
Description: Output of Input Parameters Characteristic: PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text Do not enter a long text.
P a r t n
e r
18. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output of Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties (or double-click the long text output).
Assign parameter name IV_PARAM_1. In the context menu of process instruction Output of Input Parameters, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value
S A P
Description: Output of Parameter 1
U s e
Parameter name: IV_PARAM_1 Parameter from Superordinate XStep
a)
In the context menu of XStep Output of Parameters, choose
e r
I n t e r n a l
19. Under XStep Output of Parameters, create an XStep with the description Entry of Output Parameters.
P a r t n
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
S A P
In the context menu of the output, choose Properties (or double-click the output).
U s e
a)
Create → XStep
Description: Entry of Output Parameters 20. Define the following output parameter for the XStep:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
181
O n l y
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep).
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
OV_PARAM_2
Parameter for Superordinate XStep
Output
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
O n l y
On XStep tab page Parameters, define the parameter as described in the exercise.
21. Define the following reference valuation for the output parameter: Name
Symbol
a)
Value
Reference
LV_PARAM_2
On XStep tab page Valuation, define the valuation as described in the exercise.
22. Under XStep Entry of Output Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Entry of Output Parameters.
S A P
In the context menu of XStep Entry of Output Parameters,
S A P
a)
choose Create → Process Instruction
U s e
Description: Entry of Output Parameters
Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new set of work instructions.
choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties (or double-click the long text output). Description: Entry of Output Parameters Characteristic: PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text Continued on next page
182
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
In the context menu of process instruction Entry of Output Parameters,
e r
I n t e r n a l
23. For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Entry of Output Parameters and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text.
P a r t n
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction).
a)
U s e
P a r t n
e r
OV_PARAM_2
Valuation
I n t e r n a l
a)
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Do not enter a long text. 24. For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Parameter 2 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name OV_PARAM_2. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Entry of Output Parameters,
O n l y
In the context menu of the parameter value, choose Properties (or double-click the parameter value). Description: Entry of Parameter 2
P a r t n
e r
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
I n t e r n a l
choose Create → Entry → Parameter Value
Parameter name: OV_PARAM_2 Parameter for Superordinate XStep
S A P
Choose an order quantity of 500 PC and a finish date in the future. Check whether production version 0009 is selected when you open the order.
P a r t n
U s e
Generate a control recipe for the test and save the order. In the control recipe monitor, send the test control recipe.
Select and process the corresponding test PI sheet. Check that the process instructions defined above are processed correctly using input and output parameters. Create the order by choosing: Logistics → Production - Process → Process Order →
Process Order → Create → With Material Material number:
T-SCM372-PI-##
Production plant:
1100 Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
183
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
a)
S A P
Create a process order of type PI02 with order number TEST-## for material T-SCM372-PI-## in plant 1100.
U s e
25. Your maintenance activities for XStep Output of Parameters cannot be tested fully in the simulation of the PI sheet in the recipe. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet according to the following procedure:
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Process order type:
PI02
Process order:
TEST-##
Enter
O n l y
500 PC
I n t e r n a l
Total quantity:
Enter a finish date in the future. Enter
e r
Send the test control recipe by choosing
Plant:
1100
Mode:
Test
Production order:
TEST-##
S A P
S A P
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor
U s e
P a r t n
Choose Display. In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes, select the control recipe and send it.
e r
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
Choose Save.
P a r t n
Process Order → Functions → Control Recipe → Generate for Test
Maintain the test PI sheet by choosing
Plant:
1100
Mode:
Test
Process order:
TEST-##
Continued on next page
184
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Execute (F8) In the list of PI sheets, select your PI sheet and choose Maintain PI Sheet (F5). O n l y
enter parameter 1 and parameter 2 in phase 0120. Discuss the result.
e r
Task 6: Outputs with Text Symbols Under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Outputs with Text Symbols. Assign context Phase 0130 to the XStep. a)
In the context menu of XStep Outputs, choose
S A P
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep).
U s e
On XStep tab page Context, Assign phase 0130 by double-clicking it.
S A P
Create → XStep
U s e
P a r t n
1.
I n t e r n a l
In the PI sheet,
Description: Outputs with Text Symbols
Define the following parameters for the XStep: Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
LV_INSTR
Long Text
Local
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LV_TITLE_1
Description 1
Local
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LV_TITLE_2
Description 2
Local
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LVA_DATE
Date
Local
PPPI_EVENT_DATE
e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
2.
(Symbol Valuation) Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
185
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
a)
On XStep tab page Parameters, define the parameters as described in the exercise.
3.
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Name
Symbol
O n l y
LV_TITLE_1
e r
Text for LV_INSTR; see below
Fixed Value
Valuation Date, Local Time Zone
Text for LV_TITLE_2; see below
Automatically
U s e
P a r t n
Fixed Value
Description of the Automatically XStep
LV_TITLE_2
LVA_DATE
Value I n t e r n a l
LV_INSTR
Valuation
Text for LV_INSTR: S A P
S A P
My long text output, line 1 My long text output, line 2 My long text output, line 3
P a r t n
U s e
Text for LV_TITLE_2: current date a)
On XStep tab page Valuation,
Under XStep Outputs with Text Symbols, create a process instruction with the description Outputs with Text Symbols . a)
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
4.
In the context menu of XStep Outputs with Text Symbols, choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Outputs with Text Symbols Continued on next page
186
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
define the valuations as described in the exercise.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
5.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the text symbol description &LV_TITLE_1& and characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment. Enter the following long text with text symbols: ---------------------------
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
&LV_TITLE_2&: &LVA_DATE& &LV_INSTR& --------------------------a)
In the context menu of process instruction Outputs with Text Symbols,
e r
choose Create → Output → Long Text
P a r t n
In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties
U s e
(or double-click the long text output). Description: &LV_TITLE_1& Characteristic: PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment
S A P
&LV_TITLE_2&: &LVA_DATE& &LV_INSTR& For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the text symbol description &LV_TITLE_2& and characteristic PPPI_EVENT_DATE. Assign parameter name LVA_DATE. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Outputs with Text Symbols,
I n t e r n a l
choose Create → Output → Parameter Value
e r
In the context menu of the output, choose Properties
P a r t n
U s e
6.
S A P
Enter the following long text with text symbols:
(or double-click the output).
Characteristic: PPPI_EVENT_DATE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered) Parameter name: LVA_DATE Date (Symbol Valuation) 7.
Simulate the PI sheet and check that the process instructions for outputs with text symbols defined above are processed correctly. a)
XSteps → Simulate Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
187
O n l y
Description: &LV_TITLE_2&
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Task 7: Creating a Standard XStep for Long Text Outputs 1.
Access plant 1100 in the standard XStep repository. Under folder Standard XSteps, create your own folder with the description GR## SCM372 and the text GR## Practice Data SCM372.
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
a)
Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository Plant: 1100 In the context menu of the Standard XSteps folder,
e r
choose Create → Folder
P a r t n
In the context menu of the new folder, choose Properties
U s e
(or double-click the folder). Description: GR## SCM372 Text: GR## Practice Data SCM372
S A P
In your folder, create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Work Instruction and the text GR## Work Instructions with Input Parameters. Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999
U s e
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree. a)
In the context menu of folder GR## SCM372,
I n t e r n a l
choose Create → Standard XStep
e r
In the context menu of the standard XStep, choose Properties
P a r t n
For the XStep tree, enter the description Work Instruction with Input Parameters.
S A P
2.
(or double-click the standard XStep). O n l y
Description: SXS GR## Work Instruction Text: GR## Work Instruction with Input Parameters In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version). Version: 0001 Validity period: today until 31.12.9999 Continued on next page
188
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep tree). Description: Work Instruction with Input Parameters On XStep tree tab page Destination, O n l y
Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_INSTR
Work Instruction
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
IV_TITLE
Description of Work Instruction
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LVA_PHTEXT
Short Text of Phase
Local
PPPI_PHASE_SHORT_TEXT
a)
S A P
S A P
Define the following parameters for the XStep tree:
On XStep tree tab page Parameters, define the parameters as described in the exercise.
U s e
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Name
Symbol
None
IV_TITLE
Description of the Automatically XStep
LVA_PHTEXT
Phase Description Automatically
O n l y
a)
Value
e r
I n t e r n a l
IV_INSTR
Valuation
P a r t n
4.
On XStep tree tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
3.
I n t e r n a l
assign destination type Work Instructions/PI Sheet.
189
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
5.
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Work Instruction. a)
In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Work Instruction
e r
6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the text symbol description &IV_TITLE& and characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment.
P a r t n
Enter the following long text with text symbol:
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the process instruction).
&IV_INSTR& U s e
a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Output → Long Text
S A P
S A P
In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties (or double-click the long text output). Description: &IV_TITLE&
U s e
Enter the following long text with text symbols: &IV_INSTR& In the Characteristics view, assign characteristic PPPI_PHASE_SHORT_TEXT with the value &LVA_PHTEXT& to the process instruction.
a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). On tab page Characteristics, choose Append Row. Continued on next page
190
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Note: This means that when this XStep is used and the phase context is known, the corresponding short text for the phase is automatically copied over into the phase title of the PI sheet.
e r
I n t e r n a l
7.
P a r t n
Characteristic: PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Characteristic: PPPI_PHASE_SHORT_TEXT Value: &LVA_PHTEXT& 8.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct. a)
For the XStep tree, choose
O n l y
9.
I n t e r n a l
XSteps → Check Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. a)
In the context menu of the version, choose Change Status → Release
e r
10. Save your SXS.
P a r t n
a)
Choose Save.
U s e
Task 8: Text Output Using the Standard XStep in the Recipe In your practice recipe, under XStep Outputs with Text Symbols, create an SXS reference with the label My SXS Instruction. Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction. a)
Call the recipe for production version 0009 of material T-SCM372-PI-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor.
P a r t n
U s e
In the context menu of XStep Outputs with Text Symbols, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
Description: My SXS Instruction On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Work Instruction. Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
191
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
(or double-click the SXS reference).
2.
S A P
S A P
1.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Description
Symbol
Work Instruction
Description O n l y
Value
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
I n t e r n a l
Work Instruction
Valuation
Parameter text: My long text output for standard XStep Work Instructions .
e r
a)
On tab page Valuation,
3.
Simulate the PI sheet. a)
U s e
P a r t n
define the valuations as described in the exercise.
XSteps → Simulate
Task 9:
S A P
1.
In your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Order Information and the text GR## Tabular Output of Order Information.
U s e
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree. Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository
e r
I n t e r n a l
a)
P a r t n
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. For the XStep tree, enter the description Tabular Order Information.
S A P
SXS: Output in Tables; PI Type Repeated Data Request
Plant: 1100 O n l y
In the context menu of folder GR## SCM372, choose Create → Standard XStep In the context menu of the standard XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the standard XStep). Description: SXS GR## Order Information Text: GR## Tabular Output of Order Information Continued on next page
192
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version). Version: 0001 Validity period: today until 31.12.9999 O n l y
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep tree). Description: Tabular Order Information On XStep tree tab page Destination,
e r
assign destination type Work Instructions/PI Sheet.
S A P
Description
Category
Characteristic
LVA_BATCH
Production Batch
Local
PPPI_BATCH
LVA_INSP
Inspection Lot
Local
PPPI_INSPECTION_LOT
LVA_ORDER
Order
Local
PPPI_PROCESS_ORDER
LVA_PROD
Product
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL
LVA_PROD_Q
Production Quantity
Local
PPPI_ORDER_QUANTITY
LVA_PROD_T
Product Description
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL_SHORT_TEXT
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Local
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
O n l y
On XStep tree tab page Parameters, define the parameters as described in the exercise.
3.
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Name
Symbol
Valuation
LVA_BATCH
Batch
Automatically
LVA_INSP
Inspection Lot
Automatically
Value
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
a)
P a r t n
U s e
Name
S A P
I n t e r n a l
Define the following parameters for the XStep tree:
U s e
P a r t n
2.
193
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372
Name
Symbol
Valuation
LVA_ORDER
Order
Automatically
LVA_PROD
Main Product
Automatically
LVA_PROD_Q
Quantity Produced
Automatically
LVA_PROD_T
Description of Material
Automatically
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Automatically
e r
a)
Value
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
On XStep tree tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Tabular Order Information. a)
In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Create → Process Instruction
S A P
S A P
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Tabular Order Information
U s e
Description
Parameter Name
Order
LVA_ORDER
Product
LVA_PROD
Description
LVA_PROD_T
Production Quantity
LVA_PROD_Q
e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
For the process instruction, create the following parameter outputs one after the other:
Continued on next page
194
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
5.
U s e
P a r t n
4.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Description
Parameter Name
UoM
LVA_UOM
Batch
LVA_BATCH
Inspection Lot
LVA_INSP
O n l y
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value Define the parameter outputs as described in the exercise.
e r
6.
For the grouping, enter the description Order Information and as the data request type choose REPEATED Repeated Data Request.
P a r t n
a)
In the context menu of the grouping, choose Properties
U s e
(or double-click the grouping). Description: Order Information Type of data request: REPEATED Repeated Data Request
S A P
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct and then simulate it. a)
S A P
7.
For the XStep tree, choose XSteps → Check
U s e
P a r t n
XSteps → Simulate 8.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. a)
In the context menu of the version,
e r
I n t e r n a l
choose Change Status → Release 9.
Save your SXS. a)
I n t e r n a l
a)
Choose Save. O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
195
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
10. Copy the standard XStep SXS: Operation Information from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Outputs to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372. Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. O n l y
In folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Outputs, in the context menu of standard XStep SXS: Operation Information, choose
e r
Copy In the context menu of folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372, choose
Paste 11. For your copied standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR ## Operation Information and the text GR## Tabular Output of Operation Information.
S A P
a)
In the context menu of the copied standard XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the standard XStep).
U s e
P a r t n
Description: SXS GR## Operation Information Text: GR## Tabular Output of Operation Information In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version).
e r
I n t e r n a l
S A P
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999
U s e
P a r t n
Change
I n t e r n a l
a)
Version: 0001 Validity period: today until 31.12.9999
O n l y
12. Analyze the structure of the standard XStep. a)
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep.
13. Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct and then simulate it. a)
For the XStep tree, choose XSteps → Check XSteps → Simulate Continued on next page
196
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
14. Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. a)
In the context menu of the version, choose Change Status → Release
15. Save the SXS. O n l y
Choose Save.
Task 10: Recipe: Output in Tables; Repeated Data Request
e r
1.
In your practice recipe, under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Output in Tables. Call the recipe for production version 0009 of material T-SCM372-PI-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor.
U s e
P a r t n
a)
In the context menu of XStep Outputs, choose Create → XStep
S A P
Description: Output in Tables
U s e
Assign context Phase 0210 to the XStep. a)
In the context menu of XStep Output in Tables, choose
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep).
e r
Description: PI Type Repeated Data Request
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Create → XStep
On XStep tab page Context, Assign phase 0210 by double-clicking it. 3.
Under XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, create an SXS reference with the description Type Repeated Data Request.
Continued on next page
2010
P a r t n
Under XStep Output in Tables, create an XStep with the description PI Type Repeated Data Request.
S A P
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep).
2.
I n t e r n a l
a)
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
197
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction. a)
In the context menu of XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
O n l y
On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Work Instruction.
e r
4.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Symbol
Work Instruction
Value
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
S A P
S A P
Description of Work Instruction
Valuation
Parameter text:
U s e
The elements of process instructions of type Repeated Data Request are output in a table. The description of the grouping serves as the title of the table.
On tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise. XSteps → Simulate
5.
Under XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, create another SXS reference with the description SXS: Order Information.
Continued on next page
198
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
Simulate the PI sheet.
P a r t n
Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_04.
a)
U s e
P a r t n
Description
I n t e r n a l
Description: Type Repeated Data Request
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign reference SXS: GR## Order Information. a)
In the context menu of XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
O n l y
On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Work Information.
e r
6.
Under XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, create another SXS reference with the description SXS: Operation Information.
P a r t n
Assign reference SXS: GR## Operation Information.
a)
U s e
Save your recipe. In the context menu of XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, choose Create → SXS Reference
S A P
Description: SXS: Operation Information
U s e
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Operation Information. Choose Save.
I n t e r n a l
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order. Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for production version 0009. On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt, assign batch number BATCH##. Generate an inspection lot for the order. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
199
O n l y
Change your process order with order number TEST-##.
e r
Your maintenance activities for outputs in tables cannot be fully tested in the simulation of the PI sheet in the recipe. The symbol valuations for some parameters can only be made in the order. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet according to the following procedure:
P a r t n
On tab page Reference,
S A P
In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
7.
I n t e r n a l
Description: SXS: Order Information
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Generate a control recipe for the test and save the order. In the control recipe monitor, send the new test control recipe. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
O n l y
Also check whether the short texts for the phases have been copied to the titles of phases 0130 and 0210 due to the use of SXS reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction.
e r
a)
Change the order by choosing:
U s e
P a r t n
Logistics → Production - Process → Process Order → Process Order → Change
I n t e r n a l
Select and analyze the corresponding test PI sheet. Check that the standard XSteps for outputs in tables defined above are processed correctly.
Process order: TEST-## Enter
S A P
Process Order → Functions → Read Master Data
S A P
In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Delete
U s e
Choose XSteps
Choose Save. Process Order → Change
P a r t n
On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt: Batch: BATCH##
Process Order → Functions → Control Recipe → Generate for Test Choose Save. Send the test control recipe by choosing Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor Plant: 1100 Mode: Test Continued on next page
200
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
Process Order → Functions → Inspection Lot → Generate
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Production order: TEST-## Choose Display. In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes,
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Maintain the test PI sheet by choosing
e r
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find
P a r t n
select your PI sheet
U s e
Mode: Test
S A P
Plant: 1100
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
select the control recipe and send it.
Process order: TEST-## Execute (F8) In the list of PI sheets,
S A P
and choose Maintain PI Sheet (F5).
U s e
SXS: Output in Tables; XSteps of the Same Structure In your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Material List and the text GR## Material Information for All Components. Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999 For the XStep tree, enter the description Material List.
e r
I n t e r n a l
1.
P a r t n
Task 11:
O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
201
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree. Hint: To speed up the exercise, instead of creating the SXS, the corresponding SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion). O n l y
I n t e r n a l
a)
Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository Plant: 1100 In the context menu of folder GR## SCM372,
e r
choose Create → Standard XStep
U s e
P a r t n
In the context menu of the standard XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the standard XStep). Description: SXS GR## Material List Text: GR## Material Information for All Components
S A P
Version: 0001
S A P
In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version).
Validity period: today until 31.12.9999
U s e
Description: Material List
e r
I n t e r n a l
On XStep tree tab page Destination, assign destination type Work Instructions/PI Sheet. 2.
P a r t n
In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep tree).
For XStep tree Material List, create an XStep with the description Material List. O n l y
Continued on next page
202
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign generation For Confirmed Reservation Items to the XStep. a)
In the context menu of the XStep tree Material List, choose Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep).
O n l y
On XStep tab page Generation, Assign generation For Confirmed Reservation Items by double-clicking it.
LVA_BATCH
Component Batch Local
PPPI_BATCH
LVA_COMP
Material Component
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL
LVA_COMP_Q
Component Quantity
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL_CONSUMED
LVA_COMP_T
Component Description
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL_SHORT_TEXT
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Local
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
Characteristic
On XStep tab page Parameters,
4.
Define the following valuations for the parameters:
e r
Name
Symbol
Valuation
Value
LVA_BATCH
Batch
Automatically
LVA_COMP
Material
Automatically
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
define the parameters as described in the exercise.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
a)
Category
S A P
U s e
Description
U s e
Name
P a r t n
Define the following parameters for the XStep:
S A P
e r
3.
I n t e r n a l
Description: Material List
203
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372
Name
Symbol
LVA_COMP_Q
Requirement Quantity Automatically (= Reserved Qty)
LVA_COMP_T
Description of Material
Automatically
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Automatically
a)
Valuation
Value
On XStep tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
e r
5.
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Material List.
P a r t n
a)
In the context menu of the XStep,
U s e
choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction).
S A P U s e
Parameter Name
Material
LVA_COMP
Description
LVA_COMP_T
Requirement Quantity
LVA_COMP_Q
UoM
LVA_UOM
Batch
LVA_BATCH
O n l y
a)
e r
Description
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
For the process instruction, create the following parameter outputs one after the other:
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value to define the parameter outputs as described in the exercise.
Continued on next page
204
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
S A P
Description: Material List 6.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
7.
For the grouping, enter the description Material List and as the data request type enter Simple Data Request. a)
In the context menu of the grouping, choose Properties (or double-click the grouping). Description: Material List
O n l y
8.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct and then simulate it.
e r
Hint: The generation can only be executed in the order. The output values are not therefore displayed in a table.
P a r t n
a)
For the XStep tree, choose
U s e
XSteps → Check XSteps → Simulate 9.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
S A P
In the context menu of the version,
S A P
a)
choose Change Status → Release 10. Save your SXS.
U s e
Choose Save.
P a r t n
a)
Task 12: Recipe: Output in Tables; XSteps of the Same Structure
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Under XStep Output in Tables, create an XStep with the description Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure.
e r
1.
I n t e r n a l
Data request type: Simple Data Request
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
205
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign context phase 0230 to the XStep. a)
Call the recipe for production version 0009 of material T-SCM372-PI-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor. In the context menu of XStep Output in Tables, choose Create → XStep
O n l y
Description: Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure On XStep tab page Context,
e r
Assign phase 0230 by double-clicking it. Under XStep Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure, create an SXS reference with the description XSteps of the Same Structure. Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction. a)
In the context menu of XStep Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure,
S A P
S A P
choose Create → SXS Reference
U s e
P a r t n
2.
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep).
In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference). Description: XSteps of the Same Structure
U s e
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Work Instruction. Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Description Work Instruction
Valuation
Value
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
Parameter text: Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_05. Continued on next page
206
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Description of Work Instruction
Symbol
e r
I n t e r n a l
3.
P a r t n
On tab page Reference,
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
If multiple XSteps of the same process instruction structure are output one after the other, their elements are automatically displayed in a table. The description of the grouping serves as the title of the table. In our example, a structurally identical XStep with material information is output as a result of the definition of a generation for all material components of the phase. O n l y
a)
On tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise. XSteps → Simulate
P a r t n
e r
4.
Under XStep Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure, create another SXS reference with the description SXS: Material List.
I n t e r n a l
Simulate the PI sheet.
Assign reference SXS: GR## Material List.
a)
In the context menu of XStep Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure,
S A P
In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
S A P
choose Create → SXS Reference
U s e
Save your recipe.
Description: SXS: Material List
U s e
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Material List. Your maintenance activities for the output of a material list cannot be fully tested in the simulation of the PI sheet in the recipe. The generation is only carried out in the order, and the symbol valuations for some parameters can only be made in the order. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet according to the following procedure:
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order. Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for production version 0009. On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt, assign batch number BATCH##. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
207
O n l y
Change your process order with order number TEST-##.
e r
I n t e r n a l
5.
P a r t n
On tab page Reference,
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Generate an inspection lot for the order. Carry out a batch determination for all material components of the order. Generate a control recipe for test purposes. Navigate to the XStep editor of the order and check whether the generation has been carried out for XStep Material List. O n l y
In the control recipe monitor, send the new test control recipe.
e r
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
a)
Change the order by choosing: Logistics → Production - Process → Process Order → Process Order → Change
S A P
S A P
Process order: TEST-## Enter Choose XSteps
U s e
P a r t n
In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Delete Choose Save. Process Order → Change Process Order → Functions → Read Master Data
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Select and analyze the corresponding test PI sheet. Check whether the material components assigned to phase 0230 are displayed in a material list.
I n t e r n a l
Save the order.
On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt: Batch: BATCH##
O n l y
Process Order → Functions → Inspection Lot → Generate In the material list of the order, select all components and choose Execute Batch Determination. Process Order → Functions → Control Recipe → Generate for Test Choose XSteps Continued on next page
208
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Check the generation for XStep Material List. Choose Save. Send the test control recipe by choosing Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Plant: 1100 Mode: Test Production order: TEST-##
e r
Choose Display. In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes,
U s e
P a r t n
select the control recipe and send it. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Maintain the test PI sheet by choosing
S A P
S A P
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find Plant: 1100
P a r t n
U s e
Mode: Test Process order: TEST-## Execute (F8)
e r
I n t e r n a l
In the list of PI sheets, select your PI sheet and choose Maintain PI Sheet (F5).
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
209
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
210
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Exercise 7: Outputs in Work Instructions Exercise Objectives
O n l y e r P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create XStep trees • Create long text outputs • Output various data types • Input and output parameters • Create outputs with text symbols • Create standard XSteps for long text outputs • Create standard XSteps for outputs in tables
U s e
Business Example You are defining outputs in work instructions.
S A P
Complete the exercises on the previous topic, Outputs in PI Sheets, if you want to use master recipes and process orders.
1.
For plant 1000, open the standard routing of material T-SCM372-PP-## for group counter 9.
2.
In the routing, open the XStep editor.
O n l y
U s e
First, delete any XStep trees that are already in the XStep editor. Create an XStep tree with the description Functions of the Execution Steps.
Task 2: Creating Long Text Outputs 1.
Under the XStep tree, create an XStep with the description Outputs.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Creating an XStep Tree for the Practice Routing
P a r t n
Task 1:
S A P
Hint: Complete the exercises on this topic if you want to use routings and production orders.
211
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Assign your destination GR## Work Instructions 1 of type Work Instructions to the XStep. 2.
Under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Outputs Without Parameters.
3.
Under XStep Outputs Without Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Output of Long Texts.
4.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description My Work Section and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text.
e r
Enter the following long text:
P a r t n
-----------------------
S A P
A FIRST long text output in a process instruction opens the area of a new work section. The description of the long text output (in the example: My Work Section) is used as the description of the new work section.
U s e
-----------------------
For the process instruction, create another output of a long text with the description My Title and characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment.
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
5.
e r
Simulate the work instructions.
Enter the following long text: Hint: The long text can be copied from the standard text SCM372_02 (transaction SO10) using cut and paste. ----------------------Continued on next page
212
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
Characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT is suggested by default for creating a long text. You enter the long text for this characteristic in the SAPscript editor using the formatting options and functions provided by this tool.
S A P
The elements of process instructions are output in work instructions within work sections.
U s e
Hint: The long text to be entered is stored in transaction SO10 as standard text SCM372_01 and can be included in the SAPscript editor.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Assign context operation 0010 to the XStep.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
FURTHER long text outputs in the same process instruction are output within the same work section. The descriptions are used as titles for the long texts. An unlimited number of HTML source texts can be entered for characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML, for example to include elements from various different sources. Format the text using HTML elements . O n l y
I n t e r n a l
----------------------Simulate the work instructions. 6.
For the process instruction, create another output of a long text with the description My Note and characteristic PPPI_NOTE Note.
e r
Enter the following long text:
U s e
P a r t n
Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_03. Notes in the background are entered for characteristic PPPI_NOTE. Simulate the work instructions.
S A P
1.
Under XStep Outputs Without Parameters, create another process instruction with the description Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME.
2.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text.
I n t e r n a l
Simulate the work instructions. For the process instruction, create the output of a character string with the description Output Character String (CHAR), characteristic PPPI_SHORT_TEXT, and value My Character Output.
O n l y
3.
Simulate the work instructions. 4.
For the process instruction, create the output of a numerical value with the description Output Numerical Value (NUM), characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE, and value 9999. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new work section.
P a r t n
U s e
Outputting Various Data Types
S A P
Task 3:
213
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Simulate the work instructions. 5.
For the process instruction, create the output of a date with the description Output of Date (DATE), characteristic PPPI_EVENT_DATE, and value 12.04.2010. Simulate the work instructions. For the process instruction, create the output of a time with the description Output of Time (TIME), characteristic PPPI_EVENT_TIME, and value 16:40:00. Simulate the work instructions.
Task 4: 1.
Under XStep Outputs Without Parameters, create another process instruction with the description Output of Hyperlinks.
2.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Hyperlinks and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new work section.
S A P
For the process instruction, create the output of a hyperlink with the description Hyperlink to SAP Home Page, characteristic PPPI_HYPERLINK Hyperlink, and value http://www.sap.com. Simulate the work instructions. For the process instruction, create the output of another hyperlink with the description Hyperlink to SAP Logo (gif), characteristic PPPI_HYPERLINK Hyperlink, and value http://www.sap.com/global/images/SAPLogo.gif.
e r
I n t e r n a l
4.
Simulate the work instructions.
O n l y
Task 5: Inputting and Outputting Parameters 1.
Under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Output of Parameters. Assign context operation 0020 to the XStep.
2.
Define the following parameters for the XStep: Continued on next page
214
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
U s e
3.
S A P
Simulate the work instructions.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Outputting Hyperlinks
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
6.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
e r
Description
Category Characteristic
LV_PARAM_1
Parameter 1 from Entry
Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LV_PARAM_2
Parameter 2 from Subordinate XStep
Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LV_PARAM_F
Parameter with Fixed Value
Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LVA_TIME
Time with Symbol Local Valuation
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Name
Valuation
Value
None
LV_PARAM_2
None
LV_PARAM_F
Fixed Value Valuation Time, Local Time Zone
9999 S A P
S A P
Symbol
LV_PARAM_1
LVA_TIME
Automatically
4.
Under XStep Output of Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Entry of Parameter 1.
5.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Entry of Local Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text.
P a r t n
Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new work section.
e r
U s e
PPPI_EVENT_TIME
U s e
P a r t n
Name
I n t e r n a l
3.
6.
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_1 Parameter 1 from Entry.
7.
Under XStep Output of Parameters, create another process instruction with the description Output of Local Parameter.
8.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Output of Local Parameter and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
215
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new work section. 9.
For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output of Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_1.
O n l y
Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_F.
e r
11. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Time with Symbol Valuation and characteristic PPPI_EVENT_TIME.
P a r t n
13. Under XStep Output of Parameters, create an XStep with the description Output of Input Parameters.
Name
Description
U s e
Characteristic
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
P a r t n
IV_PARAM_1Parameter from Superordinate XStep
Category
Symbol
IV_PARAM_1
e r
Valuation
Value
Reference
LV_PARAM_1
16. Under XStep Output of Input Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Output of Input Parameters. 17. For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Output of Input Parameters and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text.
Continued on next page
216
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
15. Define the following reference valuation for the input parameter: Name
S A P
14. Define the following input parameter for the XStep:
Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_2.
U s e
12. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output of Parameter 2 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
S A P
Assign parameter name LVA_TIME.
I n t e r n a l
10. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output Parameter Fixed Value and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new work section. 18. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output of Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name IV_PARAM_1. O n l y
20. Define the following output parameter for the XStep: Name
Description
Characteristic
Output
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
U s e
P a r t n
e r
OV_PARAM_2 Parameter for Superordinate XStep
Category
21. Define the following reference valuation for the output parameter: Name
Symbol
S A P
Valuation Value Reference
LV_PARAM_2
22. Under XStep Entry of Output Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Entry of Output Parameters.
U s e
Assign parameter name OV_PARAM_2. 25. Your maintenance activities for XStep Output of Parameters cannot be fully tested when work instructions are simulated in the routing. For this reason, now create a test work instruction according to the following procedure: Create a production order of type PP02 with order number TEST-## for material T-SCM372-PP-## in plant 1000. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
217
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
24. For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Parameter 2 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
e r
Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new work section.
P a r t n
23. For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Entry of Output Parameters and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text.
S A P
OV_PARAM_2
I n t e r n a l
19. Under XStep Output of Parameters, create an XStep with the description Entry of Output Parameters.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Choose an order quantity of 1 PC and a finish date in the future. Check whether group counter 9 is selected when you open the order. Create control instructions for the test and save the order. In the control instructions monitor, send the test control instructions.
O n l y e r
Outputs with Text Symbols 1.
Under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Outputs with Text Symbols. Assign context operation 0030 to the XStep.
S A P
Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
LV_INSTR
Long Text
Local
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LV_TITLE_1
Description 1
Local
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LV_TITLE_2
Description 2
Local
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LVA_DATE
Date
Local
PPPI_EVENT_DATE
I n t e r n a l
Define the following valuations for the parameters:
O n l y
3.
e r
(Symbol Valuation)
Continued on next page
218
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
U s e
Define the following parameters for the XStep:
S A P
2.
U s e
Task 6:
P a r t n
Select and process the corresponding test work instruction. Check that the process instructions defined above are processed correctly using input and output parameters.
I n t e r n a l
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Name
Symbol
LV_INSTR
Description of the XStep
LV_TITLE_2
Fixed Value
Text for LV_INSTR; see below
Automatically Text for LV_TITLE_2; see below
Fixed Value
Valuation Date, Local Time Zone
Automatically
e r
LVA_DATE
Value
P a r t n
Text for LV_INSTR:
U s e
----------------------My long text output, line 1 My long text output, line 2
S A P
S A P
My long text output, line 3 ----------------------Text for LV_TITLE_2:
U s e
Under XStep Outputs with Text Symbols, create a process instruction with the description Outputs with Text Symbols.
5.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the text symbol description &LV_TITLE_1& and characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment.
e r
4.
P a r t n
current date
I n t e r n a l
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
LV_TITLE_1
Valuation
Enter the following long text with text symbols: O n l y
----------------------&LV_TITLE_2&: &LVA_DATE& &LV_INSTR& ----------------------6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the text symbol description &LV_TITLE_2& and characteristic PPPI_EVENT_DATE. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
219
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign parameter name LVA_DATE. 7.
Simulate the work instructions and check that the process instructions for outputs with text symbols defined above are processed correctly.
Task 7: O n l y
1.
Access plant 1000 in the standard XStep repository. Under folder Standard XSteps, create your own folder with the description GR## SCM372 and the text GR## Practice Data SCM372.
e r
2.
In your folder, create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Instruction Text and the text GR## Instruction Text with Input Parameters.
P a r t n
For the XStep tree, enter the description Instruction Text with Input Parameters. Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree.
S A P U s e
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_INSTR
Instruction
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
IV_TITLE
Description of instruction
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LVA_OPTEXT
Short text for operation
Local
PPPI_OPERATION_SHORT_TEXT
e r
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Name
Symbol
IV_INSTR
Valuation
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Name
Value
None
IV_TITLE
Description of the Automatically XStep
LVA_OPTEXT
Short text of operation
Automatically
Continued on next page
220
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
4.
Define the following parameters for the XStep tree:
S A P
3.
U s e
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
I n t e r n a l
Creating a Standard XStep for Long Text Outputs
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
5.
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Instruction Text.
6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the text symbol description &IV_TITLE& and characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment.
O n l y
&IV_INSTR& 7.
In the Characteristics view, assign characteristic PPPI_PHASE_SHORT_TEXT with the value &LVA_OPTEXT& to the process instruction.
8.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct.
9.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Note: This means that, when this XStep is used and the operation context is known, the corresponding short text for the operation is automatically copied over into the operation title of the set of work sections.
I n t e r n a l
Enter the following long text with text symbol:
10. Save your SXS. S A P
S A P
Task 8: Text Output Using the Standard XStep in the Routing
U s e
In your practice routing, under XStep Outputs with Text Symbols, create an SXS reference with the label My SXS Instruction. Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text. Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Description Instruction
Valuation
Value
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
Parameter text: My long text output for standard XStep Instruction Text . Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
221
O n l y
Description of instruction
Symbol
e r
I n t e r n a l
2.
P a r t n
1.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
3.
Simulate the work instructions.
Task 9: SXS: Output in Tables; PI Type Repeated Data Request In your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Order Information and the text GR## Tabular Output of Order Information. Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. For the XStep tree, enter the description Tabular Order Information. Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree.
S A P U s e
Description
Category
Characteristic
LVA_INSP
Inspection Lot
Local
PPPI_INSPECTION_LOT
LVA_ORDER
Order
Local
PPPI_PRODUCTION_ORDER
LVA_PROD
Product
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL
LVA_PROD_Q
Production Quantity
Local
PPPI_ORDER_QUANTITY
LVA_PROD_T
Product Description
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL_SHORT_TEXT
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Local
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
Symbol
Valuation
LVA_INSP
Inspection Lot
Automatically
LVA_ORDER
Order
Automatically
LVA_PROD
Main Product
Automatically
Value O n l y
Name
e r
Define the following valuations for the parameters:
Continued on next page
222
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
Name
S A P
3.
Define the following parameters for the XStep tree:
U s e
P a r t n
e r
2.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
1.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Symbol
Valuation
LVA_PROD_Q
Quantity Produced
Automatically
LVA_PROD_T
Description of Material
Automatically
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Automatically
Value
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Tabular Order Information.
5.
For the process instruction, create the following parameter outputs one after the other:
S A P
P a r t n
e r
4.
Description
Parameter Name
Order
LVA_ORDER
Product
LVA_PROD
Description
LVA_PROD_T
Production Quantity
LVA_PROD_Q
UoM
LVA_UOM
Inspection Lot
LVA_INSP
S A P
For the grouping, enter the description Order Information and as the data request type choose REPEATED Repeated Data Request.
7.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct and then simulate it.
8.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
9.
Save your SXS.
e r
6.
Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. 11. For your copied standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR ## Operation Information and the text GR## Tabular Output of Operation Information. Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
223
O n l y
10. Copy the standard XStep SXS: Operation Information from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Outputs to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372.
2010
P a r t n
U s e
Name
U s e
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. 12. Analyze the structure of the standard XStep. 13. Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct and then simulate it. 14. Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. O n l y e r
In your practice routing, under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Output in Tables.
2.
Under XStep Output in Tables, create an XStep with the description PI Type Repeated Data Request.
Task 10: Routing: Output in Tables; Repeated Data Request
Assign context operation 0040 to the XStep. Under XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, create an SXS reference with the description Type Repeated Data Request. Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text. 4.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
U s e
Symbol
Instruction
I n t e r n a l
Value
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
e r
Description of instruction
Valuation
O n l y
Parameter text: Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_04. The elements of process instructions of type Repeated Data Request are output in a table. The description of the grouping serves as the title of the table. Simulate the work instructions. Continued on next page
224
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
Description
S A P
S A P
3.
U s e
1.
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
15. Save the SXS.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
5.
Under XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, create another SXS reference with the description SXS: Order Information. Assign reference SXS: GR## Order Information.
6.
Under XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, create another SXS reference with the description SXS: Operation Information.
O n l y
Save your XSteps and your routing.
e r
7.
Your maintenance activities for outputs in tables cannot be fully tested when the work instructions are simulated in the routing. The symbol valuations for some parameters can only be made in the order. For this reason, now a create test work instruction according to the following procedure:
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order. Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for group counter 9.
S A P
S A P
Generate an inspection lot for the order. Create a control instruction for the test and save the order. In the control instructions monitor, send the new test control instruction.
U s e
Select and analyze the corresponding test work instructions.
I n t e r n a l
Task 11: SXS: Output in Tables; XSteps of the Same Structure In your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Material List and the text GR## Material Information for All Components. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
225
O n l y
Also check whether the short texts for the operations have been copied to the operation titles of operations 0030 and 0040 due to the use of SXS reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text.
e r
Check that the standard XSteps for outputs in tables defined above are processed correctly.
P a r t n
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
1.
U s e
P a r t n
Change your production order with order number TEST-##.
I n t e r n a l
Assign reference SXS: GR## Operation Information.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. For the XStep tree, enter the description Material List. Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree.
O n l y
2.
For XStep tree Material List, create an XStep with the description Material List.
e r
Assign generation For Confirmed Reservation Items to the XStep.
LVA_COMP
Material Component
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL
LVA_COMP_Q Component Quantity
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL_CONSUMED
LVA_COMP_T
Component Description
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL_SHORT_TEXT
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Local
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
U s e
Category Characteristic
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Symbol
Valuation
LVA_COMP
Material
Automatically
LVA_COMP_Q
Requirement Quantity (= Reserved Qty)
Automatically
LVA_COMP_T
Description of Material
Automatically
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Automatically
Value
O n l y
Name
e r
I n t e r n a l
4.
Continued on next page
226
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
Description
S A P
Name
U s e
P a r t n
Define the following parameters for the XStep:
S A P
3.
I n t e r n a l
Hint: To speed up the exercise, instead of creating the SXS, the SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion).
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
5.
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Material List.
6.
For the process instruction, create the following parameter outputs one after the other:
O n l y e r
O n l y
Description
Parameter Name
Material
LVA_COMP
Description
LVA_COMP_T
Requirement Quantity
LVA_COMP_Q
UoM
LVA_UOM
For the grouping, enter the description Material List and as the type of data request choose Simple Data Request.
8.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct and then simulate it.
U s e
7.
S A P
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
S A P
Hint: The generation can only be executed in the order. The output values are not therefore displayed in a table. 9.
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
P a r t n e r
10. Save your SXS.
U s e
Routing: Output in Tables; XSteps of the Same Structure Under XStep Output in Tables, create an XStep with the description Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure. Assign context operation 0060 to the XStep. Under XStep Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure, create an SXS reference with the description XSteps of the Same Structure. Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text. 3.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
227
O n l y
2.
e r
I n t e r n a l
1.
P a r t n
Task 12:
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Description
Symbol
Instruction
O n l y
Value
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
Parameter text:
e r
Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_05.
P a r t n
U s e
If multiple XSteps of the same process instruction structure are output one after the other, their elements are automatically displayed in a table. The description of the grouping serves as the title of the table. In our example, a structurally identical XStep with material information is output as a result of the definition of a generation for all material components of the operation.
I n t e r n a l
Description of instruction
Valuation
Simulate the work instructions.
S A P
Under XStep Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure, create another SXS reference with the description SXS: Material List.
S A P
4.
Assign reference SXS: GR## Material List.
U s e
Your maintenance activities for the output of a material list cannot be fully tested when the work instructions are simulated in the routing. The generation is only carried out in the order, and the symbol valuations for some parameters can only be made in the order. For this reason, now create test work instructions according to the following procedure:
e r
I n t e r n a l
5.
P a r t n
Save your XSteps and your routing.
Change your production order with order number TEST-##.
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for group counter 9. Generate an inspection lot for the order. Generate control instructions for the test.
Continued on next page
228
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Navigate to the XStep editor of the order and check whether the generation has been carried out for XStep Material List. Save your order. In the control instructions monitor, send the new test control instruction.
O n l y
Select and analyze the corresponding test work instruction.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Check whether the material components assigned to operation 0060 are displayed in a material list.
I n t e r n a l
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
229
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Solution 7: Outputs in Work Instructions Task 1: Creating an XStep Tree for the Practice Routing For plant 1000, open the standard routing of material T-SCM372-PP-## for group counter 9. Logistics → Production → Master Data → Routings → Routings → Standard Routings → Change Material:
T-SCM372-PP-##
Plant:
1000
Group counter:
9
U s e
P a r t n
e r
a)
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
1.
Enter 2.
In the routing, open the XStep editor. First, delete any XStep trees that are already in the XStep editor.
S A P
S A P
Create an XStep tree with the description Functions of the Execution Steps. a)
In the routing/operation overview, choose the XSteps icon. In the XStep editor, Delete XStep trees via the context menu
U s e
In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep tree).
e r
I n t e r n a l
Description: Functions of the Execution Steps
Task 2:
O n l y
Creating Long Text Outputs 1.
Under the XStep tree, create an XStep with the description Outputs.
Continued on next page
230
P a r t n
In the XStep editor, choose XStep Tree.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign your destination GR## Work Instructions 1 of type Work Instructions to the XStep. a)
In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Create → XStep In the context menu of the XStep, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Outputs On XStep tab page Destination,
e r
search for destination GR## Work Instructions 1 and assign it by double-clicking it. Under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Outputs Without Parameters.
U s e
P a r t n
2.
Assign context operation 0010 to the XStep. a)
In the context menu of XStep Outputs, choose
S A P
S A P
Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep).
U s e
On XStep tab page Context, assign operation 0010 by double-clicking it.
I n t e r n a l
a)
In the context menu of XStep Outputs Without Parameters,
O n l y
choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Output of Long Texts 4.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description My Work Section and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
Under XStep Outputs Without Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Output of Long Texts.
P a r t n
Description: Outputs Without Parameters
3.
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the XStep).
231
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Enter the following long text: Hint: The long text to be entered is stored in transaction SO10 as standard text SCM372_01 and can be included in the SAPscript editor. ----------------------O n l y e r
A FIRST long text output in a process instruction opens the area of a new work section. The description of the long text output (in the example: My Work Section) is used as the description of the new work section.
P a r t n
----------------------Simulate the work instructions.
S A P
In the context menu of the process instruction,
S A P
a)
choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties
U s e
P a r t n
(or double-click the long text output). Description: My Work Section Characteristic: PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text Choose Long Text.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
Characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT is suggested by default for creating a long text. You enter the long text for this characteristic in the SAPscript editor using the formatting options and functions provided by this tool.
I n t e r n a l
The elements of process instructions are output in work instructions within work sections.
Enter the long text as described in the exercise. Simulate the work instructions by choosing
O n l y
XSteps → Simulate 5.
For the process instruction, create another output of a long text with the description My Title and characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment.
Continued on next page
232
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Enter the following long text: Hint: The long text can be copied from the standard text SCM372_02 (transaction SO10) using cut and paste. ----------------------O n l y e r
An unlimited number of HTML source texts can be entered for characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML, for example to include elements from various different sources. Format the text using HTML elements .
P a r t n
-----------------------
I n t e r n a l
FURTHER long text outputs in the same process instruction are output within the same work section. The descriptions are used as titles for the long texts.
Simulate the work instructions. U s e
a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Output → Long Text
S A P
Enter the long text as described in the exercise.
S A P
(or double-click the long text output).
U s e
In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties
Description: My Title Characteristic: PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment
P a r t n
Simulate the work instructions by choosing XSteps → Simulate
I n t e r n a l
For the process instruction, create another output of a long text with the description My Note and characteristic PPPI_NOTE Note.
e r
6.
Enter the following long text: O n l y
Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_03. Notes in the background are entered for characteristic PPPI_NOTE.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
233
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Simulate the work instructions. a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the long text output). Description: My Note Characteristic: PPPI_NOTE Note Choose Long Text.
e r
Enter the long text as described in the exercise.
P a r t n
Simulate the work instructions by choosing XSteps → Simulate
U s e
Task 3: Outputting Various Data Types
S A P
Under XStep Outputs Without Parameters, create another process instruction with the description Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME. a)
In the context menu of XStep Outputs Without Parameters,
U s e
P a r t n
choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction).
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text.
Continued on next page
234
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new work section.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Description: Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME 2.
S A P
1.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Simulate the work instructions. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME, choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties I n t e r n a l
O n l y
(or double-click the long text output). Description: CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME Characteristic: PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text
e r
Do not enter a long text. Simulate the work instructions by choosing
3.
U s e
P a r t n
XSteps → Simulate For the process instruction, create the output of a character string with the description Output Character String (CHAR), characteristic PPPI_SHORT_TEXT, and value My Character Output.
S A P
a)
S A P
Simulate the work instructions. In the context menu of process instruction Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME, choose Create → Output → Character String
P a r t n
U s e
In the context menu of the character string, choose Properties (or double-click the character string). Description: Output Character String (CHAR)
I n t e r n a l
e r
Characteristic: PPPI_SHORT_TEXT Value: My Character Output
O n l y
Simulate the work instructions by choosing XSteps → Simulate 4.
For the process instruction, create the output of a numerical value with the description Output Numerical Value (NUM), characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE, and value 9999.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
235
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Simulate the work instructions. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME, choose Create → Output → Numeric Value In the context menu of the numeric value, choose Properties I n t e r n a l
O n l y
(or double-click the numeric value). Description: Output Numerical Value (NUM) Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
e r
Value: 9999 Simulate the work instructions by choosing
5.
For the process instruction, create the output of a date with the description Output of Date (DATE), characteristic PPPI_EVENT_DATE, and value 12.04.2010. Simulate the work instructions.
S A P
In the context menu of process instruction Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME,
S A P
a)
choose Create → Output → Date
U s e
P a r t n
In the context menu of the date, choose Properties (or double-click the date). Description: Output of Date (DATE) Characteristic: PPPI_EVENT_DATE I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
XSteps → Simulate
e r
Value: 12.04.2010 Simulate the work instructions by choosing
6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a time with the description Output of Time (TIME), characteristic PPPI_EVENT_TIME, and value 16:40:00.
Continued on next page
236
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
XSteps → Simulate
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Simulate the work instructions. a)
In the context menu of time Data Types CHAR, NUM, DATE, TIME, choose Create → Output → Time In the context menu of the date, choose Properties
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the time). Description: Output of Time (TIME) Characteristic: PPPI_EVENT_TIME Value: 16:40:00
e r
Simulate the work instructions by choosing
P a r t n
XSteps → Simulate
U s e
Task 4: Outputting Hyperlinks Under XStep Outputs Without Parameters, create another process instruction with the description Output of Hyperlinks. a)
In the context menu of XStep Outputs Without Parameters, choose Create → Process Instruction
U s e
(or double-click the process instruction). Description: Output of Hyperlinks For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Hyperlinks and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new work section.
e r
I n t e r n a l
2.
P a r t n
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties
S A P
S A P
1.
O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
237
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Simulate the work instructions. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Hyperlinks, choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the long text output). Description: Hyperlinks and Images Characteristic: PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text Do not enter a long text.
e r
Simulate the work instructions by choosing
3.
For the process instruction, create the output of a hyperlink with the description Hyperlink to SAP Home Page, characteristic PPPI_HYPERLINK Hyperlink, and value http://www.sap.com. Simulate the work instructions.
S A P
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Hyperlinks,
S A P
a)
choose Create → Output → Hyperlink In the context menu of the hyperlink, choose Properties
U s e
P a r t n
(or double-click the hyperlink). Description: Hyperlink to SAP Home Page Characteristic: PPPI_HYPERLINK Hyperlink Enter the text:
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
XSteps → Simulate
http://www.sap.com Simulate the work instructions by choosing
O n l y
XSteps → Simulate 4.
For the process instruction, create the output of another hyperlink with the description Hyperlink to SAP Logo (gif), characteristic PPPI_HYPERLINK Hyperlink, and value http://www.sap.com/global/images/SAPLogo.gif.
Continued on next page
238
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Simulate the work instructions. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Hyperlinks, choose Create → Output → Hyperlink In the context menu of the hyperlink, choose Properties
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the hyperlink). Description: Hyperlink to SAP Logo (gif) Characteristic: PPPI_HYPERLINK Hyperlink Enter the text:
e r
http://www.sap.com/global/images/SAPLogo.gif
P a r t n
Simulate the work instructions by choosing XSteps → Simulate
U s e
Task 5: Inputting and Outputting Parameters
S A P
S A P
1.
Under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Output of Parameters. Assign context operation 0020 to the XStep.
U s e
In the context menu of XStep Outputs, choose
P a r t n
a)
Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties
e r
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the XStep). Description: Output of Parameters On XStep tab page Context,
O n l y
Assign operation 0020 by double-clicking it. 2.
Define the following parameters for the XStep:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
239
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372
e r
Name
Description
Category Characteristic
LV_PARAM_1
Parameter 1 from Entry
Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LV_PARAM_2
Parameter 2 from Subordinate XStep
Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LV_PARAM_F
Parameter with Fixed Value
Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LVA_TIME
Time with Symbol Local Valuation
a)
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
PPPI_EVENT_TIME
On XStep tab page Parameters,
3.
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Symbol
Valuation
Value
LV_PARAM_1
None
LV_PARAM_2
None
LV_PARAM_F
Fixed Value
LVA_TIME
9999
Automatically P a r t n
a)
Valuation Time, Local Time Zone
S A P
S A P
Name
U s e
U s e
P a r t n
define the parameters as described in the exercise.
On XStep tab page Valuation,
4.
Under XStep Output of Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Entry of Parameter 1. In the context menu of XStep Output of Parameters,
O n l y
a)
e r
I n t e r n a l
define the valuations as described in the exercise.
choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Entry of Parameter 1
Continued on next page
240
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
5.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Entry of Local Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new work section.
O n l y
In the context menu of process instruction Entry of Parameter 1,
I n t e r n a l
a)
choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties (or double-click the long text output).
e r
Description: Entry of Local Parameter 1 Characteristic: PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text
6.
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_1 Parameter 1 from Entry.
S A P
In the context menu of process instruction Entry of Parameter 1,
S A P
a)
choose Create → Entry → Parameter Value In the context menu of the parameter value, choose Properties
U s e
Description: Entry of Parameter 1
e r
Parameter name: LV_PARAM_1 Parameter 1 from Entry Under XStep Output of Parameters, create another process instruction with the description Output of Local Parameter. a)
In the context menu of XStep Output of Parameters, choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Output of Local Parameter Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
241
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
P a r t n
(or double-click the parameter value).
7.
U s e
P a r t n
Do not enter a long text.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
8.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Output of Local Parameter and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new work section.
O n l y
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Local Parameter,
I n t e r n a l
a)
choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties (or double-click the long text output).
e r
Description: Output of Local Parameter
P a r t n
Characteristic: PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text Do not enter a long text. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output of Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
U s e
9.
Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_1.
S A P
S A P
a)
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Local Parameter, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value In the context menu of the output, choose Properties
U s e
Description: Output of Parameter 1
e r
Parameter name: LV_PARAM_1 Parameter 1 from Entry 10. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output Parameter Fixed Value and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
Continued on next page
242
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
P a r t n
(or double-click the output).
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_F. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Local Parameter, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value In the context menu of the output, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Output Parameter Fixed Value Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
e r
Parameter name: LV_PARAM_F Parameter with Fixed Value
Assign parameter name LVA_TIME. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Local Parameter, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value
S A P
S A P
In the context menu of the output, choose Properties (or double-click the output). Description: Time with Symbol Valuation
U s e
Parameter name: LVA_TIME Time with Symbol Valuation
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Local Parameter, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value In the context menu of the output, choose Properties (or double-click the output). Description: Output of Parameter 2 Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered) Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
243
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_2.
e r
12. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output of Parameter 2 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
P a r t n
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
a)
U s e
P a r t n
11. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Time with Symbol Valuation and characteristic PPPI_EVENT_TIME.
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the output).
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Parameter name: LV_PARAM_2 Parameter 2 from Subordinate XStep 13. Under XStep Output of Parameters, create an XStep with the description Output of Input Parameters. a)
In the context menu of XStep Output of Parameters, choose Create → XStep I n t e r n a l
O n l y
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep). Description: Output of Input Parameters
e r
14. Define the following input parameter for the XStep: Description
IV_PARAM_1Parameter from Superordinate XStep a)
Category
Characteristic
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
U s e
P a r t n
Name
On XStep tab page Parameters, S A P
S A P
define the parameter as described in the exercise. 15. Define the following reference valuation for the input parameter:
U s e
Symbol
IV_PARAM_1 a)
Valuation
Value
Reference
LV_PARAM_1
On XStep tab page Valuation,
I n t e r n a l
16. Under XStep Output of Input Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Output of Input Parameters.
O n l y
a)
In the context menu of XStep Output of Input Parameters, choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Output of Input Parameters Continued on next page
244
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
define the valuation as described in the exercise.
P a r t n
Name
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
17. For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Output of Input Parameters and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text. Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new work section. O n l y
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Input Parameters, choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties (or double-click the long text output).
e r
Description: Output of Input Parameters
P a r t n
Characteristic: PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text
I n t e r n a l
a)
Do not enter a long text. U s e
18. For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the description Output of Parameter 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name IV_PARAM_1.
S A P
In the context menu of process instruction Output of Input Parameters, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value
S A P
a)
In the context menu of the output, choose Properties
U s e
Description: Output of Parameter 1
Parameter name: IV_PARAM_1 Parameter from Superordinate XStep
a)
In the context menu of XStep Output of Parameters, choose Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep). Description: Entry of Output Parameters Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
245
O n l y
19. Under XStep Output of Parameters, create an XStep with the description Entry of Output Parameters.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
P a r t n
(or double-click the output).
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
20. Define the following output parameter for the XStep: Name
Description
a)
Characteristic
Output
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE I n t e r n a l
O n l y
OV_PARAM_2 Parameter for Superordinate XStep
Category
On XStep tab page Parameters, define the parameter as described in the exercise.
e r
21. Define the following reference valuation for the output parameter: Name
Symbol
a)
Reference
LV_PARAM_2
U s e
P a r t n
OV_PARAM_2
Valuation Value
On XStep tab page Valuation, define the valuation as described in the exercise.
S A P
a)
In the context menu of XStep Entry of Output Parameters,
S A P
22. Under XStep Entry of Output Parameters, create a process instruction with the description Entry of Output Parameters.
choose Create → Process Instruction P a r t n
U s e
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Entry of Output Parameters
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
23. For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the description Entry of Output Parameters and characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text.
Continued on next page
246
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Do not enter a long text. The long text output serves only to label a new work section. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Entry of Output Parameters, choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Entry of Output Parameters Characteristic: PPPI_MESSAGE_TEXT Message Text
e r
Do not enter a long text.
Assign parameter name OV_PARAM_2. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Entry of Output Parameters, choose Create → Entry → Parameter Value
S A P
S A P
In the context menu of the parameter value, choose Properties (or double-click the parameter value). Description: Entry of Parameter 2
U s e
Parameter name: OV_PARAM_2 Parameter for Superordinate XStep
I n t e r n a l
Choose an order quantity of 1 PC and a finish date in the future. Check whether group counter 9 is selected when you open the order. Create control instructions for the test and save the order.
Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
247
O n l y
Create a production order of type PP02 with order number TEST-## for material T-SCM372-PP-## in plant 1000.
e r
25. Your maintenance activities for XStep Output of Parameters cannot be fully tested when work instructions are simulated in the routing. For this reason, now create a test work instruction according to the following procedure:
P a r t n
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
2010
U s e
P a r t n
24. For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Parameter 2 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the long text output).
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
In the control instructions monitor, send the test control instructions. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
O n l y
a)
Create the order by choosing:
Material number:
T-SCM372-PP-##
Production plant:
1000
Order type:
PP02
Order:
TEST-##
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Order → Create → With Material
I n t e r n a l
Select and process the corresponding test work instruction. Check that the process instructions defined above are processed correctly using input and output parameters.
Total quantity:
S A P
S A P
Enter 1 PC
Enter a finish date in the future.
U s e
XSteps → Control Instructions/Recipe → Generate for Test
Choose the XSteps icon. In the XStep editor,
e r
Choose Save. Send the test control instructions by choosing: Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Control Instructions → Monitor Control Instructions/Recipes Plant:
1000
Mode:
Test
Production order:
TEST-## Continued on next page
248
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
Enter
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Choose Display. In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes, select the control instruction and send it.
Maintain the test work instruction by choosing
Plant:
1000
Mode:
Test
Process order:
TEST-## U s e
P a r t n
e r
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Work Instructions → Find
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
Execute (F8) In the list of work instructions,
S A P
S A P
select the work instruction, and choose Change Work Instructions (F5) In the work instructions,
P a r t n
U s e
enter parameter 1 and parameter 2 in operation 0020. Discuss the result.
Outputs with Text Symbols 1.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
249
O n l y
Under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Outputs with Text Symbols.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Task 6:
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign context operation 0030 to the XStep. a)
In the context menu of XStep Outputs, choose Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the XStep). Description: Outputs with Text Symbols On XStep tab page Context, assign operation 0030 by double-clicking it. Define the following parameters for the XStep: Category
Characteristic
LV_INSTR
Long Text
Local
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LV_TITLE_1
Description 1
Local
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LV_TITLE_2
Description 2
Local
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LVA_DATE
Date
Local
PPPI_EVENT_DATE
S A P
Description
S A P
Name
(Symbol Valuation)
U s e
On XStep tab page Parameters,
P a r t n
a)
define the parameters as described in the exercise. Define the following valuations for the parameters:
e r
I n t e r n a l
3.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
2.
O n l y
Continued on next page
250
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Name
Symbol
LV_INSTR
Description of the XStep
LV_TITLE_2
Fixed Value
Text for LV_INSTR; see below
Automatically Fixed Value
Valuation Date, Local Time Zone
Text for LV_TITLE_2; see below
Automatically
e r
LVA_DATE
Value
P a r t n
Text for LV_INSTR:
U s e
----------------------My long text output, line 1 My long text output, line 2
S A P
S A P
My long text output, line 3 ----------------------Text for LV_TITLE_2:
U s e
On XStep tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
Under XStep Outputs with Text Symbols, create a process instruction with the description Outputs with Text Symbols. a)
In the context menu of XStep Outputs with Text Symbols, O n l y
choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Outputs with Text Symbols 5.
2010
e r
I n t e r n a l
4.
P a r t n
current date a)
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
LV_TITLE_1
Valuation
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the text symbol description &LV_TITLE_1& and characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment. Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
251
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Enter the following long text with text symbols: ----------------------&LV_TITLE_2&: &LVA_DATE& &LV_INSTR& O n l y
a)
I n t e r n a l
----------------------In the context menu of process instruction Outputs with Text Symbols, choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties
e r
(or double-click the long text output).
P a r t n
Description: &LV_TITLE_1& Characteristic: PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment
U s e
Enter the following long text with text symbols: &LV_TITLE_2&: &LVA_DATE&
S A P
6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter with the text symbol description &LV_TITLE_2& and characteristic PPPI_EVENT_DATE.
S A P
&LV_INSTR&
Assign parameter name LVA_DATE.
U s e
P a r t n
a)
In the context menu of process instruction Outputs with Text Symbols, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value In the context menu of the output, choose Properties
Description: &LV_TITLE_2& Characteristic: PPPI_EVENT_DATE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered) Parameter name: LVA_DATE Date (Symbol Valuation) 7.
Simulate the work instructions and check that the process instructions for outputs with text symbols defined above are processed correctly. a)
XSteps → Simulate
Continued on next page
252
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
(or double-click the output).
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Task 7: Creating a Standard XStep for Long Text Outputs 1.
Access plant 1000 in the standard XStep repository. Under folder Standard XSteps, create your own folder with the description GR## SCM372 and the text GR## Practice Data SCM372.
O n l y
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository Plant: 1000 In the context menu of the Standard XSteps folder,
e r
choose Create → Folder In the context menu of the new folder, choose Properties
I n t e r n a l
a)
U s e
P a r t n
(or double-click the folder). Description: GR## SCM372 Text: GR## Practice Data SCM372 In your folder, create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Instruction Text and the text GR## Instruction Text with Input Parameters.
S A P
S A P
2.
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
For the XStep tree, enter the description Instruction Text with Input Parameters.
O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
253
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree. a)
In the context menu of folder GR## SCM372, choose Create → Standard XStep In the context menu of the standard XStep, choose Properties
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the standard XStep). Description: SXS GR## Instruction Text Text: GR## Instruction Text with Input Parameters In the context menu of the version, choose Properties
e r
(or double-click the version).
P a r t n
Version: 0001 Validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
U s e
In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep tree).
S A P
S A P
Description: Instruction Text with Input Parameters On XStep tree tab page Destination, assign destination type Work Instructions/PI Sheet.
U s e
Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_INSTR
Instruction
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
IV_TITLE
Description of instruction
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
LVA_OPTEXT
Short text for operation
Local
PPPI_OPERATION_SHORT_TEXT
On XStep tree tab page Parameters, define the parameters as described in the exercise.
4.
Define the following valuations for the parameters:
Continued on next page
254
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
a)
e r
I n t e r n a l
Define the following parameters for the XStep tree:
P a r t n
3.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Name
Symbol
None
IV_TITLE
Description of the Automatically XStep
LVA_OPTEXT
Short text of operation
a)
Value
Automatically
On XStep tree tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
e r
5.
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Instruction Text.
P a r t n
a)
In the context menu of the XStep tree,
U s e
choose Create → Process Instruction
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
IV_INSTR
Valuation
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction).
S A P
6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a long text with the text symbol description &IV_TITLE& and characteristic PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment.
P a r t n
U s e
Enter the following long text with text symbol: &IV_INSTR& a)
In the context menu of the process instruction,
I n t e r n a l
e r
choose Create → Output → Long Text In the context menu of the long text output, choose Properties
O n l y
(or double-click the long text output). Description: &IV_TITLE& Characteristic: PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML HTML Fragment Enter the following long text with text symbols: &IV_INSTR&
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
S A P
Description: Instruction text
255
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
7.
In the Characteristics view, assign characteristic PPPI_PHASE_SHORT_TEXT with the value &LVA_OPTEXT& to the process instruction. Note: This means that, when this XStep is used and the operation context is known, the corresponding short text for the operation is automatically copied over into the operation title of the set of work sections.
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). On tab page Characteristics,
e r
Value: &LVA_OPTEXT& 8.
U s e
Characteristic: PPPI_PHASE_SHORT_TEXT
P a r t n
choose Insert Row.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct. a)
For the XStep tree, choose XSteps → Check
S A P
S A P
9.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. a)
In the context menu of the version, choose Change Status → Release
P a r t n
U s e
10. Save your SXS. a)
Choose Save.
e r
Text Output Using the Standard XStep in the Routing 1.
In your practice routing, under XStep Outputs with Text Symbols, create an SXS reference with the label My SXS Instruction.
Continued on next page
256
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Task 8:
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text. a)
Call the routing for group counter 9 of material T-SCM372-PP-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor. In the context menu of XStep Outputs with Text Symbols, choose Create → SXS Reference I n t e r n a l
O n l y
In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference). Description: My SXS Instruction
e r
On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Instruction Text. Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Description
Symbol
Description of instruction
Value
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
P a r t n
U s e
Parameter text: My long text output for standard XStep Instruction Text . a)
On tab page Valuation,
e r
Simulate the work instructions. a)
XSteps → Simulate O n l y
I n t e r n a l
define the valuations as described in the exercise. 3.
Task 9: SXS: Output in Tables; PI Type Repeated Data Request 1.
In your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Order Information and the text GR## Tabular Output of Order Information. Continued on next page
2010
S A P
S A P
Instruction
Valuation
U s e
P a r t n
2.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
257
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. For the XStep tree, enter the description Tabular Order Information. Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree. a)
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository Plant: 1000
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of folder GR## SCM372, choose Create → Standard XStep In the context menu of the standard XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the standard XStep).
e r
Description: SXS GR## Order Information
P a r t n
Text: GR## Tabular Output of Order Information
U s e
In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version). Version: 0001
S A P
S A P
Validity period: today until 31.12.9999 In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep tree).
U s e
P a r t n
Description: Tabular Order Information On XStep tree tab page Destination, assign destination type Work Instructions/PI Sheet. Define the following parameters for the XStep tree: Description
Category
Characteristic
LVA_INSP
Inspection Lot
Local
PPPI_INSPECTION_LOT
LVA_ORDER
Order
Local
PPPI_PRODUCTION_ORDER
LVA_PROD
Product
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL
O n l y
Name
e r
I n t e r n a l
2.
Continued on next page
258
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
LVA_PROD_Q
Production Quantity
Local
PPPI_ORDER_QUANTITY
LVA_PROD_T
Product Description
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL_SHORT_TEXT
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Local
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
a)
On XStep tree tab page Parameters,
e r
define the parameters as described in the exercise.
S A P
Symbol
Valuation
LVA_INSP
Inspection Lot
Automatically
LVA_ORDER
Order
Automatically
LVA_PROD
Main Product
Automatically
LVA_PROD_Q
Quantity Produced
Automatically
LVA_PROD_T
Description of Material
Automatically
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Automatically
a)
Value
P a r t n
Name
S A P
U s e
Define the following valuations for the parameters:
U s e
P a r t n
3.
On XStep tree tab page Valuation,
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Tabular Order Information.
e r
a)
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
define the valuations as described in the exercise. 4.
In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Tabular Order Information
Continued on next page
2010
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n e r
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
259
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
e r
For the process instruction, create the following parameter outputs one after the other: Description
Parameter Name
Order
LVA_ORDER
Product
LVA_PROD
Description
LVA_PROD_T
Production Quantity
LVA_PROD_Q
UoM
LVA_UOM
Inspection Lot
LVA_INSP
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value to define the parameter outputs as described in the exercise.
6.
For the grouping, enter the description Order Information and as the data request type choose REPEATED Repeated Data Request.
S A P
S A P
a)
U s e
P a r t n
a)
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
5.
In the context menu of the grouping, choose Properties (or double-click the grouping). Description: Order Information
P a r t n
U s e
Type of data request: REPEATED Repeated Data Request 7.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct and then simulate it. a)
For the XStep tree, choose
I n t e r n a l
e r
XSteps → Check XSteps → Simulate Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. a)
O n l y
8.
In the context menu of the version, choose Change Status → Release
9.
Save your SXS. a)
Choose Save.
Continued on next page
260
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
10. Copy the standard XStep SXS: Operation Information from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Outputs to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372. Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. O n l y
In folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Outputs, In the context menu of standard XStep SXS: Operation Information, choose
e r
Copy In the context menu of folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372, choose
Paste 11. For your copied standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR ## Operation Information and the text GR## Tabular Output of Operation Information.
S A P
a)
S A P
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
U s e
P a r t n
Change
I n t e r n a l
a)
In the context menu of the copied standard XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the standard XStep).
P a r t n
U s e
Description: SXS GR## Operation Information Text: GR## Tabular Output of Operation Information In the context menu of the version, choose Properties
I n t e r n a l
e r
(or double-click the version). Version: 0001
O n l y
Validity period: today until 31.12.9999 12. Analyze the structure of the standard XStep. a)
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
261
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
13. Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct and then simulate it. a)
For the XStep tree, choose XSteps → Check XSteps → Simulate
O n l y
a)
I n t e r n a l
14. Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. In the context menu of the version, choose Change Status → Release 15. Save the SXS.
e r
a)
Choose Save.
P a r t n
Task 10: 1.
In your practice routing, under XStep Outputs, create an XStep with the description Output in Tables. Call the routing for group counter 9 of material T-SCM372-PP-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor.
S A P
a) S A P
U s e
Routing: Output in Tables; Repeated Data Request
In the context menu of XStep Outputs, choose Create → XStep
P a r t n
U s e
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep). Description: Output in Tables
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Under XStep Output in Tables, create an XStep with the description PI Type Repeated Data Request.
e r
2.
Continued on next page
262
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign context operation 0040 to the XStep. a)
In the context menu of XStep Output in Tables, choose Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: PI Type Repeated Data Request On XStep tab page Context, assign operation 0040 by double-clicking it.
e r
3.
Under XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, create an SXS reference with the description Type Repeated Data Request.
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the XStep).
a)
U s e
P a r t n
Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text. In the context menu of XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties S A P
S A P
(or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Type Repeated Data Request On tab page Reference,
U s e
4.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
Instruction
Valuation
Value
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
O n l y
Description of instruction
Symbol
Description of the Automatically XStep
Parameter text: Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_04.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Description
P a r t n
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Instruction Text.
263
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
The elements of process instructions of type Repeated Data Request are output in a table. The description of the grouping serves as the title of the table. Simulate the work instructions. a)
On tab page Valuation,
O n l y
XSteps → Simulate 5.
Under XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, create another SXS reference with the description SXS: Order Information.
e r
Assign reference SXS: GR## Order Information.
P a r t n
a)
In the context menu of XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request,
I n t e r n a l
define the valuations as described in the exercise.
choose Create → SXS Reference U s e
In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
S A P
S A P
Description: SXS: Order Information On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Order Information.
U s e
Under XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request, create another SXS reference with the description SXS: Operation Information. Assign reference SXS: GR## Operation Information. Save your XSteps and your routing.
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of XStep PI Type Repeated Data Request,
e r
a)
choose Create → SXS Reference
O n l y
In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference). Description: SXS: Operation Information On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Operation Information. Choose Save. Continued on next page
264
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
6.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
7.
Your maintenance activities for outputs in tables cannot be fully tested when the work instructions are simulated in the routing. The symbol valuations for some parameters can only be made in the order. For this reason, now a create test work instruction according to the following procedure: Change your production order with order number TEST-##.
O n l y
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for group counter 9. Generate an inspection lot for the order.
e r
Create a control instruction for the test and save the order.
P a r t n
In the control instructions monitor, send the new test control instruction.
U s e
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Select and analyze the corresponding test work instructions.
S A P
Also check whether the short texts for the operations have been copied to the operation titles of operations 0030 and 0040 due to the use of SXS reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text.
U s e
P a r t n
Change the order by choosing: Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Order → Change Order: TEST-## Enter
e r
I n t e r n a l
S A P
Check that the standard XSteps for outputs in tables defined above are processed correctly.
a)
I n t e r n a l
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
Choose XSteps In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Delete
O n l y
Choose Save. Choose Order → Change Choose Functions → Read PP Master Data. Choose Functions → Inspection Lot → Create. Choose the XSteps icon. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
265
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
XSteps → Control Instructions/Recipe → Generate for Test Choose Save. Send the test control instruction by choosing: Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Control Instructions → Monitor Control Instructions/Recipes I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Plant: 1000 Mode: Test Production order: TEST-##
e r
Choose Display. In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes,
U s e
P a r t n
select the control instructions and send them. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Maintain the test work instructions by choosing
S A P
Plant: 1000
U s e
P a r t n
Mode: Test Production order: TEST-## Execute (F8) In the list of work instructions,
e r
I n t e r n a l
S A P
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Work Instructions → Find
select the work instruction, and choose Change Work Instructions (F5).
O n l y
Task 11: SXS: Output in Tables; XSteps of the Same Structure 1.
In your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Material List and the text GR## Material Information for All Components. Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. Continued on next page
266
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
For the XStep tree, enter the description Material List. Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree. Hint: To speed up the exercise, instead of creating the SXS, the SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion). O n l y
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository Plant: 1000 In the context menu of folder GR## SCM372,
e r
choose Create → Standard XStep
P a r t n
In the context menu of the standard XStep, choose Properties.
I n t e r n a l
a)
(or double-click the standard XStep). U s e
Description: SXS GR## Material List Text: GR## Material Information for All Components In the context menu of the version, choose Properties
S A P U s e
S A P
(or double-click the version).
In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Properties
Version: 0001 Validity period: today until 31.12.9999
P a r t n
(or double-click the XStep tree). Description: Material List
assign destination type Work Instructions/PI Sheet. 2.
For XStep tree Material List, create an XStep with the description Material List.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
267
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
On XStep tree tab page Destination,
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign generation For Confirmed Reservation Items to the XStep. a)
In the context menu of the XStep tree Material List, choose Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Material List On XStep tab page Generation, assign generation For Confirmed Reservation Items by double-clicking it.
S A P
Name
Description
Category Characteristic
LVA_COMP
Material Component
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL
LVA_COMP_Q Component Quantity
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL_CONSUMED
LVA_COMP_T
Component Description
Local
PPPI_MATERIAL_SHORT_TEXT
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Local
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
P a r t n
a)
On XStep tab page Parameters, define the parameters as described in the exercise.
Define the following valuations for the parameters:
e r
I n t e r n a l
4.
S A P
U s e
Define the following parameters for the XStep:
U s e
P a r t n
e r
3.
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the XStep).
O n l y
Continued on next page
268
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Name
Symbol
Valuation
LVA_COMP
Material
Automatically
LVA_COMP_Q
Requirement Quantity (= Reserved Qty)
Automatically
LVA_COMP_T
Description of Material
Automatically
LVA_UOM
Unit of Measure
Automatically
e r
a)
Value
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n e r
On XStep tab page Valuation,
5.
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Material List. a)
In the context menu of the XStep,
U s e
P a r t n
define the valuations as described in the exercise.
choose Create → Process Instruction S A P
S A P
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Material List
U s e
Parameter Name
Material
LVA_COMP
Description
LVA_COMP_T
Requirement Quantity
LVA_COMP_Q
UoM
LVA_UOM
a)
O n l y
Description
e r
I n t e r n a l
For the process instruction, create the following parameter outputs one after the other:
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value to define the parameter outputs as described in the exercise.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
6.
269
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
7.
For the grouping, enter the description Material List and as the type of data request choose Simple Data Request. a)
In the context menu of the grouping, choose Properties (or double-click the grouping). Description: Material List
O n l y
8.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct and then simulate it.
e r
Hint: The generation can only be executed in the order. The output values are not therefore displayed in a table.
P a r t n
a)
For the XStep tree, choose
U s e
XSteps → Check XSteps → Simulate 9.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. S A P
a)
S A P
I n t e r n a l
Data request type: Simple Data Request
In the context menu of the version, choose Change Status → Release
10. Save your SXS.
U s e
P a r t n
a)
Choose Save.
Task 12: 1.
Under XStep Output in Tables, create an XStep with the description Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Routing: Output in Tables; XSteps of the Same Structure
O n l y
Continued on next page
270
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign context operation 0060 to the XStep. a)
Call the routing for group counter 9 of material T-SCM372-PP-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor. In the context menu of XStep Output in Tables, choose Create → XStep I n t e r n a l
O n l y
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep). Description: Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure
e r
On XStep tab page Context, assign operation 0060 by double-clicking it. Under XStep Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure, create an SXS reference with the description XSteps of the Same Structure. Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text. a)
In the context menu of XStep Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure,
S A P
S A P
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
U s e
On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Instruction Text.
Description
Description of instruction
Valuation
Value
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
271
O n l y
Instruction
Symbol
e r
I n t e r n a l
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
P a r t n
Description: XSteps of the Same Structure
3.
U s e
P a r t n
2.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Parameter text: Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_05.
O n l y e r
Simulate the work instructions. a)
On tab page Valuation,
XSteps → Simulate 4.
Under XStep Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure, create another SXS reference with the description SXS: Material List.
S A P
Save your XSteps and your routing. a)
In the context menu of XStep Grouping of XSteps of the Same Structure,
U s e
P a r t n
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference). Description: SXS: Material List I n t e r n a l
S A P
Assign reference SXS: GR## Material List.
U s e
P a r t n
define the valuations as described in the exercise.
I n t e r n a l
If multiple XSteps of the same process instruction structure are output one after the other, their elements are automatically displayed in a table. The description of the grouping serves as the title of the table. In our example, a structurally identical XStep with material information is output as a result of the definition of a generation for all material components of the operation.
e r
On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Material List. Your maintenance activities for the output of a material list cannot be fully tested when the work instructions are simulated in the routing. The generation is only carried out in the order, and the symbol valuations for some parameters can only be made in the order. For this reason, now create test work instructions according to the following procedure: Change your production order with order number TEST-##. In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order. Continued on next page
272
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
5.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for group counter 9. Generate an inspection lot for the order. Generate control instructions for the test.
O n l y
Save your order. In the control instructions monitor, send the new test control instruction.
e r
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
Check whether the material components assigned to operation 0060 are displayed in a material list. a)
Change the order by choosing:
S A P
S A P
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Order → Change Order: TEST-## Enter
U s e
P a r t n
Choose XSteps In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Delete Choose Save. Choose Order → Change
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Select and analyze the corresponding test work instruction.
I n t e r n a l
Navigate to the XStep editor of the order and check whether the generation has been carried out for XStep Material List.
Choose Functions → Read PP Master Data. Choose Functions → Inspection Lot → Create.
O n l y
Choose the XSteps icon. XSteps → Control Instructions/Recipe → Generate for Test Choose Save. Send the test control instructions by choosing: Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Control Instructions → Monitor Control Instructions/Recipes Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
273
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Plant: 1000 Mode: Test Production order: TEST-## Choose Display. O n l y
select the control instruction and send it. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
e r
Maintain the test work instruction by choosing
U s e
P a r t n
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Work Instructions → Find
I n t e r n a l
In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes,
Plant: 1000 Mode: Test Process order: TEST-##
S A P
S A P
Execute (F8) In the list of work instructions, select the work instruction,
P a r t n e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
and choose Change Work Instructions (F5).
O n l y
274
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Exercise 8: Entries and Calculations in PI Sheets Exercise Objectives O n l y e r
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Define entries with default values and value check • Define the calculation of a values • Define table entries and calculations • Define the entry of signatures
Business Example
Hint: Complete the exercises on this topic if you want to use master recipes and process orders.
S A P
Task 1:
U s e
1.
In the standard XStep repository, in your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Parameter Entry with Check and the text GR## Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check.
I n t e r n a l
e r
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
P a r t n
SXS: Parameter Entry with Check
S A P
Complete the exercises on the following topic, Entries and Calculations in Work Instructions, if you want to use routings and production orders.
U s e
P a r t n
You are defining entries and calculations in PI sheets.
For the XStep tree, enter the description Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check.
Hint: Alternatively, the corresponding SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion). 2.
Define the following parameters for XStep tree Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check: Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
275
O n l y
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372
e r P a r t n
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_DEF
Target Value
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_LOWER
Lower Limit
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_TITLE
Description of Input Value
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
IV_UOM
Unit of Measure
Input
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
IV_UPPER
Upper Limit
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
OV_PARAM
Input Parameter for Superordinate XStep
Output
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
Define the following valuations for the parameters:
S A P
Symbol
IV_DEF
None
IV_LOWER
None Description of the XStep
Value
Automatically
IV_UOM
None
IV_UPPER
None
OV_PARAM
None
P a r t n
IV_TITLE U s e
Valuation
S A P
Name
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check.
5.
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description &IV_TITLE& and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name OV_PARAM Input Parameter for Superordinate XStep. On the Default Value tab page, assign parameter IV_DEF Target Value. On the Input Validation tab page, assign the formula X > IV_LOWER AND X< IV_UPPER. Continued on next page
276
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
4.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
3.
Name
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
On the Error Handling tab page, assign acceptance 03 Only with Signature for an incorrect value. On the Error Handling tab page, define the following warning message to be displayed if the check ends with errors:
O n l y
----------------------The value is outside the tolerance.
e r
Lower limit: &IV_LOWER& Upper limit: &IV_UPPER&
----------------------6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter without a description.
U s e
P a r t n
You must confirm the transfer of values outside the tolerance with a signature.
I n t e r n a l
Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_06.
7.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct.
8.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
9.
Save your SXS.
S A P
S A P
Assign parameter name IV_UOM.
U s e
Recipe: Entry with Default Value and Value Check In your practice recipe, under XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps create an XStep with the description Entries and Calculations. Assign your destination GR## PI Sheet 1 of type PI Sheet to the XStep.
2.
Under XStep Entries and Calculations, create an SXS Reference with the description Entry with Default Value and Value Check.
3.
Under XStep Entry with Default Value and Value Check, create an SXS Reference with the description Input Validation.
O n l y
Assign context phase 0220 to the XStep.
Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction. 4.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
1.
P a r t n
Task 2:
277
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Description
Symbol
Work Instruction Description of Work Instruction
O n l y
Value
None Description of the Automatically XStep
Under XStep Entry with Default Value and Value Check, create an SXS reference with the description Enter Temperature . Assign reference SXS: GR ## Parameter Entry with Check.
6.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Valuation
Value
Target Value
Fixed Value
50
Lower Limit
Fixed Value
45
Description of the XStep
Automatically Fixed Value
°C
Upper Limit
Fixed Value
55
Input Parameter for Superordinate XStep
None
Hint: It is possible to test the input validation in a test PI sheet; this will be done in one of the following exercises. Check the entire XStep tree and save your recipe.
e r
I n t e r n a l
7.
P a r t n
U s e
Unit of Measure
S A P
S A P
Description of Input Value
Symbol
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Description
I n t e r n a l
5.
Valuation
Task 3: SXS: Calculation of a Value In the standard XStep repository, in your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Calculation of a Value and the text GR## Calculation of a Value. Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. For the XStep tree, enter the description Calculation of a Value. Continued on next page
278
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
1.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree. Hint: Alternatively, the corresponding SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion). Define the following parameters for XStep tree Calculation of a Value:
S A P
Category
Characteristic
IV_PARAM_1 Formula Parameter 1
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_PARAM_2 Formula Parameter 2
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IT_PARAM_3 Formula Parameter 3
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IT_PARAM_4 Formula Parameter 4
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_TITLE
Description of Calculated Value
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
IV_UOM
Unit of Measure
Input
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
OV_CALC
Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep
Output
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
P a r t n e r
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Name
Symbol
Valuation
IV_PARAM_1
None
IV_PARAM_2
None
IT_PARAM_3
None
IT_PARAM_4
None
Value
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
For parameters IT_PARAM_3 and IT_PARAM_4, set the Tabular Value indicator. 3.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
S A P
U s e
Description
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Name
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
2.
279
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372
Name
Symbol
Valuation
IV_TITLE
Description of the Automatically XStep
IV_UOM
None
OV_CALC
None
Value
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Calculation of a Value.
5.
For the process instruction, create a calculation with the description &IV_TITLE& and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
e r
4.
Assign parameter name OV_CALC Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep.
P a r t n
6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter without a description.
S A P
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct.
8.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
9.
Save your SXS.
S A P
7.
U s e
Assign parameter name IV_UOM.
Task 4:
U s e
In your practice recipe, under XStep Entries and Calculations, create an XStep with the description Calculation .
2.
Under XStep Calculation, create a SXS reference with the description Calculation of a Value.
e r
I n t e r n a l
1.
Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction. Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
Work Instruction Description of Work Instruction
Symbol
Valuation
O n l y
Description
4.
Value
None Description of the Automatically XStep
Under XStep Calculation, create an XStep with the description Entry of 2 Values. Continued on next page
280
P a r t n
Recipe: Calculation of a Value
3.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
O n l y
Define the following parameters for the XStep: Name
Description
LV_PARAM_1
Input Parameter 1 Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LV_PARAM_2
Input Parameter 2 Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
Characteristic
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Name
e r
Category
Symbol
Valuation
LV_PARAM_1
None
LV_PARAM_2
None
Value
8.
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Value 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_1 Input Parameter 1.
9.
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Value 2 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
U s e
10. Under XStep Entry of 2 Values, create a SXS reference with the description Value 1 + Value 2.
Description
Symbol
Valuation
Value
Formula Parameter 1
Reference
LV_PARAM_1
Formula Parameter 2
Reference
LV_PARAM_2
Formula Parameter 3
None
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
281
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
11. Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
e r
Assign reference SXS: GR## Calculation of a Value.
P a r t n
Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_2 Input Parameter 2.
S A P
Under XStep Entry of 2 Values, create a process instruction with the description Entry of 2 Values.
U s e
7.
I n t e r n a l
6.
P a r t n
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
5.
S A P
P a r t n e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Description
Symbol
Formula Parameter 4
Value
None Description of the Automatically XStep
Unit of Measure
None
Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep
None
e r
12. Explode SXS reference Value 1 + Value 2 so that you can enter a calculation formula.
P a r t n
14. Check the entire XStep tree and save your recipe.
S A P
Change your process order with order number TEST-##.
S A P
15. Your maintenance activities for the default value, input validation, and calculation cannot be fully tested when the PI sheet is simulated in the recipe. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet according to the following procedure:
U s e
13. For calculation &IV_TITLE&, define the following calculation formula: IV_PARAM_1 + IV_PARAM_2
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Description of Calculated Value
Valuation
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
U s e I n t e r n a l
On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt, assign batch number BATCH##.
e r
Generate an inspection lot for the order.
P a r t n
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for production version 0009.
Carry out a batch determination for all material components of the order. O n l y
Generate a control recipe for test purposes. Save the order. In the control recipe monitor, send the new test control recipe. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
Continued on next page
282
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Select and analyze the corresponding test PI sheet. Check whether the default value, the value check, and the calculation formula have been processed correctly for phase 0220.
Task 5: SXS: Tabular entries with input check O n l y
Export the standard XStep SXS: Tabular entries with input check from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Entries to a local storage location (for example, to your desktop). Name the exported file GR##Tab.xml.
e r
Then import file GR##Tab.xml to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372.
I n t e r n a l
1.
2.
For your imported standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR## Table Entry with Check and the text GR## Table Entry with Tolerance Check.
S A P U s e
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep.
4.
Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct.
5.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
6.
Save the SXS.
P a r t n
3.
S A P
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
Task 6:
I n t e r n a l
Then import file GR##Sign.xml to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372. Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. 2.
For your imported standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR## Entry of a Signature and the text GR## Entry of a Signature. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
283
O n l y
Export the standard XStep SXS: Entry Signature from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Entries to a local storage location (for example, to your desktop). Name the exported file GR##Sign.xml.
e r
SXS: Entry of a Signature 1.
U s e
P a r t n
Hint: Note: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
5.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. Save the SXS.
6.
1.
In your practice recipe, under XStep Entries and Calculations, create an XStep with the description Table Entry and Calculation.
2.
Under XStep Table Entry and Calculation, create an SXS reference with the description Table and Calculation.
Task 7: Recipe: Table Entry and Calculation
Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction.
Description of Work Instruction
Symbol
Work Instruction
Valuation
Value
Fixed Value
Text for LV_INSTR; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
e r
I n t e r n a l
Text for LV_INSTR:
P a r t n
Description
S A P
S A P
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
U s e
3.
U s e
O n l y
Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct.
e r
4.
P a r t n
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep.
I n t e r n a l
3.
Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_07.
The parameter for the input value and the parameters for the output of date and time are defined as table parameters .
Continued on next page
284
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
-----------------------
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Parameter values of this kind are stored separately for each table line. Using parameter value _[1], parameter value _[2], and so on, you can access the values of the individual lines, and using parameter value _[SUM] and parameter value _[COUNT], you can access the total sum of the values entered and the number of values entered. Calculations can be executed automatically, controlled by events. O n l y e r
----------------------Under XStep Table Entry and Calculation, create an SXS reference with the description Temperature. Assign reference SXS: GR ## Table Entry with Check. 5.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Valuation
Value
Target Value
Fixed Value
50
Lower Limit
Fixed Value
45
Table Title
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
Unit of Measure
Fixed Value
°C
Upper Limit
Fixed Value
55
e r
Parameter text: Temperature profile 6.
Explode SXS reference Temperature so that you can define another hierarchically subordinate reference to the calculation.
7.
Under exploded XStep Tabular Entries with Input Check, create an SXS reference with the description Average Temperature. Assign reference SXS: GR## Calculation of a Value. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
285
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Description of Input Value
P a r t n
U s e
Symbol
S A P
S A P
Description
U s e
P a r t n
4.
I n t e r n a l
Signatures are entered for characteristic PPPI_SIGNATURE. A signature is used to complete the previously used process instructions until either a previous signature or the start of the PI sheet is reached. After completion, the process instructions can no longer be edited.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
8.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
None
Formula Parameter 2
None
Formula Parameter 3
Reference
Formula Parameter 4
None
e r
Description of the XStep
Value
LT_PARAM_1
Automatically
Unit of Measure
Reference
Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep
None
IV_UOM
Explode SXS reference Average Temperature so that you can define a calculation formula.
S A P
S A P
10. For calculation &IV_TITLE&, define the following calculation formula: IT_PARAM_3[SUM] / IT_PARAM_3[COUNT] The calculation is to be executed automatically after internal event PARAMETER_CHANGED.
U s e
Assign reference SXS: GR## Entry of a Signature. 12. Check the entire XStep tree and save your recipe.
I n t e r n a l
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order. Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for production version 0009. On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt, assign batch number BATCH##. Generate an inspection lot for the order. Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Change your process order with order number TEST-##.
e r
13. Your maintenance activities for table entries with calculations and for signatures cannot be fully tested when the PI sheet is simulated in the recipe. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet according to the following procedure:
P a r t n
11. Under XStep Table Entry and Calculation, create an SXS reference with the description Complete and Check.
286
U s e
P a r t n
Valuation
Formula Parameter 1
Description of Calculated Value
9.
Symbol
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Description
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Carry out a batch determination for all material components of the order. Generate a control recipe for test purposes. Save the order.
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Select and analyze the corresponding test PI sheet. Check whether the table entry with value check, the calculation formula for automatic calculation of the average temperature, and the signature have been processed correctly for phase 0220.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
In the control recipe monitor, send the new test control recipe.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
287
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Solution 8: Entries and Calculations in PI Sheets Task 1: SXS: Parameter Entry with Check O n l y
In the standard XStep repository, in your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Parameter Entry with Check and the text GR## Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check.
e r
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. For the XStep tree, enter the description Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check.
I n t e r n a l
1.
Hint: Alternatively, the corresponding SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion).
S A P
Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository Plant:
1100 P a r t n
U s e
S A P
a)
In the context menu of folder GR## SCM372, choose Create → Standard XStep In the context menu of the standard XStep, choose Properties
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree.
(or double-click the standard XStep). Description: SXS: GR ## Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check
O n l y
Text: GR## Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version). Version: 0001 Validity period: today until 31.12.9999 In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Properties Continued on next page
288
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
(or double-click the XStep tree). Description: Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check On XStep tree tab page Destination, assign destination type Work Instructions/PI Sheet. O n l y e r P a r t n S A P
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_DEF
Target Value
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_LOWER
Lower Limit
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_TITLE
Description of Input Value
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
IV_UOM
Unit of Measure
Input
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
IV_UPPER
Upper Limit
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
OV_PARAM
Input Parameter for Superordinate XStep
Output
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
P a r t n
a)
S A P
Name
On XStep tree tab page Parameters, define the parameters as described in the exercise.
Name
Symbol
Valuation
IV_DEF
None
IV_LOWER
None
IV_TITLE
Description of the XStep
Value O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Define the following valuations for the parameters:
e r
3.
Automatically
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
U s e
U s e
Define the following parameters for XStep tree Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check:
I n t e r n a l
2.
289
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Name
Valuation
IV_UOM
None
IV_UPPER
None
OV_PARAM
None
Value
On XStep tree tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
4.
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check.
e r
a)
In the context menu of the XStep tree,
P a r t n
choose Create → Process Instruction
U s e
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check
S A P
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description &IV_TITLE& and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name OV_PARAM Input Parameter for Superordinate XStep.
S A P
5.
I n t e r n a l
a)
O n l y
Symbol
On the Default Value tab page, assign parameter IV_DEF Target Value.
U s e
On the Error Handling tab page, define the following warning message to be displayed if the check ends with errors:
O n l y
Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_06. ----------------------The value is outside the tolerance. Lower limit: &IV_LOWER& Upper limit: &IV_UPPER& Continued on next page
290
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
On the Error Handling tab page, assign acceptance 03 Only with Signature for an incorrect value.
P a r t n
On the Input Validation tab page, assign the formula X > IV_LOWER AND X< IV_UPPER.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
You must confirm the transfer of values outside the tolerance with a signature. ----------------------a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Entry → Parameter Value
O n l y
(or double-click the parameter value). Description: &IV_TITLE&
e r
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered) Parameter name: OV_PARAM Input Parameter for Superordinate XStep
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the parameter value, choose Properties
U s e
P a r t n
On tab page Default Value, choose Parameter name: IV_DEF Target Value On tab page Input Validation, enter calculation formula: X > IV_LOWER AND X< IV_UPPER S A P
S A P
On tab page Error Handling, choose Acceptance: 03 Only with Signature On tab page Error Handling, choose
U s e
Enter the warning message as described in the exercise. 6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter without a description.
I n t e r n a l
a)
e r
Assign parameter name IV_UOM. In the context menu of the process instruction,
O n l y
choose Create → Output → Parameter Value In the context menu of the output, choose Properties (or double-click the output). Description: Parameter name: IV_UOM
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
Warning Note for Failed Check.
291
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
7.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct. a)
For the XStep tree, choose XSteps → Check
8.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
O n l y
9.
e r
Task 2:
In the context menu of the version,
I n t e r n a l
a)
choose Change Status → Release Save your SXS. a)
Choose Save.
1.
In your practice recipe, under XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps create an XStep with the description Entries and Calculations. Assign your destination GR## PI Sheet 1 of type PI Sheet to the XStep.
S A P
a)
Call the recipe for production version 0009 of material T-SCM372-PI-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor.
S A P
Assign context phase 0220 to the XStep.
U s e
P a r t n
Recipe: Entry with Default Value and Value Check
In the context menu of XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps, choose P a r t n
U s e
Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep).
I n t e r n a l
e r
Description: Entries and Calculations On XStep tab page Destination,
O n l y
assign destination GR## PI Sheet 1 by double-clicking it. On XStep tab page Context, assign phase 0220 by double-clicking it.
Continued on next page
292
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
2.
Under XStep Entries and Calculations, create an SXS Reference with the description Entry with Default Value and Value Check. a)
In the context menu of XStep Entries and Calculations, choose Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Entry with Default Value and Value Check 3.
Under XStep Entry with Default Value and Value Check, create an SXS Reference with the description Input Validation.
e r
Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction.
P a r t n
a)
In the context menu of XStep Entry with Default Value and Value Check,
U s e
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
S A P
S A P
Description: Input Validation On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Work Instruction.
U s e
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Description
Symbol
Work Instruction
I n t e r n a l
None Description of the Automatically XStep
On tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
5.
Under XStep Entry with Default Value and Value Check, create an SXS reference with the description Enter Temperature .
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
293
O n l y
a)
Value
e r
Description of Work Instruction
Valuation
P a r t n
4.
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the XStep).
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign reference SXS: GR ## Parameter Entry with Check. a)
In the context menu of XStep Entry with Default Value and Value Check, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Temperature On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR ## Parameter Entry with Check
e r
6.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Valuation
Value
Target Value
Fixed Value
50
Lower Limit
Fixed Value
45
Description of the XStep
Automatically °C
Upper Limit
Fixed Value
55
Input Parameter for Superordinate XStep
None
U s e
Fixed Value
a)
e r
I n t e r n a l
Hint: It is possible to test the input validation in a test PI sheet; this will be done in one of the following exercises.
P a r t n
Unit of Measure
S A P
S A P
Description of Input Value
Symbol
U s e
P a r t n
Description
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the SXS reference).
On tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
O n l y
7.
Check the entire XStep tree and save your recipe. a)
XSteps → Check Choose Save.
Continued on next page
294
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Task 3: SXS: Calculation of a Value 1.
In the standard XStep repository, in your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Calculation of a Value and the text GR## Calculation of a Value.
O n l y
For the XStep tree, enter the description Calculation of a Value.
e r
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree.
a)
Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository 1100
Plant:
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n
Hint: Alternatively, the corresponding SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion).
I n t e r n a l
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
In the context menu of folder GR## SCM372, choose Create → Standard XStep
U s e
P a r t n
In the context menu of the standard XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the standard XStep). Description: SXS: GR ## Calculation of a Value
e r
I n t e r n a l
Text: GR## Calculation of a Value In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version).
O n l y
Version: 0001 Validity period: today until 31.12.9999. In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep tree). Description: Calculation of a Value Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
295
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
On XStep tree tab page Destination, assign destination type Work Instructions/PI Sheet. 2.
Define the following parameters for XStep tree Calculation of a Value:
e r P a r t n
Category
Characteristic
IV_PARAM_1 Formula Parameter 1
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_PARAM_2 Formula Parameter 2
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IT_PARAM_3 Formula Parameter 3
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IT_PARAM_4 Formula Parameter 4
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_TITLE
Description of Calculated Value
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
IV_UOM
Unit of Measure
Input
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
OV_CALC
Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep
Output
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
S A P P a r t n
U s e
For parameters IT_PARAM_3 and IT_PARAM_4, set the Tabular Value indicator. a)
On XStep tree tab page Parameters,
For parameters IT_PARAM_3 and IT_PARAM_4, set the Tabular Value indicator.
Name
Symbol
Valuation
IV_PARAM_1
None
IV_PARAM_2
None
IT_PARAM_3
None
IT_PARAM_4
None
O n l y
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Value
Continued on next page
296
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
define the parameters as described in the exercise.
3.
U s e
S A P
Description
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Name
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Name
Symbol
Valuation
IV_TITLE
Description of the Automatically XStep
IV_UOM
None
OV_CALC
None
a)
Value
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n e r
On XStep tree tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
e r
4.
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Calculation of a Value. a)
In the context menu of the XStep tree,
U s e
P a r t n
choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Calculation of a Value
S A P
S A P
5.
For the process instruction, create a calculation with the description &IV_TITLE& and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name OV_CALC Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep.
U s e
P a r t n
a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Control Data → Calculation In the context menu of the calculation, choose Properties
e r
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the calculation). Description: &IV_TITLE& Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter without a description.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
297
O n l y
Parameter name: OV_CALC Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign parameter name IV_UOM. a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value In the context menu of the output, choose Properties
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the output). Description: Parameter name: IV_UOM 7.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct.
e r
a)
For the XStep tree, choose
8.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. a)
U s e
P a r t n
XSteps → Check
In the context menu of the version, choose Change Status → Release
S A P
Save your SXS. a)
S A P
9.
Choose Save.
Task 4:
U s e
1.
In your practice recipe, under XStep Entries and Calculations, create an XStep with the description Calculation . Call the recipe for production version 0009 of material T-SCM372-PI-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor. In the context menu of XStep Entries and Calculations, choose
O n l y
Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep). Description: Calculation 2.
Under XStep Calculation, create a SXS reference with the description Calculation of a Value. Continued on next page
298
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
a)
P a r t n
Recipe: Calculation of a Value
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction. a)
In the context menu of XStep Calculation, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Calculation of a Value On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Work Instruction.
e r
3.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Symbol
Work Instruction Description of Work Instruction
S A P
Value
None Description of the Automatically XStep
On tab page Valuation,
S A P
a)
Valuation
U s e
P a r t n
Description
define the valuations as described in the exercise. 4.
Under XStep Calculation, create an XStep with the description Entry of 2 Values.
U s e
P a r t n
a)
In the context menu of XStep Calculation, choose Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties
e r
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the XStep). Description: Entry of 2 Values 5.
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the SXS reference).
Define the following parameters for the XStep: O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
299
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372
Name
Description
LV_PARAM_1
Input Parameter 1 Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LV_PARAM_2
Input Parameter 2 Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
a)
Category
Characteristic
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
On XStep tab page Parameters, define the parameters as described in the exercise.
6.
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Symbol
Valuation
LV_PARAM_1
None
LV_PARAM_2
None
a)
Value
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Name
On XStep tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
S A P
Under XStep Entry of 2 Values, create a process instruction with the description Entry of 2 Values. a)
In the context menu of XStep Entry of 2 Values,
U s e
P a r t n
choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction).
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Value 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Description: Entry of 2 Values 8.
S A P
7.
O n l y
Continued on next page
300
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_1 Input Parameter 1. a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Entry → Parameter Value In the context menu of the parameter value, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Entry of Value 1 Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
e r
Parameter name: LV_PARAM_1 Input Parameter 1
P a r t n
9.
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Value 2 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
a)
U s e
Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_2 Input Parameter 2. In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Entry → Parameter Value
S A P
S A P
In the context menu of the parameter value, choose Properties (or double-click the parameter value). Description: Entry of Value 2
U s e
Parameter name: LV_PARAM_2 Input Parameter 2
I n t e r n a l
Assign reference SXS: GR## Calculation of a Value.
O n l y
In the context menu of XStep Entry of 2 Values, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Value 1 + Value 2 On tab page Reference, Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
10. Under XStep Entry of 2 Values, create a SXS reference with the description Value 1 + Value 2.
P a r t n
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
a)
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the parameter value).
301
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Calculation of a Value. 11. Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
e r
Valuation
Value
Formula Parameter 1
Reference
LV_PARAM_1
Formula Parameter 2
Reference
LV_PARAM_2
Formula Parameter 3
None
Formula Parameter 4
None
P a r t n
Unit of Measure
None
Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep
None
a)
S A P
S A P
Description of the Automatically XStep
U s e
Description of Calculated Value
Symbol
On tab page Valuation,
U s e
12. Explode SXS reference Value 1 + Value 2 so that you can enter a calculation formula. In the context menu of SXS reference Value 1 + Value 2, choose
I n t e r n a l
e r
Explode 13. For calculation &IV_TITLE&, define the following calculation formula: IV_PARAM_1 + IV_PARAM_2
O n l y
a)
In the context menu of calculation &IV_TITLE&, choose Properties (or double-click the calculation). Calculation formula: IV_PARAM_1 + IV_PARAM_2
14. Check the entire XStep tree and save your recipe. a)
XSteps → Check Choose Save. Continued on next page
302
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
define the valuations as described in the exercise.
a)
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Description
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
15. Your maintenance activities for the default value, input validation, and calculation cannot be fully tested when the PI sheet is simulated in the recipe. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet according to the following procedure: Change your process order with order number TEST-##. In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order. O n l y
On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt, assign batch number BATCH##.
e r
Generate an inspection lot for the order. Carry out a batch determination for all material components of the order.
I n t e r n a l
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for production version 0009.
U s e
P a r t n
Generate a control recipe for test purposes. Save the order. In the control recipe monitor, send the new test control recipe.
S A P U s e
a)
Change the order by choosing:
Process order:
e r
I n t e r n a l
Logistics → Production - Process → Process Order → Process Order → Change TEST-##
O n l y
Enter Choose XSteps In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Delete Choose Save. Process Order → Change Process Order → Functions → Read Master Data Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
Select and analyze the corresponding test PI sheet. Check whether the default value, the value check, and the calculation formula have been processed correctly for phase 0220.
S A P
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
303
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt: Batch:
BATCH##
Process Order → Functions → Inspection Lot → Generate O n l y
I n t e r n a l
In the material list of the order, select all components and choose Execute Batch Determination. Process Order → Functions → Control Recipe → Generate for Test
e r
Choose Save.
Plant:
1100
Mode:
Test
Production order:
TEST-##
S A P
S A P
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor
Choose Display.
U s e
P a r t n
In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes, select the control recipe and send it.
e r
Maintain the test PI sheet by choosing Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find Plant:
1100
Mode:
Test
Production order:
TEST-##
Execute (F8) Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
304
U s e
P a r t n
Send the test control recipe by choosing
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
In the list of PI sheets, select your PI sheet and choose Maintain PI Sheet (F5).
Task 5: O n l y e r
1.
Export the standard XStep SXS: Tabular entries with input check from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Entries to a local storage location (for example, to your desktop). Name the exported file GR##Tab.xml.
Hint: Note: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. a)
Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository
S A P
S A P
1100
Plant: In folder
U s e
in the context menu of standard XStep SXS: Tabular entries with input check, choose
File name: GR##Tab.xml In the context menu of folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372, choose
Import Standard XStep For your imported standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR## Table Entry with Check and the text GR## Table Entry with Tolerance Check.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
305
O n l y
Change
e r
I n t e r n a l
Export Standard XStep
P a r t n
Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Entries,
2.
U s e
P a r t n
Then import file GR##Tab.xml to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372.
I n t e r n a l
SXS: Tabular entries with input check
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. a)
In the context menu of the imported standard XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the standard XStep). Description: SXS: GR ## Table Entry with Check I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Text: GR## Table Entry with Tolerance Check In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version).
e r
Version: 0001 Validity period: today until 31.12.9999 Analyze the structure of the standard XStep. a) 4.
U s e
P a r t n
3.
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep.
Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct. a)
For the XStep tree, choose S A P
S A P
XSteps → Check 5.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. a)
In the context menu of the version, P a r t n
U s e
choose Change Status → Release 6.
Save the SXS. Choose Save.
e r
I n t e r n a l
a)
Task 6: SXS: Entry of a Signature Export the standard XStep SXS: Entry Signature from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Entries to a local storage location (for example, to your desktop). Name the exported file GR##Sign.xml.
Continued on next page
306
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
1.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Then import file GR##Sign.xml to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372. Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository I n t e r n a l
O n l y
a)
1100
Plant: In folder
e r
Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Entries,
P a r t n
Import Standard XStep
File name: GR##Sign.xml In the context menu of folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372, choose
U s e
Export Standard XStep
S A P
in the context menu of standard XStep SXS: Entry Signature, choose
Change
For your imported standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR## Entry of a Signature and the text GR## Entry of a Signature.
U s e
a)
In the context menu of the imported standard XStep, choose Properties
e r
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the standard XStep).
P a r t n
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
S A P
2.
Description: SXS: GR## Entry of a Signature Text: GR## Entry of a Signature
O n l y
In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version). Version: 0001 Validity period: today until 31.12.9999 3.
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep. a)
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
307
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
4.
Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct. a)
5.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. a)
O n l y
In the context menu of the version, choose Change Status → Release
Save the SXS. a)
Choose Save.
Task 7:
e r
Recipe: Table Entry and Calculation In your practice recipe, under XStep Entries and Calculations, create an XStep with the description Table Entry and Calculation. a)
Call the recipe for production version 0009 of material T-SCM372-PI-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor. In the context menu of XStep Entries and Calculations, choose
U s e
P a r t n
1.
I n t e r n a l
6.
For the XStep tree, choose XSteps → Check
Create → XStep S A P
S A P
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep). Description: Table Entry and Calculation
U s e
Under XStep Table Entry and Calculation, create an SXS reference with the description Table and Calculation. Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction. In the context menu of XStep Table Entry and Calculation,
e r
I n t e r n a l
a)
P a r t n
2.
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
O n l y
(or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Table and Calculation On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Work Instruction. 3.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Continued on next page
308
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Description
Symbol
Work Instruction
O n l y
Value
Fixed Value
Text for LV_INSTR; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
I n t e r n a l
Description of Work Instruction
Valuation
Text for LV_INSTR:
e r
Hint: Transaction SO10: Standard text SCM372_07. -----------------------
P a r t n S A P
Calculations can be executed automatically, controlled by events.
U s e
a)
On tab page Valuation,
e r
I n t e r n a l
-----------------------
P a r t n
Signatures are entered for characteristic PPPI_SIGNATURE. A signature is used to complete the previously used process instructions until either a previous signature or the start of the PI sheet is reached. After completion, the process instructions can no longer be edited.
S A P
Parameter values of this kind are stored separately for each table line. Using parameter value _[1], parameter value _[2], and so on, you can access the values of the individual lines, and using parameter value _[SUM] and parameter value _[COUNT], you can access the total sum of the values entered and the number of values entered.
U s e
The parameter for the input value and the parameters for the output of date and time are defined as table parameters .
define the valuations as described in the exercise. Under XStep Table Entry and Calculation, create an SXS reference with the description Temperature.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
309
O n l y
4.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign reference SXS: GR ## Table Entry with Check. a)
In the context menu of XStep Table Entry and Calculation, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Temperature On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Table Entry with Check
e r
5.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
S A P
Value
Target Value
Fixed Value
50
Lower Limit
Fixed Value
45
Table Title
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
Unit of Measure
Fixed Value
°C
Upper Limit
Fixed Value
55
P a r t n
U s e
Description of the Automatically XStep
Parameter text:
e r
I n t e r n a l
Temperature profile a)
S A P
Valuation
Description of Input Value
Symbol
U s e
P a r t n
Description
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the SXS reference).
On tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
Explode SXS reference Temperature so that you can define another hierarchically subordinate reference to the calculation. a)
In the context menu of SXS reference Temperature, choose Explode
7.
Under exploded XStep Tabular Entries with Input Check, create an SXS reference with the description Average Temperature. Continued on next page
310
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
6.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign reference SXS: GR## Calculation of a Value. a)
In the context menu of exploded XStep Tabular Entries with Input Check, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Average Temperature On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Calculation of a Value.
e r
8.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
Formula Parameter 1
None
Formula Parameter 2
None
Formula Parameter 3
Reference
Formula Parameter 4
None
Description of Calculated Value
Description of the XStep
LT_PARAM_1
Automatically
Unit of Measure
Reference
Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep
None
a)
Value
IV_UOM P a r t n
U s e
Valuation
S A P
S A P
Symbol
On tab page Valuation,
a)
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Explode SXS reference Average Temperature so that you can define a calculation formula. In the context menu of SXS reference Average Temperature, choose Explode
10. For calculation &IV_TITLE&, define the following calculation formula: IT_PARAM_3[SUM] / IT_PARAM_3[COUNT]
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
define the valuations as described in the exercise. 9.
U s e
P a r t n
Description
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the SXS reference).
311
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
The calculation is to be executed automatically after internal event PARAMETER_CHANGED. a)
In the context menu of calculation &IV_TITLE&, choose Properties (or double-click the calculation). Calculation formula: IT_PARAM_3[SUM] / IT_PARAM_3[COUNT]
O n l y
11. Under XStep Table Entry and Calculation, create an SXS reference with the description Complete and Check. Assign reference SXS: GR## Entry of a Signature.
e r
a)
In the context menu of XStep Table Entry and Calculation,
P a r t n
choose Create → SXS Reference
U s e
In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Complete and Check
S A P
S A P
On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Entry of a Signature. 12. Check the entire XStep tree and save your recipe.
U s e
XSteps → Check Choose Save.
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order. Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for production version 0009. On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt, assign batch number BATCH##. Generate an inspection lot for the order. Carry out a batch determination for all material components of the order. Continued on next page
312
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Change your process order with order number TEST-##.
e r
13. Your maintenance activities for table entries with calculations and for signatures cannot be fully tested when the PI sheet is simulated in the recipe. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet according to the following procedure:
P a r t n
a)
I n t e r n a l
Event: PARAMETER_CHANGED
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Generate a control recipe for test purposes. Save the order. In the control recipe monitor, send the new test control recipe.
Select and analyze the corresponding test PI sheet. Check whether the table entry with value check, the calculation formula for automatic calculation of the average temperature, and the signature have been processed correctly for phase 0220.
e r
a)
Change the order by choosing:
Process order:
TEST-##
U s e
P a r t n
Logistics → Production - Process → Process Order → Process Order → Change
Enter
S A P
S A P
Choose XSteps In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Delete Choose Save.
U s e
P a r t n
Process Order → Change Process Order → Functions → Read Master Data On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt: BATCH##
e r
I n t e r n a l
Batch:
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
Process Order → Functions → Inspection Lot → Generate O n l y
In the material list of the order, select all components Choose the Execute batch determination icon. Process Order → Functions → Control Recipe → Generate for Test Choose Save. Send the test control recipe by choosing Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
313
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Plant:
1100
Mode:
Test
Production order:
TEST-##
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor
Choose Display. In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes,
e r
select the control recipe and send it.
Maintain the test PI sheet by choosing
1100
Mode:
Test
Production order:
TEST-## P a r t n
U s e
Plant:
S A P
S A P
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find
Execute (F8) In the list of PI sheets, select your PI sheet
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
e r
and choose Maintain PI Sheet (F5).
O n l y
314
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Exercise 9: Entries and Calculations in Work Instructions Exercise Objectives O n l y e r
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Define entries with default values and value check • Define the calculation of a value • Define table entries and calculations • Define the entry of signatures
Business Example
Hint: Complete the exercises on this topic if you want to use routings and production orders.
S A P
Task 1:
U s e
1.
In the standard XStep repository for plant 1000, in your folder (GR## SCM372), create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Parameter Entry with Check and the text GR## Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check.
I n t e r n a l
e r
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
P a r t n
SXS: Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check
S A P
Complete the exercises on the previous topic, Entries and Calculations in PI Sheets, if you want to use master recipes and process orders.
U s e
P a r t n
You are defining entries and calculations in work instructions.
For the XStep tree, enter the description Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check.
Hint: Alternatively, the corresponding SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion). 2.
Define the following parameters for XStep tree Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check: Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
315
O n l y
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372
e r
Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_DEF
Target Value
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_LOWER
Lower Limit
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_TITLE
Description of Input Value
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
IV_UOM
Unit of Measure
Input
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
IV_UPPER
Upper Limit
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
Output
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
P a r t n
3.
Define the following valuations for the parameters:
S A P
Symbol
IV_DEF
None
IV_LOWER
None
Value
Description of the Automatically XStep
IV_UOM
None
IV_UPPER
None
OV_PARAM
None
P a r t n
IV_TITLE U s e
Valuation
S A P
Name
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check.
5.
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description &IV_TITLE& and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name OV_PARAM Input Parameter for Superordinate XStep. On the Default Value tab page, assign parameter IV_DEF Target Value. On tab page Input Validation, assign the formula X > IV_LOWER AND X< IV_UPPER. Continued on next page
316
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
4.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
OV_PARAM Input Parameter for Superordinate XStep
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
On tab page Error Handling, assign acceptance 03 Only with Signature for an incorrect value. On the Error Handling tab page, define the following warning message to be displayed if the check ends with errors:
O n l y
----------------------The value is outside the tolerance.
e r
Lower limit: &IV_LOWER& Upper limit: &IV_UPPER&
----------------------6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter without a description.
U s e
P a r t n
You must confirm the transfer of values outside the tolerance with a signature.
I n t e r n a l
Hint: Transaction so10: Standard text SCM372_06.
7.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct.
8.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
9.
Save your SXS.
S A P
S A P
Assign parameter name IV_UOM.
U s e
Routing: Entry with Default Value and Value Check In your practice routing, under XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps create an XStep with the description Entries and Calculations. Assign your destination GR## Work Instructions 1 of type Work Instructions to the XStep.
2.
Under XStep Entries and Calculations, create an XStep with the description Entry with Default Value and Value Check.
3.
Under XStep Entry with Default Value and Value Check, create an SXS Reference with the description Input Validation. Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
317
O n l y
Assign context operation 0050 to the XStep.
e r
I n t e r n a l
1.
P a r t n
Task 2:
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
4.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Description
Symbol
Instruction
O n l y
5.
Value
None Description of the Automatically XStep
Under XStep Entry with Default Value and Value Check, create an SXS reference with the description Enter Temperature . Assign reference SXS: GR ## Parameter Entry with Check.
e r
6.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Valuation
Value
Target Value
Fixed Value
50
Lower Limit
Fixed Value
45
Unit of Measure
Fixed Value
°C
Upper Limit
Fixed Value
55
Input Parameter for Superordinate XStep
None
Check the entire XStep tree and save your XSteps and your routing.
Task 3: SXS: Calculation of a Value 1.
In the standard XStep repository, in your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Calculation of a Value and the text GR## Calculation of a Value.
Continued on next page
318
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
7.
e r
Hint: It is possible to test the input validation in test work instructions; this will be done in one of the following exercises.
P a r t n
U s e
Description of the Automatically XStep
S A P
S A P
Description of Input Value
Symbol
U s e
P a r t n
Description
I n t e r n a l
Description of Work Instruction
Valuation
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. For the XStep tree, enter the description Calculation of a Value. Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree.
O n l y
2.
Define the following parameters for XStep tree Calculation of a Value:
S A P
Characteristic
IV_PARAM_1 Formula Parameter Input 1
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_PARAM_2 Formula Parameter Input 2
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IT_PARAM_3 Formula Parameter Input 3
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IT_PARAM_4 Formula Parameter Input 4
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_TITLE
Description of Calculated Value
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
IV_UOM
Unit of Measure
Input
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
OV_CALC
Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep
Output
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
e r O n l y
For parameters IT_PARAM_3 and IT_PARAM_4, set the Tabular Value indicator. 3.
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Name
Symbol
Valuation
IV_PARAM_1
None
IV_PARAM_2
None
IT_PARAM_3
None
Value
Continued on next page
2010
P a r t n
U s e
Category
S A P
I n t e r n a l
Description
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Name
I n t e r n a l
Hint: Alternatively, the corresponding SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion).
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
319
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Name
Symbol
IT_PARAM_4
Value
None Description of the Automatically XStep
IV_UOM
None
OV_CALC
None
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Calculation of a Value.
5.
For the process instruction, create a calculation with the description &IV_TITLE& and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
e r
4.
6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter without a description.
7.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct.
8.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
9.
Save your SXS.
S A P
S A P
Assign parameter name IV_UOM.
U s e
P a r t n
Assign parameter name OV_CALC Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
IV_TITLE
Valuation
Task 4:
U s e I n t e r n a l
In your practice routing, under XStep Entries and Calculations, create an XStep with the description Calculation.
2.
Under XStep Calculation, create an SXS reference with the description Calculation of a Value.
e r
1.
P a r t n
Routing: Calculation of a Value
Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text. Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Description Instruction Description of Work Instruction
Symbol
Valuation
Value
None Description of the Automatically XStep
Continued on next page
320
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
3.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
4.
Under XStep Calculation, create a XStep with the description Entry of 2 Values.
5.
Define the following parameters for the XStep:
e r
6.
Name
Description
LV_PARAM_1
Input Parameter 1 Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LV_PARAM_2
Input Parameter 2 Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
Characteristic
Symbol
Valuation
LV_PARAM_1
None
LV_PARAM_2
None
Value
Under XStep Entry of 2 Values, create a process instruction with the description Entry of 2 Values.
8.
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Value 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_1 Input Parameter 1.
U s e
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Value 2 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_2 Input Parameter 2.
11. Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Description
Symbol
Valuation
Value
Formula Parameter 1
Reference
LV_PARAM_1
Formula Parameter 2
Reference
LV_PARAM_2
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
321
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Assign reference SXS: GR## Calculation of a Value.
e r
10. Under XStep Entry of 2 Values, create a SXS Reference with the description Value 1 + Value 2.
P a r t n
9.
S A P
7.
U s e
P a r t n
Category
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Name
S A P
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Description
None
Formula Parameter 4
None
Value
Description of the Automatically XStep
Unit of Measure
None
Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep
None
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Valuation
Formula Parameter 3
Description of Calculated Value
e r
Symbol
P a r t n
13. For calculation &IV_TITLE&, define the following calculation formula: IV_PARAM_1 + IV_PARAM_2
U s e
12. Explode SXS reference Value 1 + Value 2 so that you can enter a calculation formula.
14. Check the entire XStep tree and save your XSteps and your routing. S A P U s e
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
I n t e r n a l
Generate an inspection lot for the order.
O n l y
Generate a control instruction for the test. Save the order. In the control instructions monitor, send the new test control instruction. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
Continued on next page
322
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for group counter 9.
P a r t n
Change your production order with order number TEST-##.
S A P
15. Your maintenance activities for the default value, input validation, and calculation cannot be fully tested when the work instructions are simulated in the routing. For this reason, now create a test work instruction according to the following procedure:
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Select and analyze the corresponding test work instruction. Check whether the default value, the value check, and the calculation formula have been processed correctly for operation 0050.
Task 5: SXS: Table Entry with Tolerance Check O n l y
Export the standard XStep SXS: Tabular Entries with Input Check from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Entries to a local storage location (for example, to your desktop). Name the exported file GR##Tab.xml.
e r
Then import file GR##Tab.xml to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372.
I n t e r n a l
1.
2.
For your imported standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR## Table Entry with Check and the text GR## Table Entry with Tolerance Check.
S A P U s e
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep.
4.
Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct.
5.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
6.
Save the SXS.
P a r t n
3.
S A P
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
Task 6:
I n t e r n a l
Then import file GR##Sign.xml to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372. Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. 2.
For your imported standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR## Entry of a Signature and the text GR## Entry of a Signature. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
323
O n l y
Export the standard XStep SXS: Entry Signature from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Entries to a local storage location (for example, to your desktop). Name the exported file GR##Sign.xml.
e r
SXS: Entry of a Signature 1.
U s e
P a r t n
Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
5.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. Save the SXS.
6.
1.
In your practice routing, under XStep Entries and Calculations, create an XStep with the description Table Entry and Calculation.
2.
Under XStep Table Entry and Calculation, create an SXS reference with the description Table and Calculation.
Task 7: Routing: Table Entry and Calculation
Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text.
Description of Work Instruction
Symbol
Instruction
Valuation
Value
Fixed Value
Text for LV_INSTR; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
e r
I n t e r n a l
Text for LV_INSTR:
P a r t n
Description
S A P
S A P
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
U s e
3.
U s e
O n l y
Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct.
e r
4.
P a r t n
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep.
I n t e r n a l
3.
Hint: Transaction so10: Standard text SCM372_07.
The parameter for the input value and the parameters for the output of date and time are defined as table parameters .
Continued on next page
324
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
-----------------------
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Parameter values of this kind are stored separately for each table line. Using parameter value _[1], parameter value _[2], and so on, you can access the values of the individual lines, and using parameter value _[SUM] and parameter value _[COUNT], you can access the total sum of the values entered and the number of values entered. Calculations can be executed automatically, controlled by events. O n l y e r
----------------------Under XStep Table Entry and Calculation, create an SXS reference with the description Temperature. Assign reference SXS: GR ## Table Entry with Check. 5.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Valuation
Value
Target Value
Fixed Value
50
Lower Limit
Fixed Value
45
Table Title
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
Unit of Measure
Fixed Value
°C
Upper Limit
Fixed Value
55
e r
Parameter text: Temperature profile 6.
Explode SXS reference Temperature so that you can define another hierarchically subordinate reference to the calculation.
7.
Under exploded XStep Tabular Entries with Input Check, create an SXS reference with the description Average Temperature. Assign reference SXS: GR## Calculation of a Value. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
325
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Description of Input Value
P a r t n
U s e
Symbol
S A P
S A P
Description
U s e
P a r t n
4.
I n t e r n a l
Signatures are entered for characteristic PPPI_SIGNATURE. A signature is used to complete the previously used process instructions until either a previous signature or the start of the work instruction is reached. After completion, the process instructions can no longer be edited.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
8.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
None
Formula Parameter 2
None
Formula Parameter 3
Reference
Formula Parameter 4
None
e r
Description of the XStep
Value
LT_PARAM_1
Automatically
Unit of Measure
Reference
Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep
None
IV_UOM
Explode SXS reference Average Temperature so that you can define a calculation formula.
S A P
S A P
10. For calculation &IV_TITLE&, define the following calculation formula: IT_PARAM_3[SUM] / IT_PARAM_3[COUNT] The calculation is to be executed automatically after internal event PARAMETER_CHANGED.
U s e
Assign reference SXS: GR## Entry of a Signature. 12. Check the entire XStep tree and save your XSteps and your routing.
I n t e r n a l
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order. Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for group counter 9. Generate an inspection lot for the order. Generate a control instruction for the test. Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Change your production order with order number TEST-##.
e r
13. Your maintenance activities for table entries with calculations and for signatures cannot be fully tested when the work instruction is simulated in the routing. For this reason, now create a test work instruction according to the following procedure:
P a r t n
11. Under XStep Table Entry and Calculation, create an SXS reference with the description Complete and Check.
326
U s e
P a r t n
Valuation
Formula Parameter 1
Description of Calculated Value
9.
Symbol
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Description
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Save the order. In the control instructions monitor, send the new test control instruction. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
O n l y e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
Select and analyze the corresponding test work instruction. Check whether the table entry with value check, the calculation formula for automatic calculation of the average temperature, and the signature have been processed correctly for operation 0050.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
327
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Solution 9: Entries and Calculations in Work Instructions Task 1: SXS: Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check O n l y
In the standard XStep repository for plant 1000, in your folder (GR## SCM372), create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Parameter Entry with Check and the text GR## Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check.
e r
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. For the XStep tree, enter the description Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check.
I n t e r n a l
1.
Hint: Alternatively, the corresponding SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion).
S A P
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository Plant:
1000
U s e
P a r t n
In the context menu of folder GR## SCM372, choose Create → Standard XStep In the context menu of the standard XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the standard XStep).
e r
I n t e r n a l
S A P
a)
U s e
P a r t n
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree.
Description: SXS: GR ## Parameter Entry with Check Text: GR## Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check
O n l y
In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version). Version: 0001 Validity period: today until 31.12.9999 In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Properties Continued on next page
328
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
(or double-click the XStep tree). Description: Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check On XStep tree tab page Destination, assign destination type Work Instructions/PI Sheet. O n l y e r P a r t n
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_DEF
Target Value
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_LOWER
Lower Limit
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_TITLE
Description of Input Value
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
IV_UOM
Unit of Measure
Input
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
IV_UPPER
Upper Limit
Input
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
Output
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
U s e
a)
P a r t n
OV_PARAM Input Parameter for Superordinate XStep
S A P
Name
On XStep tree tab page Parameters, define the parameters as described in the exercise.
Name
Symbol
Valuation
IV_DEF
None
IV_LOWER
None
IV_TITLE
Value O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Define the following valuations for the parameters:
e r
3.
Description of the Automatically XStep
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
U s e
S A P
Define the following parameters for XStep tree Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check:
I n t e r n a l
2.
329
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Name
Valuation
IV_UOM
None
IV_UPPER
None
OV_PARAM
None
Value
On XStep tree tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
4.
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check.
e r
a)
In the context menu of the XStep tree,
P a r t n
choose Create → Process Instruction
U s e
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Parameter Entry with Tolerance Check
S A P
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description &IV_TITLE& and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name OV_PARAM Input Parameter for Superordinate XStep.
S A P
5.
I n t e r n a l
a)
O n l y
Symbol
On the Default Value tab page, assign parameter IV_DEF Target Value.
U s e
On the Error Handling tab page, define the following warning message to be displayed if the check ends with errors:
O n l y
Hint: Transaction so10: Standard text SCM372_06. ----------------------The value is outside the tolerance. Lower limit: &IV_LOWER& Upper limit: &IV_UPPER& Continued on next page
330
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
On tab page Error Handling, assign acceptance 03 Only with Signature for an incorrect value.
P a r t n
On tab page Input Validation, assign the formula X > IV_LOWER AND X< IV_UPPER.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
You must confirm the transfer of values outside the tolerance with a signature. ----------------------a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Entry → Parameter Value
O n l y
(or double-click the parameter value). Description: &IV_TITLE&
e r
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered) Parameter name: OV_PARAM Input Parameter for Superordinate XStep
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the parameter value, choose Properties
U s e
P a r t n
On tab page Default Value, choose Parameter name: IV_DEF Target Value On tab page Input Validation, enter calculation formula: X > IV_LOWER AND X< IV_UPPER S A P
S A P
On tab page Error Handling, choose Acceptance: 03 Only with Signature On tab page Error Handling, choose
U s e
Enter the warning message as described in the exercise. 6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter without a description.
I n t e r n a l
a)
e r
Assign parameter name IV_UOM. In the context menu of the process instruction,
O n l y
choose Create → Output → Parameter Value In the context menu of the output, choose Properties (or double-click the output). Description: Parameter name: IV_UOM
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
Warning Note for Failed Check.
331
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
7.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct. a)
For the XStep tree, choose XSteps → Check
8.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
O n l y
9.
e r
Task 2:
In the context menu of the version,
I n t e r n a l
a)
choose Change Status → Release Save your SXS. a)
Choose Save.
1.
In your practice routing, under XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps create an XStep with the description Entries and Calculations. Assign your destination GR## Work Instructions 1 of type Work Instructions to the XStep.
S A P
S A P
Assign context operation 0050 to the XStep. a)
Call the routing for group counter 9 of material T-SCM372-PP-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor.
U s e
Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep).
P a r t n
In the context menu of XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps, choose
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Routing: Entry with Default Value and Value Check
Description: Entries and Calculations On XStep tab page Destination,
O n l y
assign destination GR## Work Instructions 1 by double-clicking it. On XStep tab page Context, assign operation 0050 by double-clicking it.
Continued on next page
332
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
2.
Under XStep Entries and Calculations, create an XStep with the description Entry with Default Value and Value Check. a)
In the context menu of XStep Entries and Calculations, choose Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Entry with Default Value and Value Check 3.
Under XStep Entry with Default Value and Value Check, create an SXS Reference with the description Input Validation.
e r
Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text.
P a r t n
a)
In the context menu of XStep Entry with Default Value and Value Check,
U s e
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
S A P
S A P
Description: Input Validation On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Instruction Text.
U s e
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Description
Symbol
Instruction
Description of the Automatically XStep
e r
On tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
5.
Under XStep Entry with Default Value and Value Check, create an SXS reference with the description Enter Temperature .
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
333
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Value
None
Description of Work Instruction a)
Valuation
P a r t n
4.
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the XStep).
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign reference SXS: GR ## Parameter Entry with Check. a)
In the context menu of XStep Entry with Default Value and Value Check, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Temperature On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR ## Parameter Entry with Check
e r
6.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Valuation
Value
Target Value
Fixed Value
50
Lower Limit
Fixed Value
45
Unit of Measure
Fixed Value
°C
Upper Limit
Fixed Value
55
Input Parameter for Superordinate XStep
None
I n t e r n a l
a)
On tab page Valuation,
7.
O n l y
define the valuations as described in the exercise. Check the entire XStep tree and save your XSteps and your routing. a)
XSteps → Check Choose Save.
Continued on next page
334
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
Hint: It is possible to test the input validation in test work instructions; this will be done in one of the following exercises.
P a r t n
U s e
Description of the Automatically XStep
S A P
S A P
Description of Input Value
Symbol
U s e
P a r t n
Description
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the SXS reference).
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Task 3: SXS: Calculation of a Value 1.
In the standard XStep repository, in your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Calculation of a Value and the text GR## Calculation of a Value.
O n l y
For the XStep tree, enter the description Calculation of a Value.
e r
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree.
a)
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository 1000
S A P
(or double-click the standard XStep).
S A P
In the context menu of folder GR## SCM372,
U s e
Plant:
U s e
P a r t n
Hint: Alternatively, the corresponding SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion).
I n t e r n a l
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
choose Create → Standard XStep In the context menu of the standard XStep, choose Properties
P a r t n
Description: SXS: GR ## Calculation of a Value Text: GR## Calculation of a Value
I n t e r n a l
e r
In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version).
O n l y
Version: 0001 Validity period: today until 31.12.9999 In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep tree). Description: Calculation of a Value On XStep tree tab page Destination, Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
335
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
assign destination type Work Instructions/PI Sheet. 2.
Define the following parameters for XStep tree Calculation of a Value:
e r P a r t n
Category
Characteristic
IV_PARAM_1 Formula Parameter Input 1
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_PARAM_2 Formula Parameter Input 2
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IT_PARAM_3 Formula Parameter Input 3
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IT_PARAM_4 Formula Parameter Input 4
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
IV_TITLE
Description of Calculated Value
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
IV_UOM
Unit of Measure
Input
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
OV_CALC
Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep
Output
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
S A P
U s e
On XStep tree tab page Parameters, define the parameters as described in the exercise.
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Name
Symbol
Valuation
IV_PARAM_1
None
IV_PARAM_2
None
IT_PARAM_3
None
IT_PARAM_4
None
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
3.
Value
Continued on next page
336
e r
For parameters IT_PARAM_3 and IT_PARAM_4, set the Tabular Value indicator.
P a r t n
For parameters IT_PARAM_3 and IT_PARAM_4, set the Tabular Value indicator. a)
U s e
S A P
Description
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Name
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Name
Symbol
Valuation
IV_TITLE
Description of the Automatically XStep
IV_UOM
None
OV_CALC
None
a)
Value
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n e r
On XStep tree tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
e r
4.
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Calculation of a Value. a)
In the context menu of the XStep tree,
U s e
P a r t n
choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Calculation of a Value
S A P
S A P
5.
For the process instruction, create a calculation with the description &IV_TITLE& and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE. Assign parameter name OV_CALC Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep.
U s e
P a r t n
a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Control Data → Calculation In the context menu of the calculation, choose Properties
e r
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the calculation). Description: &IV_TITLE& Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
6.
For the process instruction, create the output of a parameter without a description.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
337
O n l y
Parameter name: OV_CALC Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign parameter name IV_UOM. a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Output → Parameter Value In the context menu of the output, choose Properties
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the output). Description: Parameter name: IV_UOM 7.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct.
e r
a)
For the XStep tree, choose
8.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. a)
U s e
P a r t n
XSteps → Check
In the context menu of the version, choose Change Status → Release
S A P
Save your SXS. a)
S A P
9.
Choose Save.
Task 4:
U s e
1.
In your practice routing, under XStep Entries and Calculations, create an XStep with the description Calculation. Call the routing for group counter 9 of material T-SCM372-PP-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor.
e r
I n t e r n a l
a)
In the context menu of XStep Entries and Calculations, choose
O n l y
Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep). Description: Calculation 2.
Under XStep Calculation, create an SXS reference with the description Calculation of a Value. Continued on next page
338
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
Routing: Calculation of a Value
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text. a)
In the context menu of XStep Calculation, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Calculation of a Value On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Instruction Text.
e r
3.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Symbol
Instruction
Description of the Automatically XStep
On tab page Valuation,
S A P
S A P
Value
None
Description of Work Instruction a)
Valuation
U s e
P a r t n
Description
define the valuations as described in the exercise. 4.
Under XStep Calculation, create a XStep with the description Entry of 2 Values.
U s e
P a r t n
a)
In the context menu of XStep Calculation, choose Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties
e r
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the XStep). Description: Entry of 2 Values 5.
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the SXS reference).
Define the following parameters for the XStep: O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
339
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372
Name
Description
LV_PARAM_1
Input Parameter 1 Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
LV_PARAM_2
Input Parameter 2 Local
PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE
a)
Category
Characteristic
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
On XStep tab page Parameters, define the parameters as described in the exercise.
6.
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Symbol
Valuation
LV_PARAM_1
None
LV_PARAM_2
None
a)
Value
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Name
On XStep tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
S A P
Under XStep Entry of 2 Values, create a process instruction with the description Entry of 2 Values. a)
In the context menu of XStep Entry of 2 Values,
U s e
P a r t n
choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction).
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Value 1 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Description: Entry of 2 Values 8.
S A P
7.
O n l y
Continued on next page
340
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_1 Input Parameter 1. a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Entry → Parameter Value In the context menu of the parameter value, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Entry of Value 1 Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
e r
Parameter name: LV_PARAM_1 Input Parameter 1
P a r t n
9.
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Entry of Value 2 and characteristic PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE.
a)
U s e
Assign parameter name LV_PARAM_2 Input Parameter 2. In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Create → Entry → Parameter Value
S A P
S A P
In the context menu of the parameter value, choose Properties (or double-click the parameter value). Description: Entry of Value 2
U s e
Parameter name: LV_PARAM_2 Input Parameter 2
I n t e r n a l
Assign reference SXS: GR## Calculation of a Value.
O n l y
In the context menu of XStep Entry of 2 Values, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Value 1 + Value 2 On tab page Reference, Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
10. Under XStep Entry of 2 Values, create a SXS Reference with the description Value 1 + Value 2.
P a r t n
Characteristic: PPPI_PARAMETER_VALUE (assigned automatically after the parameter name has been entered)
a)
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the parameter value).
341
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Calculation of a Value. 11. Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
e r
Valuation
Value
Formula Parameter 1
Reference
LV_PARAM_1
Formula Parameter 2
Reference
LV_PARAM_2
Formula Parameter 3
None
Formula Parameter 4
None
P a r t n
Unit of Measure
None
Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep
None
a)
S A P
S A P
Description of the Automatically XStep
U s e
Description of Calculated Value
Symbol
On tab page Valuation,
U s e
12. Explode SXS reference Value 1 + Value 2 so that you can enter a calculation formula. In the context menu of SXS reference Value 1 + Value 2, choose
I n t e r n a l
e r
Explode 13. For calculation &IV_TITLE&, define the following calculation formula: IV_PARAM_1 + IV_PARAM_2
O n l y
a)
In the context menu of calculation &IV_TITLE&, choose Properties (or double-click the calculation). Calculation formula: IV_PARAM_1 + IV_PARAM_2
14. Check the entire XStep tree and save your XSteps and your routing. a)
XSteps → Check Choose Save. Continued on next page
342
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
define the valuations as described in the exercise.
a)
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Description
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
15. Your maintenance activities for the default value, input validation, and calculation cannot be fully tested when the work instructions are simulated in the routing. For this reason, now create a test work instruction according to the following procedure: Change your production order with order number TEST-##. O n l y
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for group counter 9. Generate an inspection lot for the order.
e r
Generate a control instruction for the test. Save the order.
I n t e r n a l
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
U s e
P a r t n
In the control instructions monitor, send the new test control instruction. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
S A P
a)
Change the order by choosing:
U s e
P a r t n
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Order → Change TEST-##
Order: Enter
e r
I n t e r n a l
S A P
Select and analyze the corresponding test work instruction. Check whether the default value, the value check, and the calculation formula have been processed correctly for operation 0050.
Choose XSteps In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Delete
O n l y
Choose Save. Choose Order → Change Choose Functions → Read PP Master Data. Choose Functions → Inspection Lot → Create. Choose the XSteps icon. XSteps → Control Instructions/Recipe → Generate for Test Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
343
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Choose Save. Send the test control instruction by choosing:
Plant:
1000
Mode:
Test
Production order:
TEST-##
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Control Instructions → Monitor Control Instructions/Recipes
e r
Choose Display. In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes,
U s e
P a r t n
select the control instruction and send it. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Maintain the test work instruction by choosing
S A P U s e
1000
Mode:
Test
Production order:
TEST-##
P a r t n
Plant:
I n t e r n a l
Execute (F8)
e r
In the list of work instructions, select the work instruction,
O n l y
and choose Change Work Instructions (F5).
Task 5: SXS: Table Entry with Tolerance Check 1.
344
Export the standard XStep SXS: Tabular Entries with Input Check from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Entries to a local storage location (for example, to your desktop). Name the exported file GR##Tab.xml. Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
S A P
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Work Instructions → Find
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Then import file GR##Tab.xml to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372. Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. a)
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository
O n l y
In folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Entries,
P a r t n
Import Standard XStep
File name: GR##Tab.xml In the context menu of folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372, choose
U s e
Export Standard XStep
S A P
e r
In the context menu of the standard XStep, SXS: Tabular Entries with Input Check, choose
I n t e r n a l
1000
Plant:
Change
For your imported standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR## Table Entry with Check and the text GR## Table Entry with Tolerance Check.
U s e
a)
In the context menu of the imported standard XStep, choose Properties
e r
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the standard XStep).
P a r t n
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
S A P
2.
Description: SXS: GR## Table Entry with Check Text: GR## Table Entry with Tolerance Check
O n l y
In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version). Version: 0001 Validity period: today until 31.12.9999 3.
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep. a)
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
345
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
4.
Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct. a)
For the XStep tree, choose XSteps → Check
5.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
O n l y
6.
e r
Task 6:
In the context menu of the version,
I n t e r n a l
a)
choose Change Status → Release Save the SXS. a)
Choose Save.
1.
Export the standard XStep SXS: Entry Signature from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Entries to a local storage location (for example, to your desktop). Name the exported file GR##Sign.xml.
U s e
P a r t n
SXS: Entry of a Signature
S A P
S A P
Then import file GR##Sign.xml to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372. Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode.
U s e
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository Plant:
1000
e r
Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Entries, in the context menu of standard XStep SXS: Entry Signature, choose Export Standard XStep File name: GR##Sign.xml In the context menu of folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372, choose Change Import Standard XStep
Continued on next page
346
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
In folder
P a r t n
a)
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
2.
For your imported standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR## Entry of a Signature and the text GR## Entry of a Signature. Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. a)
In the context menu of the imported standard XStep, choose Properties
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the standard XStep). Description: SXS: GR## Entry of a Signature Text: GR## Entry of a Signature In the context menu of the version, choose Properties
e r
(or double-click the version).
P a r t n
Version: 0001
3.
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep. a)
S A P
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep.
Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct. a)
S A P
4.
U s e
Validity period: today until 31.12.9999
For the XStep tree, choose XSteps → Check
U s e
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. a)
P a r t n
5.
In the context menu of the version, choose Change Status → Release
Save the SXS. a)
e r
I n t e r n a l
6.
Choose Save.
O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
347
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Task 7: Routing: Table Entry and Calculation 1.
In your practice routing, under XStep Entries and Calculations, create an XStep with the description Table Entry and Calculation. Call the routing for group counter 9 of material T-SCM372-PP-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
a)
In the context menu of XStep Entries and Calculations, choose Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties
e r
(or double-click the XStep).
2.
Under XStep Table Entry and Calculation, create an SXS reference with the description Table and Calculation. Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text.
S A P
In the context menu of XStep Table Entry and Calculation,
S A P
a)
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
U s e
P a r t n
(or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Table and Calculation On tab page Reference,
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Description
Description of Work Instruction
Valuation
Value
Fixed Value
Text for LV_INSTR; see below
Description of the Automatically XStep
Continued on next page
348
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Instruction
Symbol
e r
I n t e r n a l
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Instruction Text. 3.
U s e
P a r t n
Description: Table Entry and Calculation
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Text for LV_INSTR: Hint: Transaction so10: Standard text SCM372_07. ----------------------O n l y e r
Parameter values of this kind are stored separately for each table line. Using parameter value _[1], parameter value _[2], and so on, you can access the values of the individual lines, and using parameter value _[SUM] and parameter value _[COUNT], you can access the total sum of the values entered and the number of values entered.
-----------------------
S A P
S A P
Signatures are entered for characteristic PPPI_SIGNATURE. A signature is used to complete the previously used process instructions until either a previous signature or the start of the work instruction is reached. After completion, the process instructions can no longer be edited.
U s e
P a r t n
Calculations can be executed automatically, controlled by events.
I n t e r n a l
The parameter for the input value and the parameters for the output of date and time are defined as table parameters .
a)
On tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
U s e
Under XStep Table Entry and Calculation, create an SXS reference with the description Temperature. Assign reference SXS: GR ## Table Entry with Check. In the context menu of XStep Table Entry and Calculation,
e r
I n t e r n a l
a)
P a r t n
4.
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
O n l y
(or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Temperature On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Table Entry with Check 5.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
349
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Valuation
Value
Target Value
Fixed Value
50
Lower Limit
Fixed Value
45
Table Title
Fixed Value
Text for parameter; see below
e r
Description of Input Value
Symbol
Description of the Automatically XStep
Unit of Measure
Fixed Value
°C
Upper Limit
Fixed Value
55
P a r t n
Parameter text:
a)
U s e
Temperature profile On tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
S A P
Explode SXS reference Temperature so that you can define another hierarchically subordinate reference to the calculation. a)
In the context menu of SXS reference Temperature, choose
S A P
6.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Description
Explode
U s e
Under exploded XStep Tabular Entries with Input Check, create an SXS reference with the description Average Temperature. Assign reference SXS: GR## Calculation of a Value. In the context menu of exploded XStep Tabular Entries with Input Check,
e r
I n t e r n a l
a)
P a r t n
7.
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
O n l y
(or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Average Temperature On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Calculation of a Value. 8.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Continued on next page
350
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Description
Symbol
None
Formula Parameter 2
None
Formula Parameter 3
Reference
Formula Parameter 4
None
O n l y
Description of the XStep
LT_PARAM_1
Automatically
Unit of Measure
Reference
Calculated Value for Superordinate XStep
None
a)
Value
I n t e r n a l
e r
Valuation
Formula Parameter 1
Description of Calculated Value
IV_UOM
On tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
9.
Explode SXS reference Average Temperature so that you can define a calculation formula.
S A P
In the context menu of SXS reference Average Temperature, choose
S A P
a)
Explode 10. For calculation &IV_TITLE&, define the following calculation formula: IT_PARAM_3[SUM] / IT_PARAM_3[COUNT]
P a r t n
U s e
The calculation is to be executed automatically after internal event PARAMETER_CHANGED. a)
In the context menu of calculation &IV_TITLE&, choose Properties (or double-click the calculation). Calculation formula: IT_PARAM_3[SUM] / IT_PARAM_3[COUNT]
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
P a r t n e r
Event: PARAMETER_CHANGED
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
351
O n l y
11. Under XStep Table Entry and Calculation, create an SXS reference with the description Complete and Check.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign reference SXS: GR## Entry of a Signature. a)
In the context menu of XStep Table Entry and Calculation, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Complete and Check On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Entry of a Signature.
e r
12. Check the entire XStep tree and save your XSteps and your routing.
P a r t n
a)
XSteps → Check Choose Save.
S A P
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
U s e
Generate an inspection lot for the order. Generate a control instruction for the test.
In the control instructions monitor, send the new test control instruction. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Select and analyze the corresponding test work instruction. Check whether the table entry with value check, the calculation formula for automatic calculation of the average temperature, and the signature have been processed correctly for operation 0050. a)
Change the order by choosing: Continued on next page
352
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
Save the order.
P a r t n
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for group counter 9.
S A P
Change your production order with order number TEST-##.
U s e
13. Your maintenance activities for table entries with calculations and for signatures cannot be fully tested when the work instruction is simulated in the routing. For this reason, now create a test work instruction according to the following procedure:
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Order → Change TEST-##
Order: Enter O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Choose XSteps In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Delete Choose Save. Choose Order → Change
e r
Choose Functions → Read PP Master Data.
P a r t n
Choose Functions → Inspection Lot → Create. Choose the XSteps icon.
U s e
XSteps → Control Instructions/Recipe → Generate for Test Choose Save. Send the test control instruction by choosing:
S A P U s e
1000
Mode:
Test
Production order:
TEST-##
P a r t n
Plant:
Choose Display.
e r
I n t e r n a l
S A P
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Control Instructions → Monitor Control Instructions/Recipes
In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes, select the control instruction and send it.
O n l y
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Maintain the test work instruction by choosing Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Work Instructions → Find
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
353
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Plant:
1000
Mode:
Test
Production order:
TEST-##
Execute (F8) I n t e r n a l
O n l y
In the list of work instructions, select the work instruction,
U s e
P a r t n
e r
and choose Change Work Instructions (F5).
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
354
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Exercise 10: Entries and Process Messages in PI Sheets Exercise Objectives O n l y
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create requests for long text messages • Create standard XSteps for confirmations and material movements
Business Example
Hint: Complete the exercises on this topic if you want to use master recipes and process orders. Complete the exercises on the following topic, Entries and Process Messages in Work Instructions, if you want to use routings and production orders.
S A P
S A P
Task 1: Recipe: Request of a Long Text Message In this task, use characteristic LONG_TEXT-## in an XStep if you have already created this in the Process Messages section. To do this, you must first release your characteristic group SCM372-## in Customizing for use in process instructions in plant 1100.
In your practice recipe, under XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps, create an XStep with the description Entries and Process Messages. Assign your destination GR## PI Sheet 1 of type PI Sheet to the XStep. Assign context phase 0230 to the XStep.
3.
Under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Process Messages. Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
355
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
2.
e r
If you have not carried out the corresponding optional exercise “Process Messages for Mail Recipients”, use predefined characteristic LONG_TEXT-00 in this task.
P a r t n
U s e
1.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
You are defining message requests for PI sheets.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Do not assign valuations to the input parameters of the SXS reference. Under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an XStep with the description Request of a Long Text Message.
5.
Define the following parameters for XStep Request of a Long Text Message: Description
Category
Characteristic
LV_DATE
Date
Local
PPPI_EVENT_DATE
LV_INSTR
Long Text Entry
Local
LONG_TEXT-##
LV_ORDER
Order
Local
PPPI_PROCESS_ORDER
LV_TIME
Time
Local
PPPI_EVENT_TIME
e r
Name
P a r t n
Otherwise, use characteristic LONG_TEXT-00.
LV_ORDER
Symbol
LV_DATE
None
LV_INSTR
None
LV_TIME
Order
Value
Automatically None
Under the XStep, create a process instruction with the description Request of a Long Text Message.
8.
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Long Text for Process Message. Assign parameter name LV_INSTR Long Text Entry.
9.
For the process instruction, create an automatic generation for parameter LV_TIME Time.
10. For the process instruction, create an automatic generation for parameter LV_DATE Date. 11. For the process instruction, create a process message of category TEXT-##. Continued on next page
356
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
7.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Valuation
P a r t n
Name
S A P
S A P
Define the following valuations for the parameters:
U s e
6.
U s e
Hint: It is possible that you have created characteristic LONG_TEXT-## in the optional exercises of the Process Messages section.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
4.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
It is possible that you have created this message category in the optional exercises of the Process Messages section. Otherwise, use predefined message category TEXT-00. 12. Define the following valuations for the message characteristics:
O n l y e r
Value
Long Text Characteristic Parameters Group ##
LV_INSTR
Date of Event
Parameters
LV_DATE
Time of Event
Parameters
LV_TIME
Process Order
Parameters
LV_ORDER
Hint: It is possible that you have created message category TEXT-## in the optional exercises of the Process Messages section.
U s e
P a r t n
Valuation Type
I n t e r n a l
Characteristic Description
13. Check the entire XStep tree and save your recipe.
U s e
Change your process order with order number TEST-##. In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
I n t e r n a l
Generate an inspection lot for the order. Carry out a batch determination for all material components of the order. Generate a control recipe for test purposes. Save the order.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
357
O n l y
On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt, assign batch number BATCH##.
e r
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for production version 0009.
P a r t n
14. Your maintenance activities for the message request cannot be fully tested when the PI sheet is simulated in the recipe. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet and a test process message according to the following procedure:
S A P
S A P
Otherwise, use message category TEXT-00.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
In the control recipe monitor, send the new test control recipe. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Select and analyze the corresponding test PI sheet. O n l y
Then complete the process instruction for the long text entry using the corresponding function in the context menu.
e r
Now exit the PI sheet and select the resulting test process message of category TEXT-## in the message monitor.
P a r t n
Display the message. Check the valuation of the characteristics.
U s e
Send the message. Hint: Choose Send Message and not Start Send Job.
S A P
Task 2:
e r
U s e
Then import file GR##Messages.xml to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372. Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. 2.
For your imported folder, enter the description GR## SXS Message Requests and the text GR## SXS Message Requests.
3.
For the standard XSteps of the imported folder, choose the following descriptions and texts:
Continued on next page
358
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
In the standard XStep repository of plant 1100, export standard XStep folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Message Requests to a local storage location (for example, to your desktop). Name the exported file GR##Messages.xml.
P a r t n
SXS for Confirmations and Material Movements
S A P
In test mode, the message is checked but is not processed by the message recipient.
1.
I n t e r n a l
In phase 230 in the Process Messages section, enter a long text, for example, Long text entry for test purposes.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Description
Text
SXS: GR## Message: Material Consumption
GR## Message: Material Consumption for All Components
SXS: GR## Message: Material Receipt
GR## Message: Material Receipt for Product
SXS: GR## Message: Phase Start
GR## Message: Phase Start with Signature
SXS: GR## Message: Phase End
GR## Message: Phase End with Signature
e r
Maintain the version data of the imported standard XSteps: Version: 0001;
Analyze in detail the structure of the imported standard XSteps.
5.
Check that the XStep trees are structurally correct.
6.
Change the status of the SXS versions to Release.
7.
Save your maintenance activities.
S A P
S A P
4.
U s e
P a r t n
Validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n e r
Task 3: Recipe: Confirmations and Material Movements
U s e
In your practice recipe, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Signature for Phase Start. Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Phase Start.
In your practice recipe, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Signature for Phase End. Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Phase End. Position SXS reference Signature for Phase End directly after XStep Request of a Long Text Message.
3.
In your practice recipe, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Report Material Withdrawal. Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Material Consumption. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
359
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
2.
e r
Move SXS reference Signature for Phase Start so that is comes directly after SXS reference Process Messages.
P a r t n
1.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Position SXS reference Report Material Withdrawals directly after SXS reference Signature for Phase Start. 4.
In your practice recipe, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Report Material Receipt. Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Material Receipt.
O n l y
5.
Check the entire XStep tree and save your recipe.
6.
Your maintenance activities for the message requests cannot be fully tested when the PI sheet is simulated in the recipe. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet and test process messages according to the following procedure: Change your process order with order number TEST-##. In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
S A P
On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt, assign batch number BATCH##.
S A P
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for production version 0009.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Position SXS reference Message: Material Receipt directly before SXS reference Signature for Phase End.
I n t e r n a l
Assign context phase 0430 to the SXS reference.
Generate an inspection lot for the order. P a r t n
U s e
Carry out a batch determination for all material components of the order. Generate a control recipe for test purposes. Save the order.
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Select and analyze the corresponding test PI sheet. In phase 230 in the Process Messages section, enter a signature for the start of the phase. Check the material list. Enter a text in the long text window. Continued on next page
360
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
In the control recipe monitor, send the new test control recipe.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Enter a signature for the end of the phase. In phase 430, enter the quantity produced and complete the table row using the context menu. Now exit the PI sheet and select the resulting test process messages for order TEST-## in the message monitor. O n l y
Send the messages. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
In test mode, the message is checked but is not processed by the message recipient.
I n t e r n a l
Display the messages. Check the valuation of the characteristics.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
361
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Solution 10: Entries and Process Messages in PI Sheets Task 1: Recipe: Request of a Long Text Message O n l y
In this task, use characteristic LONG_TEXT-## in an XStep if you have already created this in the Process Messages section. To do this, you must first release your characteristic group SCM372-## in Customizing for use in process instructions in plant 1100.
a)
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Management → Process Instructions → Process Instruction Characteristics → Define Characteristics Groups for Process Instructions/
S A P
Release for Process Instructions
S A P
U s e
P a r t n
e r
If you have not carried out the corresponding optional exercise “Process Messages for Mail Recipients”, use predefined characteristic LONG_TEXT-00 in this task.
I n t e r n a l
1.
Plant: 1100
Group:
SCM372-##
Chars Group:
Characteristics group ##
P a r t n
U s e
Choose New Entries
In your practice recipe, under XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps, create an XStep with the description Entries and Process Messages.
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
2.
Assign your destination GR## PI Sheet 1 of type PI Sheet to the XStep.
Continued on next page
362
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
Then save your entries and choose Back to return to the IMG.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign context phase 0230 to the XStep. a)
Call the recipe for production version 0009 of material T-SCM372-PI-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor. In the context menu of XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps, choose Create → XStep
O n l y
Description: Entries and Process Messages On XStep tab page Destination,
e r
assign destination GR## PI Sheet 1 of type PI Sheet by double-clicking it.
assign phase 0230 by double-clicking it. 3.
Under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Process Messages.
S A P
S A P
Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instruction. Do not assign valuations to the input parameters of the SXS reference. a)
In the context menu of XStep Entries and Process Messages,
U s e
In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
I n t e r n a l
On tab page Reference,
Description: Process Messages
e r
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Work Instruction.
In the context menu of XStep Entries and Process Messages, choose Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep). Description: Request of a Long Text Message Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
363
O n l y
Under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an XStep with the description Request of a Long Text Message. a)
P a r t n
choose Create → SXS Reference
4.
U s e
P a r t n
On XStep tab page Context,
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep).
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Define the following parameters for XStep Request of a Long Text Message: Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
LV_DATE
Date
Local
PPPI_EVENT_DATE
LV_INSTR
Long Text Entry
Local
LONG_TEXT-##
LV_ORDER
Order
Local
PPPI_PROCESS_ORDER
LV_TIME
Time
Local
PPPI_EVENT_TIME
e r
Hint: It is possible that you have created characteristic LONG_TEXT-## in the optional exercises of the Process Messages section.
a)
On XStep tab page Parameters, U s e
P a r t n
Otherwise, use characteristic LONG_TEXT-00.
define the parameters as described in the exercise. 6.
Define the following valuations for the parameters:
S A P
Symbol
LV_DATE
None
LV_INSTR
None Order
LV_TIME
Value
Automatically
P a r t n
LV_ORDER U s e
Valuation
S A P
Name
a)
None
On XStep tab page Valuation,
a)
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Under the XStep, create a process instruction with the description Request of a Long Text Message. In the context menu of XStep Request of a Long Text Message, choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Request of a Long Text Message
Continued on next page
364
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
define the valuations as described in the exercise. 7.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
5.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
8.
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Long Text for Process Message. Assign parameter name LV_INSTR Long Text Entry. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Request of a Long Text Message, choose Create → Entry → Parameter Value I n t e r n a l
O n l y
In the context menu of the parameter value, choose Properties (or double-click the parameter value). Description: Long Text for Process Message Parameter name: LV_INSTR Long Text Entry For the process instruction, create an automatic generation for parameter LV_TIME Time. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Request of a Long Text Message, choose Create → Control Data → Automatic Generation In the context menu of the automatic generation, choose Properties (or double-click the automatic generation).
S A P
S A P
Parameter: LV_TIME 10. For the process instruction, create an automatic generation for parameter LV_DATE Date.
U s e
In the context menu of process instruction Request of a Long Text Message, choose Create → Control Data → Automatic Generation
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the automatic generation, choose Properties (or double-click the automatic generation).
e r
Parameter: LV_DATE.
P a r t n
a)
U s e
P a r t n
e r
9.
11. For the process instruction, create a process message of category TEXT-##. O n l y
It is possible that you have created this message category in the optional exercises of the Process Messages section.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
365
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Otherwise, use predefined message category TEXT-00. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Request of a Long Text Message, choose Create → Control Data → Process Message In the context menu of the process message, choose Properties (or double-click the process message). I n t e r n a l
O n l y
process message category: TEXT-##. 12. Define the following valuations for the message characteristics: Valuation Type
Value LV_INSTR
Date of Event
Parameters
LV_DATE
Time of Event
Parameters
LV_TIME
Process Order
Parameters
LV_ORDER
Hint: It is possible that you have created message category TEXT-## in the optional exercises of the Process Messages section.
S A P
S A P
Long Text Characteristic Parameters Group ##
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Characteristic Description
a)
P a r t n
U s e
Otherwise, use message category TEXT-00. Define the characteristic values as described in the exercise.
13. Check the entire XStep tree and save your recipe. XSteps → Check
e r
Choose Save. 14. Your maintenance activities for the message request cannot be fully tested when the PI sheet is simulated in the recipe. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet and a test process message according to the following procedure: Change your process order with order number TEST-##. In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order. Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for production version 0009.
Continued on next page
366
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
a)
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt, assign batch number BATCH##. Generate an inspection lot for the order. Carry out a batch determination for all material components of the order. Generate a control recipe for test purposes. I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Save the order. In the control recipe monitor, send the new test control recipe.
e r
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
In phase 230 in the Process Messages section, enter a long text, for example, Long text entry for test purposes. Then complete the process instruction for the long text entry using the corresponding function in the context menu.
S A P
Display the message. Check the valuation of the characteristics.
S A P
Now exit the PI sheet and select the resulting test process message of category TEXT-## in the message monitor.
U s e
P a r t n
Select and analyze the corresponding test PI sheet.
Hint: Choose Send Message and not Start Send Job.
a)
e r
Change the order by choosing: Logistics → Production - Process → Process Order → Process Order → Change Process order: TEST-## Enter Choose XSteps; in the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Delete Choose Save. Process Order → Change Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
367
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
In test mode, the message is checked but is not processed by the message recipient.
P a r t n
U s e
Send the message.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Process Order → Functions → Read Master Data On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt: Batch: BATCH## Process Order → Functions → Inspection Lot → Generate O n l y
and choose Execute Batch Determination. Process Order → Functions → Control Recipe → Generate for Test Choose Save.
e r
Send the test control recipe by choosing
U s e
P a r t n
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor
I n t e r n a l
In the material list of the order, select all components
Plant: 1100 Mode: Test Production order: TEST-##
S A P
S A P
Choose Display. In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes,
P a r t n
U s e
select the control recipe and send it. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Maintain the test PI sheet by choosing
I n t e r n a l
e r
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find Plant: 1100
O n l y
Mode: Test Process order: TEST-## Execute (F8) In the list of PI sheets, select the PI sheet and choose Maintain PI Sheet (F5). Continued on next page
368
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
To analyze the process message, choose Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Message → Message Monitor Plant: 1100 Mode: Test O n l y
Enter In the list of process messages,
e r
select the process message, choose Display Message, and choose Send Message;
U s e
P a r t n
choose Send Log for Message.
Task 2: SXS for Confirmations and Material Movements In the standard XStep repository of plant 1100, export standard XStep folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Message Requests to a local storage location (for example, to your desktop). Name the exported file GR##Messages.xml.
S A P
S A P
1.
I n t e r n a l
Order: TEST-##
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
369
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Then import file GR##Messages.xml to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372. Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
a)
Plant: 1100 In the context menu of folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Message Requests,
e r
choose Export SXS Folder
P a r t n
File name: GR##Messages.xml In the context menu of folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372, choose
U s e
Change Import SXS Folder.
S A P
For your imported folder, enter the description GR## SXS Message Requests and the text GR## SXS Message Requests. a)
In the context menu of the imported folder, choose Properties (or double-click the folder).
U s e
Text: GR## SXS Message Requests
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version).
e r
Version: 0001
P a r t n
Description: GR## SXS Message Requests
S A P
2.
Validity period: today until 31.12.9999 For the standard XSteps of the imported folder, choose the following descriptions and texts:
Continued on next page
370
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
3.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Description
Text
SXS: GR## Message: Material Consumption
GR## Message: Material Consumption for All Components
SXS: GR## Message: Material Receipt
GR## Message: Material Receipt for Product
SXS: GR## Message: Phase Start
GR## Message: Phase Start with Signature
SXS: GR## Message: Phase End
GR## Message: Phase End with Signature
e r
Maintain the version data of the imported standard XSteps: Version: 0001;
a) 4.
Analyze in detail the structure of the imported standard XSteps. a)
S A P
Analyze in detail the structure of the imported standard XSteps. S A P
5.
Define the descriptions and texts of the imported XSteps as described in the exercise.
Check that the XStep trees are structurally correct. a)
U s e
P a r t n
Validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n e r
For the XStep trees, choose XSteps → Check
U s e
P a r t n
6.
Change the status of the SXS versions to Release. a)
In the context menu of the versions, choose Change Status → Release
a)
Choose Save.
Task 3: Recipe: Confirmations and Material Movements 1.
In your practice recipe, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Signature for Phase Start. Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Phase Start.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
371
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Save your maintenance activities.
e r
7.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Move SXS reference Signature for Phase Start so that is comes directly after SXS reference Process Messages. a)
Call the recipe for production version 0009 of material T-SCM372-PI-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor. In the context menu of XStep Entries and Process Messages,
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Signature for Phase Start
e r
On tab page Reference,
P a r t n
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Message: Phase Start. Use drag and drop to position the SXS as described in the exercise. In your practice recipe, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Signature for Phase End.
U s e
2.
Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Phase End.
S A P
a)
In the context menu of XStep Entries and Process Messages,
U s e
P a r t n
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Signature for Phase End I n t e r n a l
S A P
Position SXS reference Signature for Phase End directly after XStep Request of a Long Text Message.
e r
On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Message: Phase End.
3.
In your practice recipe, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Report Material Withdrawal. Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Material Consumption.
Continued on next page
372
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Use drag and drop to position the SXS as described in the exercise.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Position SXS reference Report Material Withdrawals directly after SXS reference Signature for Phase Start. a)
In the context menu of XStep Entries and Process Messages, choose Create → SXS Reference
O n l y
Description: Report Material Withdrawals On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Message: Material Consumption.
e r
Use drag and drop to position the SXS as described in the exercise. In your practice recipe, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Report Material Receipt.
U s e
P a r t n
4.
Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Material Receipt. Assign context phase 0430 to the SXS reference.
S A P
S A P
Position SXS reference Message: Material Receipt directly before SXS reference Signature for Phase End. a)
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
In the context menu of XStep Entries and Process Messages, choose Create → SXS Reference
U s e
Description: Report Material Receipt
e r
I n t e r n a l
On tab page Reference,
P a r t n
In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Message: Material Receipt. On tab page Context, assign context phase 0430.
O n l y
Use drag and drop to position the SXS as described in the exercise. 5.
Check the entire XStep tree and save your recipe. a)
XSteps → Check Choose Save.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
373
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
6.
Your maintenance activities for the message requests cannot be fully tested when the PI sheet is simulated in the recipe. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet and test process messages according to the following procedure: Change your process order with order number TEST-##. In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
O n l y
On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt, assign batch number BATCH##.
e r
Generate an inspection lot for the order. Carry out a batch determination for all material components of the order.
I n t e r n a l
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for production version 0009.
U s e
P a r t n
Generate a control recipe for test purposes. Save the order. In the control recipe monitor, send the new test control recipe.
S A P
S A P
Check the material list.
In phase 230 in the Process Messages section, enter a signature for the start of the phase.
Enter a text in the long text window.
e r
In phase 430, enter the quantity produced and complete the table row using the context menu. Now exit the PI sheet and select the resulting test process messages for order TEST-## in the message monitor. Display the messages. Check the valuation of the characteristics. Send the messages. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Continued on next page
374
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Enter a signature for the end of the phase.
P a r t n
Select and analyze the corresponding test PI sheet.
U s e
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
In test mode, the message is checked but is not processed by the message recipient. a)
Change the order by choosing: Logistics → Production - Process → Process Order → Process Order → Change I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Process order: TEST-## Enter Choose XSteps; in the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Delete
e r
Choose Save. Process Order → Change
U s e
P a r t n
Process Order → Functions → Read Master Data On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt: Batch: BATCH## Process Order → Functions → Inspection Lot → Generate S A P
S A P
In the material list of the order, select all components and choose Execute Batch Determination. Process Order → Functions → Control Recipe → Generate for Test
U s e
Send the test control recipe by choosing
e r
I n t e r n a l
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor
P a r t n
Choose Save.
Plant: 1100 Mode: Test
Choose Display. In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes, select the control recipe and send it. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
375
O n l y
Production order: TEST-##
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Maintain the test PI sheet by choosing Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find Plant: 1100 Mode: Test I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Process order: TEST-## Execute (F8) In the list of PI sheets, select your PI sheet
e r
and choose Maintain PI Sheet (F5). To analyze the process messages, choose
P a r t n
Plant: 1100 Mode: Test
S A P
S A P
Order: TEST-## Enter In the list of process messages, select the process messages.
U s e
P a r t n
For each individual message, choose Display Message. Choose Send Message. Choose Send Log for Message.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Message → Message Monitor
O n l y
376
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Exercise 11: Entries and Process Messages in Work Instructions Exercise Objectives O n l y
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create requests for long text messages • Create standard XSteps for confirmations and material movements
Business Example
Hint: Complete the exercises on this topic if you want to use routings and production orders. Complete the exercises on the previous topic, Entries and Process Messages in PI Sheets, if you want to use master recipes and process orders.
S A P
S A P
Task 1: Routing: Request of a Long Text Message In this task, use characteristic LONG_TEXT-## in an XStep if you have already created this in the Process Messages section. To do this, you must first release your characteristic group SCM372-## in Customizing for use in process instructions in plant 1000.
In your practice routing, under XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps, create an XStep with the description Entries and Process Messages. Assign your destination GR## Work Instructions 1 of type Work Instructions to the XStep. Assign context operation 0060 to the XStep.
3.
Under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Process Messages. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
377
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
2.
e r
If you have not carried out the corresponding optional exercise “Process Messages for Mail Recipients”, use predefined characteristic LONG_TEXT-00 in this task.
P a r t n
U s e
1.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
You are defining message requests for work instructions.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text. Do not assign valuations to the input parameters of the SXS reference. Under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an XStep with the description Request of a Long Text Message.
5.
Define the following parameters for XStep Request of a Long Text Message: Description
Category
Characteristic
LV_DATE
Date
Local
PPPI_EVENT_DATE
LV_INSTR
Long Text Entry
Local
LONG_TEXT-##
LV_ORDER
Order
Local
PPPI_PRODUCTION_ORDER
LV_TIME
Time
Local
PPPI_EVENT_TIME
Hint: It is possible that you have created characteristic LONG_TEXT-## in the optional exercises of the Process Messages section.
S A P
6.
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Symbol
Valuation
LV_DATE
None
LV_INSTR
None
LV_ORDER LV_TIME
Order
Value P a r t n
U s e
Name
Automatically None
Under the XStep, create a process instruction with the description Request of a Long Text Message.
8.
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Long Text for Process Message. Assign parameter name LV_INSTR Long Text Entry.
9.
For the process instruction, create an automatic generation for parameter LV_TIME Time.
Continued on next page
378
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
7.
e r
I n t e r n a l
S A P
Otherwise, use characteristic LONG_TEXT-00.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Name
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
4.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
10. For the process instruction, create an automatic generation for parameter LV_DATE Date. 11. For the process instruction, create a process message of category TEXT-##. It is possible that you have created this message category in the optional exercises of the Process Messages section. O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Otherwise, use predefined message category TEXT-00. 12. Define the following valuations for the message characteristics: Value
Long Text Characteristic Parameters Group ##
LV_INSTR
Date of Event
Parameters
LV_DATE
Time of Event
Parameters
LV_TIME
Production Order
Parameters
LV_ORDER
U s e
e r
Valuation Type
P a r t n
Characteristic Description
S A P
S A P
Hint: It is possible that you have already created message category TEXT-## in the optional exercises of the Process Messages section. Otherwise, use message category TEXT-00.
U s e
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order. Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for group counter 9. Generate an inspection lot for the order. Generate a control instruction for the test. Save the order. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
379
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Change your production order with order number TEST-##.
e r
14. Your maintenance activities for the message request cannot be fully tested when the work instruction is simulated in the routing. For this reason, now create test a work instruction and a test process message according to the following procedure:
P a r t n
13. Check the entire XStep tree and save your XSteps and your routing.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
In the control instructions monitor, send the new test control instruction. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Select and analyze the corresponding test work instruction. O n l y
Then complete the process instruction for the long text entry using the corresponding function in the context menu.
e r
Now exit the work instructions and select the resulting test process message of category TEXT-## in the message monitor.
P a r t n
Display the message. Check the valuation of the characteristics.
U s e
Send the message. Hint: Choose Send Message and not Start Send Job.
S A P
Task 2:
e r
U s e
Then import file GR##Messages.xml to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372. Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. 2.
For your imported folder, enter the description GR## SXS Message Requests and the text GR## SXS Message Requests.
3.
For the standard XSteps of the imported folder, choose the following descriptions and texts:
Continued on next page
380
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
In the standard XStep repository of plant 1000, export standard XStep folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Message Requests to a local storage location (for example, to your desktop). Name the exported file GR##Messages.xml.
P a r t n
SXS for Confirmations and Material Movements
S A P
In test mode, the message is checked but is not processed by the message recipient.
1.
I n t e r n a l
In operation 0060 in the Process Messages section, enter a long text, for example, Long text entry for test purposes.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Description
Text
SXS: GR## Message: Material Consumption
GR## Message: Material Consumption for All Components
SXS: GR## Message: Material Receipt
GR## Message: Material Receipt for Product
O n l y
SXS: GR## Message: Operation End
GR## Message: Operation End with Signature
P a r t n
Analyze in detail the structure of the imported standard XSteps.
5.
Check that the XStep trees are structurally correct.
6.
Change the status of the SXS versions to Release.
7.
Save your maintenance activities.
Task 3:
U s e
4.
S A P
e r
Maintain the version data of the imported standard XSteps: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
S A P
Routing: Confirmations and Material Movements
U s e
In your practice routing, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Signature for Operation Start. Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Operation Start.
2.
In your practice routing, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Signature for Operation End.
O n l y
Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Operation End. Position SXS reference Signature for Operation End directly after XStep Request of a Long Text Message. 3.
In your practice routing, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Report Material Withdrawals. Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Material Consumption. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Position SXS reference Signature for Operation Start directly after SXS reference Process Messages.
P a r t n
1.
I n t e r n a l
SXS: GR## Message: Operation Start GR## Message: Operation Start with Signature
381
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Position SXS reference Report Material Withdrawals directly after SXS reference Signature for Operation Start. 4.
In your practice recipe, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Report Material Receipt. Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Material Receipt.
O n l y
5.
Check the entire XStep tree and save your XSteps and your routing.
6.
Your maintenance activities for the message requests cannot be fully tested when the work instruction is simulated in the routing. For this reason, now create a test work instruction and test process messages according to the following procedure: Change your production order with order number TEST-##. In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
S A P
Generate an inspection lot for the order. Generate a control instruction for the test.
U s e
P a r t n
Save the order. In the control instructions monitor, send the new test control instruction.
e r
Select and analyze the corresponding test control instructions. In operation 0060 in the Process Messages section, enter a signature for the start of the operation. Check the material list. Enter a text in the long text window. Enter a signature for the end of the operation. In operation 0100, enter the quantity produced and complete the table row using the context menu. Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
382
S A P
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for group counter 9.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Position SXS reference Report Material Receipt directly before SXS reference Signature for Operation End.
I n t e r n a l
Assign context operation 0100 to the SXS reference.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Now exit the work instructions and select the resulting test process messages for order TEST-## in the message monitor. Display the messages. Check the valuation of the characteristics. Send the messages.
O n l y
U s e
P a r t n
e r
In test mode, the message is checked but is not processed by the message recipient.
I n t e r n a l
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
383
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Solution 11: Entries and Process Messages in Work Instructions Task 1: Routing: Request of a Long Text Message O n l y
In this task, use characteristic LONG_TEXT-## in an XStep if you have already created this in the Process Messages section. To do this, you must first release your characteristic group SCM372-## in Customizing for use in process instructions in plant 1000.
a)
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Management → Process Instructions → Process Instruction Characteristics → Define Characteristics Groups for Process Instructions/
S A P
Release for Process Instructions
S A P
U s e
P a r t n
e r
If you have not carried out the corresponding optional exercise “Process Messages for Mail Recipients”, use predefined characteristic LONG_TEXT-00 in this task.
I n t e r n a l
1.
Plant: 1000 Choose New Entries
P a r t n
U s e
Group: SCM372-## Chars Group: Characteristics Group ## Then save your entries and choose Back to return to the IMG.
Assign your destination GR## Work Instructions 1 of type Work Instructions to the XStep.
Continued on next page
384
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
In your practice routing, under XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps, create an XStep with the description Entries and Process Messages.
e r
2.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign context operation 0060 to the XStep. a)
Call the routing for group counter 9 of material T-SCM372-PP-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor. In the context menu of XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps, choose Create → XStep
O n l y
(or double-click the XStep). Description: Entries and Process Messages
e r
On XStep tab page Destination,
On XStep tab page Context assign operation 0060 by double-clicking it. Under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Process Messages. Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text. Do not assign valuations to the input parameters of the SXS reference.
U s e
In the context menu of XStep Entries and Process Messages,
P a r t n
a)
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P
3.
U s e
P a r t n
assign destination GR## Work Instructions 1 of type Work Instructions by double-clicking it.
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties
e r
Description: Process Messages On tab page Reference,
O n l y
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Instruction Text.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
385
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
4.
Under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an XStep with the description Request of a Long Text Message. a)
In the context menu of XStep Entries and Process Messages, choose Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Request of a Long Text Message Define the following parameters for XStep Request of a Long Text Message: Description
Category
Characteristic
LV_DATE
Date
Local
PPPI_EVENT_DATE
LV_INSTR
Long Text Entry
Local
LONG_TEXT-##
LV_ORDER
Order
Local
PPPI_PRODUCTION_ORDER
LV_TIME
Time
Local
PPPI_EVENT_TIME
Hint: It is possible that you have created characteristic LONG_TEXT-## in the optional exercises of the Process Messages section.
U s e
a)
P a r t n
Otherwise, use characteristic LONG_TEXT-00. On XStep tab page Parameters, define the parameters as described in the exercise. Define the following valuations for the parameters: Name
Symbol
Valuation None
LV_INSTR
None
LV_ORDER
Order
LV_TIME a)
Value
O n l y
LV_DATE
e r
I n t e r n a l
6.
Automatically None
On XStep tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise. Continued on next page
386
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
S A P
S A P
Name
U s e
P a r t n
e r
5.
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the XStep).
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
7.
Under the XStep, create a process instruction with the description Request of a Long Text Message. a)
In the context menu of XStep Request of a Long Text Message, choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: Request of a Long Text Message 8.
For the process instruction, create the entry of a parameter with the description Long Text for Process Message.
e r
Assign parameter name LV_INSTR Long Text Entry.
P a r t n
a)
In the context menu of process instruction Request of a Long Text Message,
U s e
choose Create → Entry → Parameter Value. In the context menu of the parameter value, choose Properties (or double-click the parameter value).
S A P
S A P
Description: Long Text for Process Message Parameter name: LV_INSTR Long Text Entry For the process instruction, create an automatic generation for parameter LV_TIME Time. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Request of a Long Text Message, choose Create → Control Data → Automatic Generation .
I n t e r n a l
In the context menu of the automatic generation, choose Properties
e r
(or double-click the automatic generation).
P a r t n
U s e
9.
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the process instruction).
Parameter: LV_TIME O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
387
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
10. For the process instruction, create an automatic generation for parameter LV_DATE Date. a)
In the context menu of process instruction Request of a Long Text Message, choose Create → Control Data → Automatic Generation In the context menu of the automatic generation, choose Properties I n t e r n a l
O n l y
(or double-click the automatic generation). Parameter: LV_DATE 11. For the process instruction, create a process message of category TEXT-##.
e r
It is possible that you have created this message category in the optional exercises of the Process Messages section.
a)
In the context menu of process instruction Request of a Long Text Message, choose Create → Control Data → Process Message In the context menu of the process message, choose Properties
S A P
S A P
(or double-click the process message). Process message category: TEXT-##
Value
Date of Event
Parameters
LV_DATE
Time of Event
Parameters
LV_TIME
Production Order
Parameters
LV_ORDER
Hint: It is possible that you have already created message category TEXT-## in the optional exercises of the Process Messages section. Otherwise, use message category TEXT-00. a)
Define the characteristic values as described in the exercise. Continued on next page
388
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
LV_INSTR
e r
U s e
Valuation Type
P a r t n
Long Text Characteristic Parameters Group ##
I n t e r n a l
12. Define the following valuations for the message characteristics: Characteristic Description
U s e
P a r t n
Otherwise, use predefined message category TEXT-00.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
13. Check the entire XStep tree and save your XSteps and your routing. a)
Choose XSteps → Check. Choose Save.
O n l y
Change your production order with order number TEST-##. In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
e r
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for group counter 9.
I n t e r n a l
14. Your maintenance activities for the message request cannot be fully tested when the work instruction is simulated in the routing. For this reason, now create test a work instruction and a test process message according to the following procedure:
U s e
P a r t n
Generate an inspection lot for the order. Generate a control instruction for the test. Save the order.
S A P
S A P
In the control instructions monitor, send the new test control instruction. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Select and analyze the corresponding test work instruction. P a r t n
U s e
In operation 0060 in the Process Messages section, enter a long text, for example, Long text entry for test purposes.
Now exit the work instructions and select the resulting test process message of category TEXT-## in the message monitor.
O n l y
Display the message. Check the valuation of the characteristics. Send the message. Hint: Choose Send Message and not Start Send Job. In test mode, the message is checked but is not processed by the message recipient. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Then complete the process instruction for the long text entry using the corresponding function in the context menu.
389
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
a)
Change the order by choosing: Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Order → Change Order: TEST-## Enter
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Choose XSteps. In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Delete Choose Save. Choose Order → Change
e r
Choose Functions → Read PP Master Data.
P a r t n
Choose Functions → Inspection Lot → Create. Choose the XSteps icon.
U s e
XSteps → Control Instructions/Recipe → Generate for Test Choose Save.
S A P
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Control Instructions → Monitor Control Instructions/Recipes
S A P
Send the test control instruction by choosing:
Plant: 1000 P a r t n
U s e
Mode: Test Production Order: TEST-## Choose Display.
I n t e r n a l
Maintain the test work instruction by choosing Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Work Instructions → Find Plant: 1000 Mode: Test Continued on next page
390
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
e r
In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes, select the control instruction and send them.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Production Order: TEST-## Execute (F8) In the list of work instructions, select the work instruction, O n l y
To analyze the process message, choose Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Process Messages → Message Monitor
e r
Plant: 1000 Mode: Test
I n t e r n a l
and choose Change Work Instructions (F5).
U s e
P a r t n
Order: TEST-## Enter In the list of process messages, select the process message. S A P
S A P
Choose Display Message. Choose Send Message.
Task 2: SXS for Confirmations and Material Movements In the standard XStep repository of plant 1000, export standard XStep folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Message Requests to a local storage location (for example, to your desktop). Name the exported file GR##Messages.xml.
e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
1.
P a r t n
U s e
Choose Send Log for Message.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
391
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Then import file GR##Messages.xml to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372. Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. a)
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository
O n l y
In the context menu of folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Message Requests
e r
choose Export SXS Folder. File name: GR##Messages.xml
Change Import SXS Folder For your imported folder, enter the description GR## SXS Message Requests and the text GR## SXS Message Requests. a)
In the context menu of the imported folder, choose Properties (or double-click the folder).
U s e
P a r t n
Description: GR## SXS Message Requests Text: GR## SXS Message Requests In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version). I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P
2.
U s e
P a r t n
In the context menu of folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372, choose
I n t e r n a l
Plant: 1000
e r
Version: 0001 Validity period:today until 31.12.9999 For the standard XSteps of the imported folder, choose the following descriptions and texts:
Continued on next page
392
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
3.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Description
Text
SXS: GR## Message: Material Consumption
GR## Message: Material Consumption for All Components
SXS: GR## Message: Material Receipt
GR## Message: Material Receipt for Product
O n l y
SXS: GR## Message: Operation End
GR## Message: Operation End with Signature
e r
Maintain the version data of the imported standard XSteps: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
4.
Analyze in detail the structure of the imported standard XSteps. a)
S A P
Analyze in detail the structure of the imported standard XSteps.
Check that the XStep trees are structurally correct. a)
S A P
5.
Define the descriptions and texts of the imported XSteps as described in the exercise.
For the XStep trees, choose XSteps → Check
U s e
Change the status of the SXS versions to Release. a)
P a r t n
6.
In the context menu of the versions, choose Change Status → Release
Save your maintenance activities. a)
e r
Choose Save.
Task 3: Routing: Confirmations and Material Movements 1.
In your practice routing, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Signature for Operation Start. Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Operation Start.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
393
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
7.
U s e
P a r t n
a)
I n t e r n a l
SXS: GR## Message: Operation Start GR## Message: Operation Start with Signature
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Position SXS reference Signature for Operation Start directly after SXS reference Process Messages. a)
Call the routing for group counter 9 of material T-SCM372-PP-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor. In the context menu of XStep Entries and Process Messages,
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Signature for Operation Start
e r
On tab page Reference,
Use drag and drop to position the SXS reference as described in the exercise. 2.
In your practice routing, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Signature for Operation End.
S A P
S A P
Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Operation End. Position SXS reference Signature for Operation End directly after XStep Request of a Long Text Message.
U s e
In the context menu of XStep Entries and Process Messages,
P a r t n
a)
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Message: Operation Start.
Description: Signature for Operation End On tab page Reference,
O n l y
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Message: Operation End. Use drag and drop to position the SXS reference as described in the exercise. 3.
In your practice routing, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Report Material Withdrawals. Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Material Consumption. Continued on next page
394
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Position SXS reference Report Material Withdrawals directly after SXS reference Signature for Operation Start. a)
In the context menu of XStep Entries and Process Messages, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties I n t e r n a l
O n l y
(or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Report Material Withdrawals On tab page Reference,
e r
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Message: Material Consumption.
4.
In your practice recipe, under XStep Entries and Process Messages, create an SXS reference with the description Report Material Receipt. Assign reference SXS: GR## Message: Material Receipt.
S A P
Position SXS reference Report Material Receipt directly before SXS reference Signature for Operation End. a)
In the context menu of XStep Entries and Process Messages, P a r t n
U s e
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
I n t e r n a l
e r
Description: Message: Material Receipt On tab page Reference,
O n l y
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Message: Material Receipt. On tab page Context, assign context operation 0100. Use drag and drop to position the SXS reference as described in the exercise.
Continued on next page
2010
S A P
Assign context operation 0100 to the SXS reference.
U s e
P a r t n
Use drag and drop to position the SXS reference as described in the exercise.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
395
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
5.
Check the entire XStep tree and save your XSteps and your routing. a)
XSteps → Check Choose Save.
Your maintenance activities for the message requests cannot be fully tested when the work instruction is simulated in the routing. For this reason, now create a test work instruction and test process messages according to the following procedure: Change your production order with order number TEST-##. In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
e r
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for group counter 9.
P a r t n
Generate an inspection lot for the order.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
6.
Generate a control instruction for the test. U s e
Save the order. In the control instructions monitor, send the new test control instruction.
S A P
S A P
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Select and analyze the corresponding test control instructions.
U s e
Check the material list. Enter a text in the long text window.
Now exit the work instructions and select the resulting test process messages for order TEST-## in the message monitor. Display the messages. Check the valuation of the characteristics. Send the messages. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Continued on next page
396
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
In operation 0100, enter the quantity produced and complete the table row using the context menu.
e r
Enter a signature for the end of the operation.
P a r t n
In operation 0060 in the Process Messages section, enter a signature for the start of the operation.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
In test mode, the message is checked but is not processed by the message recipient. a)
Change the order by choosing: Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Order → Change
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Order: TEST-## Enter Choose XSteps. In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Delete
e r
Choose Save.
P a r t n
Choose Order → Change Choose Functions → Read PP Master Data.
U s e
Choose Functions → Inspection Lot → Create. Choose the XSteps icon.
S A P
S A P
XSteps → Control Instructions/Recipe → Generate for Test Choose Save. Send the test control instruction by choosing:
U s e
Plant: 1000 Mode: Test
I n t e r n a l
e r
Production order: TEST-## Choose Display.
O n l y
In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes, select the control instruction and send it. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Maintain the test work instruction by choosing Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Work Instructions → Find Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Control Instructions → Monitor Control Instructions/Recipes
397
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Plant: 1000 Mode: Test Manufacturing Order: TEST-## Execute (F8) O n l y
select the work instruction, and choose Change Work Instructions (F5). To analyze the process messages, choose
e r
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Process Messages → Message Monitor
I n t e r n a l
In the list of work instructions,
U s e
P a r t n
Plant: 1000 Mode: Test Order: TEST-## Enter S A P
S A P
In the list of process messages, select the process messages. Choose Display Message.
P a r t n
U s e
Choose Send Message.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Choose Send Log for Message.
O n l y
398
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Exercise 12: Function Calls in PI Sheets Exercise Objectives
O n l y
Business Example
e r
You are defining function calls in PI sheets.
U s e
P a r t n
Hint: Complete the exercises on this topic if you want to use master recipes and process orders.
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Configure the display of a document • Configure inspection results recording
Complete the exercises on the following topic, Function Calls in Work Instructions, if you want to use routings and production orders.
Task 1:
S A P U s e
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree.
For the XStep tree, enter the description Display Document from DMS.
e r
Hint: As an alternative to this task, the corresponding SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion). 2.
Define the following parameters for XStep tree Display Document from DMS:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
399
O n l y
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
P a r t n
In the standard XStep repository, in your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Display Document from DMS and the text GR## Display Document from Document Management System.
I n t e r n a l
1.
S A P
SXS: Display of a Document from the Document Management System
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372
e r P a r t n
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_DOC
Document
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_NUMBER
IV_DOC_PAR
Document Part
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_PART
IV_DOC_TYP
Document Type
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_TYPE
IV_DOC_VER
Document Version
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_VERSION
IV_TITLE
Description of Function Call
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Symbol
IV_DOC
None
IV_DOC_PAR
None
IV_DOC_TYP
None
IV_DOC_VER
None
U s e
Value
Description of the Automatically XStep
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Display Document from DMS.
5.
For the process instruction, create a function call with the description &IV_TITLE&.
e r
4.
On the Parameters tab page, assign function module COPF_DOCUMENT_SHOW_DIRECT. Assign valuations to the function module parameters as follows:
Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
The function is to be executed manually. You should be able to execute it in display mode.
400
P a r t n
IV_TITLE
I n t e r n a l
Valuation
S A P
S A P
Name
U s e
3.
Name
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Short Text
Valuation Mode
Value
Document Type
Parameters
IV_DOC_TYP
Document
Parameters
IV_DOC
Document Part
Parameters
IV_DOC_PAR
Document Version
Parameters
IV_DOC_VER
6.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct.
7.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
8.
Save your SXS.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n e r
P a r t n
Task 2: SXS: Inspection Results Recording
Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. For your copied standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR## Inspection Results Recording and the text GR## Call Inspection Results Recording.
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep.
4.
Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct.
5.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
6.
Save the SXS.
O n l y
3.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
Task 3: Recipe: Function Calls 1.
In your practice recipe, under XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps create an XStep with the description Function Calls. Assign your destination GR## PI Sheet 1 of type PI Sheet to the XStep. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
U s e
2.
S A P
S A P
Copy the standard XStep SXS: Inspection Results Recording from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Function Calls to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372.
U s e
1.
401
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign context phase 0320 to the XStep. 2.
Under XStep Function Calls, create an SXS reference with the description Function Calls. Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instructions. Under XStep Function Calls, create an SXS reference with the description SOP 123-01. Assign reference SXS: GR ## Display Document from DMS.
4.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference: Valuation
Value
Document
Fixed Value
SOP 123-01
Document Part
Fixed Value
000
Document Type
Fixed Value
DOC
Document Version
Fixed Value
00
S A P
5.
Description of the Automatically XStep
S A P
Description of Function Call
Symbol
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Description
Under XStep Function Calls, create an SXS reference with the description Inspection Results Recording.
U s e
Check the entire XStep tree and save your recipe.
7.
Your maintenance activities for the function calls cannot be fully tested when the PI sheet is simulated in the recipe. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet according to the following procedure:
e r
6.
P a r t n
Assign reference SXS: GR## Inspection Results Recording.
I n t e r n a l
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
3.
Change your process order with order number TEST-##.
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for production version 0009. On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt, assign batch number BATCH##. Generate an inspection lot for the order. Continued on next page
402
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Carry out a batch determination for all material components of the order. Generate a control recipe for test purposes. Save the order.
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Select and analyze the corresponding test PI sheet. Test the function calls for phase 0320.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
In the control recipe monitor, send the new test control recipe.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
403
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Solution 12: Function Calls in PI Sheets Task 1: SXS: Display of a Document from the Document Management System In the standard XStep repository, in your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Display Document from DMS and the text GR## Display Document from Document Management System. Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
For the XStep tree, enter the description Display Document from DMS.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
1.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Continued on next page
404
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree. Hint: As an alternative to this task, the corresponding SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion). a)
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Plant: 1100 In the context menu of folder GR## SCM372, choose Create → Standard XStep
e r
In the context menu of the standard XStep, choose Properties
P a r t n S A P
Version: 0001
(or double-click the XStep tree).
U s e
Description: SXS: GR ## Display Document from DMS
U s e
(or double-click the standard XStep).
Text: GR ## Display Document from Document Management System In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version).
S A P
Validity period: today until31.12.9999 In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Properties
P a r t n
Description: Display Document from DMS On XStep tree tab page Destination,
Define the following parameters for XStep tree Display Document from DMS: Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_DOC
Document
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_NUMBER
IV_DOC_PAR
Document Part
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_PART
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
2.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
assign destination type Work Instructions/PI Sheet.
405
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372
Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_DOC_TYP
Document Type
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_TYPE
IV_DOC_VER
Document Version
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_VERSION
IV_TITLE
Description of Function Call
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
a)
On XStep tree tab page Parameters,
e r
define the parameters as described in the exercise. Define the following valuations for the parameters: Symbol
IV_DOC
None
IV_DOC_PAR
None
IV_DOC_TYP
None
IV_DOC_VER
None
IV_TITLE
a)
Value
Description of the Automatically XStep
On XStep tree tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Display Document from DMS. a)
In the context menu of the XStep tree,
O n l y
choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Display Document from DMS 5.
For the process instruction, create a function call with the description &IV_TITLE&. Continued on next page
406
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
4.
P a r t n
U s e
Valuation
S A P
S A P
Name
U s e
P a r t n
3.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
The function is to be executed manually. You should be able to execute it in display mode. On the Parameters tab page, assign function module COPF_DOCUMENT_SHOW_DIRECT.
e r
Valuation Mode
Value
Document Type
Parameters
IV_DOC_TYP
Document
Parameters
IV_DOC
Document Part
Parameters
IV_DOC_PAR
Document Version
Parameters
IV_DOC_VER
a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, U s e
P a r t n
Short Text
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Assign valuations to the function module parameters as follows:
choose Create → Control Data → Function Call In the context menu of the function call, choose Properties (or double-click the function call).
S A P
S A P
Display Execution: Allowed Execution: Manually
P a r t n
Description: &IV_TITLE& U s e
On tab page Parameters, Function module: COPF_DOCUMENT_SHOW_DIRECT
Assign valuations to the function module parameters as described in the exercise. Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct. a)
O n l y
6.
For the XStep tree, choose XSteps → Check
7.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. a)
In the context menu of the version, choose Change Status → Release Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
On tab page Parameters,
407
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
8.
Save your SXS. a)
Choose Save.
Task 2: SXS: Inspection Results Recording O n l y
Copy the standard XStep SXS: Inspection Results Recording from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Function Calls to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372.
e r
Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode. Logistics → Production - Process → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository
U s e
P a r t n
a)
I n t e r n a l
1.
Plant: 1100 In folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Function Calls,
S A P
Copy
U s e
Paste For your copied standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR## Inspection Results Recording and the text GR## Call Inspection Results Recording.
e r
I n t e r n a l
2.
P a r t n
In the context menu of folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372, choose
S A P
In the context menu of standard XStep SXS: Inspection Results Recording, choose
O n l y
Continued on next page
408
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. a)
In the context menu of the imported standard XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the standard XStep). Description: SXS: GR## Inspection Results Recording I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Text: GR## Call Inspection Results Recording In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version).
e r
Version: 0001 Validity period: today until 31.12.9999 Analyze the structure of the standard XStep. a) 4.
U s e
P a r t n
3.
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep.
Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct. a)
For the XStep tree, choose S A P
S A P
XSteps → Check 5.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. a)
In the context menu of the version, P a r t n
U s e
choose Change Status → Release 6.
Save the SXS. Choose Save.
e r
I n t e r n a l
a)
Task 3: Recipe: Function Calls In your practice recipe, under XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps create an XStep with the description Function Calls. Assign your destination GR## PI Sheet 1 of type PI Sheet to the XStep.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
409
O n l y
1.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign context phase 0320 to the XStep. a)
Call the recipe for production version 0009 of material T-SCM372-PI-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor. In the context menu of the XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps, choose
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Create → XStep In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep). Description: Function Calls
e r
On XStep tab page Destination,
P a r t n
assign destination GR## PI Sheet 1 by double-clicking it.
U s e
On XStep tab page Context, assign phase 0320 by double-clicking it. Under XStep Function Calls, create an SXS reference with the description Function Calls.
S A P
S A P
2.
Assign reference SXS: GR## Work Instructions. a)
In the context menu of XStep Function Calls,
U s e
P a r t n
choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference).
I n t e r n a l
Description: Function Calls
e r
On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Work Instruction. Under XStep Function Calls, create an SXS reference with the description SOP 123-01.
Continued on next page
410
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
3.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign reference SXS: GR ## Display Document from DMS. a)
In the context menu of XStep Function Calls, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: SOP 123-01 On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR ## Display Document from DMS.
e r
4.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
S A P
Value
Document
Fixed Value
SOP 123-01
Document Part
Fixed Value
000
Document Type
Fixed Value
DOC
Document Version
Fixed Value
00
U s e
Description of the Automatically XStep
P a r t n
a)
S A P
Valuation
Description of Function Call
Symbol
U s e
P a r t n
Description
On tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
Under XStep Function Calls, create an SXS reference with the description Inspection Results Recording.
e r
I n t e r n a l
5.
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the SXS reference).
O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
411
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign reference SXS: GR## Inspection Results Recording. a)
In the context menu of XStep Function Calls, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Inspection Results Recording On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Inspection Results Recording.
e r
6.
Check the entire XStep tree and save your recipe.
P a r t n
a)
XSteps → Check Choose Save.
Your maintenance activities for the function calls cannot be fully tested when the PI sheet is simulated in the recipe. For this reason, now create a test PI sheet according to the following procedure:
S A P
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
U s e
On the header details screen, on tab page Goods Receipt, assign batch number BATCH##.
I n t e r n a l
Carry out a batch determination for all material components of the order.
Generate an inspection lot for the order.
e r
Generate a control recipe for test purposes.
O n l y
Save the order. In the control recipe monitor, send the new test control recipe. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Select and analyze the corresponding test PI sheet. Test the function calls for phase 0320. Continued on next page
412
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for production version 0009.
S A P
Change your process order with order number TEST-##.
U s e
7.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
a)
Change the order by choosing: Logistics → Production - Process → Process Order → Change Process order: TEST-## Enter
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Choose XSteps. In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Delete Choose Save. Process Order → Change
e r
Process Order → Functions → Read Master Data
P a r t n
On header details screen Goods Receipt: Batch: BATCH##
U s e
Process Order → Functions → Inspection Lot → Generate In the material list of the order,
S A P
S A P
select all components and choose Execute Batch Determination. Process Order → Functions → Control Recipe → Generate for Test
U s e
Send the test control recipe by choosing
I n t e r n a l
Plant: 1100
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor
e r
Mode: Test
O n l y
Production Order: TEST-## Choose Display. In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes, select the control recipe and send it. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
Choose Save.
413
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
. Maintain the test PI sheet by choosing Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → PI Sheet → Find Plant: 1100 I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Mode: Test Process order: TEST-## Execute (F8)
e r
In the list of PI sheets, select your PI sheet
U s e
P a r t n
and choose Maintain PI Sheet (F5).
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
414
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Exercise 13: Function Calls in Work Instructions Exercise Objectives O n l y
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Configure the display of a document • Configure inspection results recording
Business Example
Hint: Complete the exercises on this topic if you want to use routings and production orders. Complete the exercises on the previous topic, Function Calls in PI Sheets, if you want to use master recipes and process orders.
S A P
S A P
Task 1: SXS: Display of a Document from the Document Management System In the standard XStep repository, in your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Display Document from DMS and the text GR## Display Document from Document Management System. Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree. Hint: As an alternative to this task, the corresponding SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion). 2.
Define the following parameters for XStep tree Display Document from DMS:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
415
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
For the XStep tree, enter the description Display Document from DMS.
P a r t n
U s e
1.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
You are defining function calls for work instructions.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372
e r P a r t n
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_DOC
Document
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_NUMBER
IV_DOC_PAR
Document Part
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_PART
IV_DOC_TYP
Document Type
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_TYPE
IV_DOC_VER
Document Version
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_VERSION
IV_TITLE
Description of Function Call
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
Define the following valuations for the parameters: Symbol
IV_DOC
None
IV_DOC_PAR
None
IV_DOC_TYP
None
IV_DOC_VER
None
U s e
Value
Description of the Automatically XStep
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Display Document from DMS.
5.
For the process instruction, create a function call with the description &IV_TITLE&.
e r
4.
On the Parameters tab page, assign function module COPF_DOCUMENT_SHOW_DIRECT. Assign valuations to the function module parameters as follows:
Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
The function is to be executed manually. You should be able to execute it in display mode.
416
P a r t n
IV_TITLE
I n t e r n a l
Valuation
S A P
S A P
Name
U s e
3.
Name
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Short Text
Valuation Mode
Value
Document Type
Parameters
IV_DOC_TYP
Document
Parameters
IV_DOC
Document Part
Parameters
IV_DOC_PAR
Document Version
Parameters
IV_DOC_VER
6.
Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct.
7.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
8.
Save your SXS.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n e r
P a r t n
Task 2: SXS: Inspection Results Recording
S A P
S A P
Copy the standard XStep SXS: Inspection Results Recording from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Function Calls to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372. Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode.
2.
For your copied standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR##
U s e
P a r t n
Inspection Results Recording and the text GR## Call Inspection Results Recording.
4.
Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct.
5.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release.
6.
Save the SXS.
O n l y
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. 3.
Task 3: Routing: Function Calls 1.
In your practice routing, under XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps create an XStep with the description Function Calls. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
U s e
1.
417
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign your destination GR## Work Instructions 1 of type Work Instructions to the XStep. Assign context operation 0080 to the XStep. 2.
Under XStep Function Calls, create an SXS reference with the description Function Calls.
O n l y
3.
Under XStep Function Calls, create an SXS reference with the description SOP 123-01. Assign reference SXS: GR ## Display Document from DMS
e r
4.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
S A P
Value
Document
Fixed Value
SOP 123-01
Document Part
Fixed Value
000
Document Type
Fixed Value
DOC
Document Version
Fixed Value
00
U s e
Description of the Automatically XStep
P a r t n
5.
S A P
Valuation
Description of Function Call
Symbol
U s e
P a r t n
Description
Under XStep Function Calls, create an SXS reference with the description Inspection Results Recording.
Check the entire XStep tree and save your XSteps and your routing.
7.
Your maintenance activities for the function calls cannot be fully tested when the work instruction is simulated in the routing. For this reason, now create a test work instructions according to the following procedure: Change your production order with order number TEST-##. In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order. Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for group counter 9. Generate an inspection lot for the order. Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
6.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Assign reference SXS: GR## Inspection Results Recording.
418
I n t e r n a l
Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Generate a control instruction for the test. Save the order. In the control instructions monitor, send the new test control instruction.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Select and analyze the corresponding test work instruction. Test the function calls for operation 0080.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
419
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Solution 13: Function Calls in Work Instructions Task 1: SXS: Display of a Document from the Document Management System O n l y
In the standard XStep repository, in your folder (GR## SCM372) create a standard XStep with the description SXS: GR ## Display Document from DMS and the text GR## Display Document from Document Management System.
e r
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999.
U s e
P a r t n
For the XStep tree, enter the description Display Document from DMS.
I n t e r n a l
1.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Continued on next page
420
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign destination type PI Sheet/Work Instructions to the XStep tree. Hint: As an alternative to this task, the corresponding SXS of group 00 can be copied and analyzed (at the instructor's discretion). a)
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Plant: 1000 In the context menu of folder GR## SCM372, choose Create → Standard XStep
e r
In the context menu of the standard XStep, choose Properties
P a r t n
Version: 0001
U s e
Description: SXS: GR ## Display Document from DMS
S A P
(or double-click the standard XStep).
Text: GR ## Display Document from Document Management System In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version).
S A P
Validity period: today until 31.12.9999 In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Properties
P a r t n
U s e
(or double-click the XStep tree). Description: Display Document from DMS On XStep tree tab page Destination,
Define the following parameters for XStep tree Display Document from DMS: Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_DOC
Document
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_NUMBER
IV_DOC_PAR
Document Part
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_PART
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
2.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
assign destination type Work Instructions/PI Sheet.
421
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
SCM372
Name
Description
Category
Characteristic
IV_DOC_TYP
Document Type
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_TYPE
IV_DOC_VER
Document Version
Input
PPPI_DMS_DOCUMENT_VERSION
IV_TITLE
Description of Function Call
Input
PPPI_FRAGMENT_HTML
a)
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
On XStep tree tab page Parameters,
e r
define the parameters as described in the exercise. Define the following valuations for the parameters: Symbol
IV_DOC
None
IV_DOC_PAR
None
IV_DOC_TYP
None
IV_DOC_VER
None
IV_TITLE
a)
Value
Description of the Automatically XStep
On XStep tree tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
Under the XStep tree, create a process instruction with the description Display Document from DMS. a)
In the context menu of the XStep tree,
O n l y
choose Create → Process Instruction In the context menu of the process instruction, choose Properties (or double-click the process instruction). Description: Display Document from DMS 5.
For the process instruction, create a function call with the description &IV_TITLE&. Continued on next page
422
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
4.
P a r t n
U s e
Valuation
S A P
S A P
Name
U s e
P a r t n
3.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
The function is to be executed manually. You should be able to execute it in display mode. On the Parameters tab page, assign function module COPF_DOCUMENT_SHOW_DIRECT.
e r
Valuation Mode
Value
Document Type
Parameters
IV_DOC_TYP
Document
Parameters
IV_DOC
Document Part
Parameters
IV_DOC_PAR
Document Version
Parameters
IV_DOC_VER
a)
In the context menu of the process instruction, U s e
P a r t n
Short Text
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Assign valuations to the function module parameters as follows:
choose Create → Control Data → Function Call In the context menu of the function call, choose Properties (or double-click the function call).
S A P
S A P
Display Execution: Allowed Execution: Manually
P a r t n
Description: &IV_TITLE& U s e
On tab page Parameters, Function module: COPF_DOCUMENT_SHOW_DIRECT
Assign valuations to the function module parameters as described in the exercise. Check that your XStep tree is structurally correct. a)
O n l y
6.
For the XStep tree, choose XSteps → Check
7.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. a)
In the context menu of the version, choose Change Status → Release Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
On tab page Parameters,
423
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
8.
Save your SXS. a)
Choose Save.
Task 2: SXS: Inspection Results Recording O n l y
Copy the standard XStep SXS: Inspection Results Recording from folder Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Function Calls to your folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372.
e r
Hint: To do this, you must set your folder to change mode.
P a r t n
a)
Logistics → Production → Master Data → Standard XStep Repository
I n t e r n a l
1.
Plant: 1000
Standard XSteps/SCM372/SXS Basic Components/SXS Function Calls,
S A P
Copy
S A P
In the context menu of standard XStep SXS: Inspection Results Recording, choose
U s e
In folder
In the context menu of folder Standard XSteps/GR## SCM372, choose P a r t n
U s e
Paste 2.
For your copied standard XStep, enter the description SXS: GR##
e r
I n t e r n a l
Inspection Results Recording and the text GR## Call Inspection Results Recording.
O n l y
Continued on next page
424
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Maintain the version data: Version: 0001; validity period: today until 31.12.9999. a)
In the context menu of the imported standard XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the standard XStep). Description: SXS: GR## Inspection Results Recording I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Text: GR## Call Inspection Results Recording In the context menu of the version, choose Properties (or double-click the version).
e r
Version: 0001 Validity period: today until 31.12.9999 Analyze the structure of the standard XStep. a) 4.
U s e
P a r t n
3.
Analyze the structure of the standard XStep.
Check that the XStep tree is structurally correct. a)
For the XStep tree, choose S A P
S A P
XSteps → Check 5.
Change the status of the version of the SXS to Release. a)
In the context menu of the version, P a r t n
U s e
choose Change Status → Release 6.
Save the SXS. Choose Save.
e r
I n t e r n a l
a)
Task 3: Routing: Function Calls In your practice routing, under XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps create an XStep with the description Function Calls. Assign your destination GR## Work Instructions 1 of type Work Instructions to the XStep.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
425
O n l y
1.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign context operation 0080 to the XStep. a)
Call the routing for group counter 9 of material T-SCM372-PP-## in change mode and navigate to the XStep editor. In the context menu of XStep tree Functions of the Execution Steps, choose Create → XStep I n t e r n a l
O n l y
In the context menu of the new XStep, choose Properties (or double-click the XStep). Description: Function Calls
e r
On XStep tab page Destination, assign destination GR## Work Instructions 1 by double-clicking it.
U s e
P a r t n
On XStep tab page Context, assign operation 0080 by double-clicking it. 2.
Under XStep Function Calls, create an SXS reference with the description Function Calls.
S A P
a)
S A P
Assign reference SXS: GR## Instruction Text. In the context menu of XStep Function Calls, choose Create → SXS Reference
U s e
P a r t n
In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties (or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Function Calls
e r
assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Instruction Text. 3.
Under XStep Function Calls, create an SXS reference with the description SOP 123-01.
Continued on next page
426
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
On tab page Reference,
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Assign reference SXS: GR ## Display Document from DMS a)
In the context menu of XStep Function Calls, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
O n l y
Description: SOP 123-01 On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR ## Display Document from DMS.
e r
4.
Define the following valuations for the input parameters of the SXS reference:
S A P
Value
Document
Fixed Value
SOP 123-01
Document Part
Fixed Value
000
Document Type
Fixed Value
DOC
Document Version
Fixed Value
00
U s e
Description of the Automatically XStep
P a r t n
a)
S A P
Valuation
Description of Function Call
Symbol
U s e
P a r t n
Description
On tab page Valuation, define the valuations as described in the exercise.
Under XStep Function Calls, create an SXS reference with the description Inspection Results Recording.
e r
I n t e r n a l
5.
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the SXS reference).
O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
427
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Assign reference SXS: GR## Inspection Results Recording. a)
In the context menu of XStep Function Calls, choose Create → SXS Reference In the context menu of the new SXS reference, choose Properties
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
(or double-click the SXS reference). Description: Inspection Results Recording On tab page Reference, assign standard XStep SXS: GR## Inspection Results Recording.
e r
6.
Check the entire XStep tree and save your XSteps and your routing.
P a r t n
a)
XSteps → Check Choose Save.
Your maintenance activities for the function calls cannot be fully tested when the work instruction is simulated in the routing. For this reason, now create a test work instructions according to the following procedure:
S A P
In the XStep editor, delete the XStep tree from the order and then save the order.
U s e
Generate an inspection lot for the order. Generate a control instruction for the test.
e r
In the control instructions monitor, send the new test control instruction. Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job. Select and analyze the corresponding test work instruction. Test the function calls for operation 0080. a)
Change the order by choosing: Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Order → Change Order: TEST-## Continued on next page
428
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Save the order.
P a r t n
Open the order again in change mode and read the master data for group counter 9.
S A P
Change your production order with order number TEST-##.
U s e
7.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Enter Choose XSteps In the context menu of the XStep tree, choose Delete Choose Save. O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Choose Order → Change Choose Functions → Read PP Master Data. Choose Functions → Inspection Lot → Create. Choose the XSteps icon.
e r
XSteps → Control Instructions/Recipe → Generate for Test
P a r t n
Choose Save. Send the test control instruction by choosing:
U s e
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Control Instructions → Monitor Control Instructions/Recipes Plant: 1000
S A P
S A P
Mode: Test Production order: TEST-## Choose Display.
P a r t n
U s e
In the monitor for control instructions/control recipes, select the control instruction and send it.
e r
Maintain the test work instruction by choosing Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Work Instructions → Find Plant: 1000 Mode: Test Production order: TEST-## Execute (F8) In the list of work instruction, Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
429
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Hint: Choose Send and not Start Send Job.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
select the work instructions, choose Change Work Instructions (F5).
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
430
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for PI Sheets/Work Instructions
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create XSteps for PI sheets/work instructions
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
431
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
Lesson: XSteps for Process Control Systems
O n l y
Business Example
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •
Create XSteps for process control systems
P a r t n
In XSteps (execution steps), you therefore specify the data structures for defining the structure of control recipes/control instructions and PI sheets/work instructions along with the connected process message requests.
S A P
You then familiarize yourself with the structure, elements, and properties of XSteps and the use of standard XSteps from the standard XStep repository.
P a r t n
Finally, you familiarize yourself with XStep maintenance for PI sheets/work instructions and external systems.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
First, you familiarize yourself with the elements and functions of PI sheets/work instructions.
U s e
At your company, you want to use the process management and process integration functions to process your process and production orders.
I n t e r n a l
Lesson Objectives
e r
Lesson Overview
O n l y
432
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for Process Control Systems
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l S A P
S A P
Figure 105: XSteps: Generating Control Recipes/Control Instructions
Depending on the destination type, the control recipes/control instructions are displayed internally in the ECC system as PI sheets/work instructions or are transferred to an external system through the PI-PCS interface.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
You can also set the Creation with XSteps indicator in the detailed data of the control recipe destination/control instruction destination.
P a r t n
If you are using XSteps, use destination type Type 2 Download to ext. system, initiated by SAP process management for the transfer via the PI-PCS interface.
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
433
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 106: XStep Process Instructions for External Systems
S A P
(*) Whether you have to maintain process instructions for the XStep depends on the Customizing settings for the destination:
U s e
If the “Creation with XSteps” indicator is set for the destination, do not maintain process instructions.
434
If the “Creation with XSteps” indicator is not set, you maintain the information for the external system in the characteristic overview of process instructions. In some circumstances, the external system also requires you to specify a process instruction type and a process instruction category.
O n l y
•
e r
I n t e r n a l
In this case, the control recipes/control instructions are constructed using the XStep parameters.
P a r t n
•
S A P
You create XStep process instructions for external systems for destination type External System.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for Process Control Systems
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
In all releases there is an older, alternative method of maintaining process instructions for process orders whereby the process instructions and control recipe destinations are assigned to the phases of the master recipe/process order.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
Destination types Type 2 Download to ext. system, initiated by SAP process management and Type 3 Download to external system, initiated by ext. system are available for transferring control recipes via the PI-PCS interface.
S A P
Figure 107: Process Instruction Maintenance by Phase: Creating Control Recipes
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
435
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 108: Process Instruction Types for Process Control Systems
S A P
In control recipes/control instructions for process control systems that are transferred using the PI-PCS interface, you can use the following types of process instruction:
U s e
P a r t n
• • •
Process parameters Process data requests Process message subscriptions
e r
In a process data request, you specify that process control is to send a process message with actual process data. Enter the following information in the request: The message category of the message to be sent The information to be conveyed in the message
In a process message subscription, you specify that process control is to send a process message every time a specific event, such as a goods receipt, takes place. You specify: • •
436
The message category of the message to be sent The information to be conveyed in the message
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
You can use process parameters to transfer information to process control.
• •
S A P
The process instructions for process control systems are divided into different types depending on their function or the kind of information they convey.
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for Process Control Systems
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
The figure shows an example of how data can be transferred between the ECC system and process control in a simple process.
U s e I n t e r n a l
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
437
O n l y
The control recipe/control instruction does not specify which process messages are to be transferred from process control to the ECC system. Instead, the messages to be created and sent are defined when you execute a control algorithm on the control side.
e r
In the control recipe/control instruction, the ECC system transfers information about which control algorithms are to be executed as well as the parameter values to be used. The resources/work centers and materials to be used are always the same and therefore do not need to be specified further.
P a r t n
Since the process flow in the sample scenario only allows for a small number of variants, it can be represented on the control side using relatively fixed algorithms which can be set up using only a small number of parameters.
S A P
Figure 109: Simple Scenario - Example
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
The figure shows an example of how data can be transferred between the ECC system and process control in a complex process.
U s e
In addition to the process parameters, the control recipe/control instruction contains process message subscriptions and process data requests that specify which messages are to be sent with which characteristics when you execute the control recipe/control instruction. The process control system creates the requested messages and transfers them to the ECC system to be sent.
438
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
In the control recipe/control instruction, the ECC system transfers information about which phases/operations (control sequences) are to be executed and which resources/work centers and materials are to be used. If required, it also transfers other phase/operation-related parameters.
P a r t n
The process control system used in this example not only contains a number of control sequences but also resource/work center data and material data. You can configure the control sequences flexibly, thus enabling the production of a large number of variants.
S A P
Figure 110: Complex Scenario - Example
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for Process Control Systems
S A P
S A P
In XSteps for process control systems, you must assign characteristics to define the process instructions.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 111: XSteps for Process Control Systems: Characteristic Structure of Process Instructions
By assigning characteristics and characteristic values, you specify:
U s e
The characteristics together with their formats and value ranges are predefined in Customizing. Depending on the format, the characteristic value can be a date, time, numeric or alphanumeric key, short text, long text, or message characteristic key. Characteristics can be valuated automatically via an XStep parameter with symbol valuation when the control recipe/control instruction is created if they have not already been valuated manually in the master recipe/routing or process order/production order. Whether you have to assign a process instruction category to the process instruction depends on whether the process control system requires this information.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
439
O n l y
You can use the same characteristic more than once in a process instruction. In process data requests and process message subscriptions, you must ensure that you use the characteristics in the correct sequence.
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
Which information is to be transferred or requested in a process instruction, for example, the order number, control information, or the status of a control recipe How the requested data is to be processed (for example, a specific value is to be confirmed by process control) and which message category is to be used for this purpose
P a r t n
•
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
When you use XSteps (unlike the older process instruction maintenance by phase for process orders), the system does not carry out a check for the process instruction category entered against a corresponding process instruction category created in Customizing.
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 112: Characteristics for Process Instructions
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
To be able to assign characteristics to process instructions, you must first release the characteristics groups for use in process instructions.
P a r t n
You create characteristics in Customizing and consolidate them into groups.
O n l y
440
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for Process Control Systems
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 113: Process Parameters for Process Control Systems - Example
S A P
S A P
You can use a process instruction of type process parameter to send to a process control system information about materials and material quantities that are contained in the material list of the process order. The figure shows an example of this type of process parameter.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
The values of the process instruction characteristics used in the process parameter can be copied automatically from the material list via XStep parameters with symbol valuation.
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
441
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 3: XSteps
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 114: Data Request for Process Control Systems - Example
S A P U s e
•
•
–
442
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
–
Message characteristics of the requested message category deliver information that can already be delivered in the process instruction and can be copied directly to the process message (such as order number, data point, and unit of measurement). The message characteristics that are to be valuated by the process control system and included in the process message are assigned to characteristic PPPI_REQUESTED_VALUE.
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
In first position is always characteristic PPPI_DATA_REQUEST_TYPE, which delivers the information that a message is expected (Simple Data Request). In second place is always characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_CATEGORY, which delivers the message category that is to be used to confirm the values. After this, in any order:
P a r t n
The figure shows an example of a process data request in which a message about the material density is requested. The process data request contains the following information:
S A P
You can use a process instruction of type process data request to specify, for example, that the process control system is to confirm a certain measured value.
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for Process Control Systems
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 115: Process Data Request - Process Message
S A P
•
e r
U s e
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
•
P a r t n
•
The message category used for the message is DPREAD, as specified in the data request. The data already contained in the data request, such as the order number, data point and unit of measurement, has been copied to the process message. The remaining characteristics selected as required actual data (REQUESTED_VALUES) in the data request have been valuated by the process control system and copied to the process message.
S A P
The figure shows how the process data request in the previous figure is related to a message created for it:
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
443
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n
You can use a process instruction of type process message subscription to specify, for example, that the process control system is to send a message whenever a material is consumed.
U s e
S A P
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 116: Process Message Subscription for Process Control System Example
U s e
•
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
444
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
For characteristic PPPI_MESSAGE_CATEGORY, the message category that is to be used for confirming the data The order number, which is already contained in the process instruction and can be copied directly to the process message For characteristic PPPI_DATA_REQUESTED_VALUE, the list of message characteristics that are to be valuated by the process control system and included in the process message
P a r t n
•
S A P
The figure shows an example of this type of process message subscription. The process message subscription contains the following information:
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: XSteps for Process Control Systems
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 117: Process Message Subscription - Process Message
S A P
•
e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
•
The message is of category PI_CONS, which was specified in the process message subscription. The process control system uses this message category to recognize which event is to be reported. The order number contained in the process message subscription has been copied to the process message. The remaining characteristics selected as required actual data (REQUESTED_VALUES) have been valuated by the process control system and included in the process message.
P a r t n
U s e
•
S A P
The figure shows how the process message subscription of the previous figure is related to a process message created for it:
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
445
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 3: XSteps
O n l y
SCM372
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create XSteps for process control systems
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
446
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Unit Summary
Unit Summary
O n l y e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
You should now be able to: • Explain the structure, elements, and properties of XSteps • Describe how to use standard XSteps from the standard XStep repository • Maintain standard XSteps in the cross-plant standard-XStep-repository and in multiple languages • Create XSteps for PI sheets/work instructions • Create XSteps for process control systems
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
447
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit Summary
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
448
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
e r P a r t n S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
S A P P a r t n
U s e
S A P
U s e e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r P a r t n S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
S A P P a r t n
U s e
S A P
U s e e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit Summary
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
449
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit Summary
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
450
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 4 O n l y e r
Unit Overview P a r t n
•
PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
U s e
Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to:
S A P
Describe the elements and functions of PI sheets/work instructions Take usage of PI sheet enhancements
S A P
• •
Unit Contents
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
Lesson: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions .............. 452 Lesson: PI Sheet Enhancements................................................. 468 Exercise 14: PI Sheet Enhancements (optional) ........................... 471
U s e
I n t e r n a l
Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
451
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
SCM372
Lesson: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions Lesson Overview O n l y
I n t e r n a l
You familiarize yourself with the elements and functions of PI sheets/work instructions.
Lesson Objectives
e r
Describe the elements and functions of PI sheets/work instructions
Business Example At your company, you want to use the process management and process integration functions to maintain your process and production orders.
S A P
First, you familiarize yourself with the elements and functions of PI sheets/work instructions.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
Finally, you familiarize yourself with XStep maintenance for PI sheets/work instructions and external systems.
P a r t n
You then familiarize yourself with the structure, elements, and properties of XSteps and the use of standard XSteps from the standard XStep repository.
S A P
In XSteps (execution steps), you therefore specify the data structures for defining the structure of control recipes/control instructions and PI sheets/work instructions along with the related process message requests.
U s e
•
P a r t n
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
O n l y
452
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
P a r t n S A P
The browser-based PI sheet comprises a header and the individual phases of the process order or the individual operations of the production order. The header and all the phases/operations are opened immediately after the PI sheet/work instruction is opened and they can be expanded and collapsed.
U s e
This lesson explains how the browser-based PI sheet/work instruction is structured for process/production orders in the SAP standard layout and how its interface elements are presented.
U s e
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 118: PI Sheet/Work Instruction – Structure
453
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
2010
P a r t n
All the functions can be accessed via the context menu. There is also a menu bar in the header of the PI sheet/work instruction that provides the functions relating to the entire PI sheet/work instruction. To display the context menu, position the cursor on the relevant object or field and click the secondary mouse button. You can also call up the context menu with the shift + F10 key combination.
S A P
Each phase/operation can, in turn, be divided into a number of sections.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
The phases/operations can contain the following elements: •
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
• •
Control information, notes, and input fields for long texts that are output on the left side Input and output fields, calculations, and pushbuttons that appear on the right side Tables the are spread across the entire width of the PI sheet.
S A P
S A P
Figure 119: PI Sheet/Work Instruction – Elements (I)
O n l y
454
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 120: PI Sheet/Work Instruction – Elements (II)
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 121: PI Sheet/Work Instruction – Elements (III)
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
455
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
SCM372
P a r t n
A range of functions for processing browser-based PI sheets/work instructions are available to process/machine operators, which they can use to the process the entire PI sheet/work instruction or individual process steps.
U s e
S A P
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 122: PI Sheet/Work Instruction – Functions (I)
U s e
From the menu bar in the header of the PI sheet/work instruction From the context menu
I n t e r n a l
456
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Which functions are available in the context menu also depends on whether you are displaying or changing a PI sheet or work instructions.
e r
Functions that refer to individual process steps only appear in the context menu of the respective process step if these are actually relevant for the process step. For example, the Display message function only appears for process steps for which a process message was also defined.
P a r t n
• •
S A P
Functions that can be executed for the entire PI sheet can be triggered as follows:
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 123: PI Sheet/Work Instruction – Functions (II)
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 124: PI Sheet/Work Instruction – Functions (III)
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
457
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 125: PI Sheet/Work Instruction – Functions (IV)
S A P U s e
The following prerequisites must be met for batch determination and batch check: The selection criteria for determining a batch for the order are defined. A message request is defined for the PI sheet/work instructions, which contains the following message characteristics: –
–
458
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
– – –
PPPI_RESERVATION (reservation) and PPPI_RESERVATION_ITEM (res.item) PPPI_BATCH (batch) as the input value PPPI_MATERIAL (material number) PPPI_MATERIAL_CONSUMED (material quantity consumed) as the input value PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE (unit of measure, this must be identical to the base unit of measure or to an alternative unit of measure defined for the material).
e r
I n t e r n a l
• •
P a r t n
In general, the batch determination and batch check process in the PI sheet/work instructions are the same as in the order.
S A P
The batch determination and batch check functions are also available when you enter material consumption in the PI sheet/work instructions.
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 126: PI Sheet/Work Instruction – Functions (V)
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 127: PI Sheet/Work Instruction – Functions (VI)
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
459
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 128: Creating Messages
S A P
Fields in which the process operator can enter the required actual data or characteristic values for process messages can be displayed in the PI sheet/work instructions.
U s e
The message contains the following data: • • • •
The relevant input values (data request) The calculated value (calculation) The message characteristics for which values have already been defined in the process instruction The message characteristics that have been assigned values automatically in the PI sheet/work instructions (date and time)
There are different ways to transfer the message (for sending) to the message monitor in process management/process integration.
460
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Once the value has been calculated, the system creates the requested process message.
e r
Pushbutton icons for calculating data can be displayed in the PI sheet/work instructions. The process operator can use these to calculate the required actual data or characteristic values for a process message.
P a r t n
As soon as the actual data has been entered, the system creates the requested process message.
S A P
A manufacturing event can be triggered in the PI sheet/work instructions, after which a message is created in the Automatic Process Message Creation (CO69) function.
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 129: Transferring Messages to the Message Monitor
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 130: Signature Process for Process Steps
From SAP R/3 Enterprise SCM Extension 1.10 (EA_APPL 110), you can define a signature strategy for each process step, to be performed asynchronously. The last asynchronous signature in the PI sheet triggers the function Complete PI sheet/work
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
461
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
O n l y
SCM372
instruction. With an asynchronous signature, you have the option of only confirming actual data after one or more other people have confirmed the entries with their signature.
O n l y e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
Example:The process operator enters values during production and validates these entries with his/her signature. However, the system does not create any process messages yet, since the entries must be checked and signed by the shift manager at a later date. In the meantime, the process operator can process another step of the PI sheet/work instructions. Only the input field that is waiting to be signed is blocked for further entries until the shift manager has signed it. If the values entered by the process operator are not permitted, the shift manager can terminate the signature process. After this, the input fields on the PI sheet/work instructions will be ready for input again. New values can be entered. Only after all the required signatures in the signature strategy have been entered are the process messages relating to the process step created.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 131: Maintaining Process Steps
462
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 132: XSteps: Completing PI Sheets/Work Instructions
S A P
•
All process steps are completed (or deactivated)
U s e
All input values are entered (or deactivated) All calculations were carried out (or deactivated) All messages for the PI sheet/work instructions were transferred to the message monitor.
I n t e r n a l
•
2010
The control recipe is assigned “Processed” status.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
463
O n l y
When you set the PI sheet/work instructions to Complete, the system automatically creates a message for the control recipe status (PI_CRST message category). This message triggers the following changes:
e r
An asynchronous signature at the end of the PI sheet/work instructions automatically completes the PI sheet/work instructions.
P a r t n
– – –
S A P
When you have finished maintaining a PI sheet/work instruction, you can set it to Complete. Prerequisites:
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
O n l y
SCM372
The following functions can only be carried out if a PI sheet/work instruction has been completed, discarded, or terminated. •
Hint: For PI sheets/work instructions, do not define any XSteps to request a message for the control recipe status because this conflicts with the complete, discard, or terminate PI sheet functions.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
(*) An order has status XSez only if at least one control recipe/control instruction of the order has the status Created or Sent.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
Archive PI sheets with the help of process data documentation (for process orders only) Delete PI sheets/work instructions
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Figure 133: Process Instruction Maintenance by Phase: Completing PI Sheets O n l y
When you have finished maintaining the PI sheet, you can set it to Complete. Prerequisites: •
All process steps are completed (or deactivated) – – –
464
All input values are entered (or deactivated) All calculations were carried out (or deactivated) All messages for the PI sheet were transferred to the message monitor.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
A synchronous signature at the end of the PI sheet automatically completes the PI sheet. When you set the PI sheet to Complete, the system automatically creates a message for the control recipe status (PI_CRST message category). This message triggers the following changes: O n l y
The control recipe is assigned “Processed” status. The status of the corresponding phases in the order changes to “Control recipe finished”.
The following functions can only be carried out if a PI sheet has been completed, discarded, or terminated. Archive PI sheets with the help of process data documentation Delete PI sheets Hint: Do not define process instructions for PI sheets to request a message for the control recipe status because this conflicts with the complete, discard, or terminate PI sheet functions.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
• •
I n t e r n a l
• •
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 134: Changing Users in the PI Sheet/Work Instruction
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
465
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
O n l y
SCM372
O n l y
U s e
P a r t n
e r
An advantage: When you change between the service user and a specific user, you do not have to log off the SAP ECC system.
I n t e r n a l
As of SAP R/3 Enterprise SCM Extension 1.10 (EA_APPL 110), you can change between an anonymous service user and a specific user when processing PI sheets/work instructions or the cockpit. A service user is a user that is available to an anonymous, larger group of users. The service user only has display rights for the PI sheet/work instructions or cockpit. In the header of the PI sheet/work instructions or cockpit, you will always see the name of the user currently logged on to the system. To change from the service user to a specific user, you choose Log on. To change back to the service user again, you choose Log off.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
466
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the elements and functions of PI sheets/work instructions
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
467
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
O n l y
SCM372
Lesson: PI Sheet Enhancements Lesson Overview O n l y
I n t e r n a l
This lesson describes PI sheet enhancements available with Business Function LOG_PP_PMA_PMC.
Lesson Objectives
e r P a r t n
Business Example
Business Function LOG_PP_PMA_PMC
Take usage of PI sheet enhancements
At your production plants, you want to use new PI sheet enhancements to increase the user-friendliness of the PI sheet with the goal to enable the workers to complete their day-to-day tasks quicker and to respond faster in critical situations.
U s e
•
S A P
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 135: Business Function LOG_PP_PMA_PMC
468
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet Enhancements
Enhancement Standard Layout for PI Sheet
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 136: Enhancement Standard Layout for PI Sheet
S A P
S A P
Mandatory Characteristics in Process Instructions
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 137: Mandatory Characteristics in Process Instructions
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
469
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
O n l y
SCM372
Printing of PI Sheets in pdf Format
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P
Figure 138: Printing of PI Sheets in pdf Format
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
470
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet Enhancements
Exercise 14: PI Sheet Enhancements (optional) Exercise Objectives O n l y
Business Example
e r
You generate and maintain a PI sheet to see and test various PI sheet enhancements.
You have to activate some enhancement objects in Customizing before you can use the enhancements for the browser based PI sheet. Choose the following Customizing activity: (SPRO: SAP Reference IMG: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Management → Control Recipes / PI Sheets → Activate Enhancements for PI Sheet) Activate Enhancements for PI Sheet 2.
The following enhancement objects have been activated: P a r t n
U s e
Parameter-Controlled Call Function Mod. Mand.-Entry Field w/o Process Messages Enhancements of XML for PDF Print New XLS Stylesheet with Enhancements
I n t e r n a l
Choose transaction C223 (SAP menu: Logistics → Production-Process → Master Data → Production Versions) to enter the Mass Processing for Production Versions. Select the production versions for
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
471
O n l y
You have maintained a standard XStep (SXS) for test purposes. You assign this SXS to a master recipe.
e r
Task 2:
1.
S A P
S A P
1.
U s e
P a r t n
Task 1:
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Take advantage of the new PI sheet enhancements.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
SCM372
Plant:
1100
Material:
T-SCM372-PI-##
O n l y
2.
Choose the XStep icon to access the XStep editor of the recipe. Choose button XStep Tree to create a new additional XStep tree.
e r
Create a SXS Reference for the additional tree. Choose the context menu for the tree and then Create → SXS Reference.
P a r t n
Double click the new SXS reference and go to the Reference tab. Assign the standard XStep PI Sheet Enhancements.
U s e
Save your recipe.
Task 3:
S A P U s e
Production Plant:
1100
Process Order type:
PI01
Quantities / Total Qty:
100 PC
Dates / End:
Scheduling / Type:
Backwards
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
T-SCM372-PI-##
e r
Material Number:
Release your process order (icon Release). Generate the control recipe (icon Generate Control Recipe). Save your process order. Continued on next page
472
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
Choose transaction COR1 (SAP menu: Logistics → Production-Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material) to create the following process order:
S A P
You maintain a PI sheet which is based on your test SXS. You get familiar with the features of the enhanced style sheet, you test a mandatory input field, and you print the PI sheet in PDF format. 1.
I n t e r n a l
Select production version 0009 and edit the master recipe (button → Recipe) for the today’s date (icon Continue with Today’s Date in pop up Parameters for Recipe Maintenance).
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet Enhancements
Order number: ____________________ 2.
Send the control recipe for control recipe destination DU in the control recipe monitor.
O n l y e r
Select the control recipes for your process order: Plant:
1100
Manufacturing order:
To check whether the control recipe has been sent, choose Update if necessary. The control recipe should have Sent status. 3.
Find and access your PI sheet.
S A P U s e
1100
Manufacturing order:
e r
I n t e r n a l
Plant:
P a r t n
Select your PI sheet:
Access your PI sheet in change mode.
O n l y
The phase is initially collapsed in the new style sheet. The icon Signature(s) Initial is displayed for the phase.
5.
Expand the phase. Try to sign the process step pH Value in the field Signature with strategy. Use your SAP user ID. You get the error message This step cannot be completed.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
S A P
Choose transaction CO60 (SAP Menu: Logistics →Production-Process → Process Management → PI sheet → Find) to find the PI sheet for your process order.
4.
U s e
P a r t n
In the monitor, select your control recipe for control recipe destination DU and choose Send.
I n t e r n a l
Choose transaction CO53XT (SAP Menu: Logistics → Production-Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor) to enter the control recipe monitor.
473
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
SCM372
Display the properties for the input field pH value. Choose the context menu for the field and then Display Properties. As you see, the input field is defined with reference to a characteristic PH_VALUE_MANDATORY. In the basic data of this characteristic, the indicator Entry required is set (see transaction O27C). For that reason you cannot sign off the process step or complete the PI sheet before you entered a value. O n l y
Enter the value 3 for the pH value. You get the information that the value doesn’t comply with the validation rule. Adopt the value. You have to confirm this activity with your digital signature. Sign with your SAP user ID and your SAP password.
e r
The icon Deviation is displayed for the table field.
7.
Create a comment for the pH value. Choose the context menu and then Create Comment.
U s e
P a r t n
Refresh the PI sheet (menu Edit → Refresh Browser). The icon Deviation is also displayed for the phase.
I n t e r n a l
6.
The icon Comment is displayed for the table field.
S A P
8.
Again, sign the process step pH Value in the field Signature with strategy with your SAP user ID and your SAP password.
U s e I n t e r n a l
You get the information: Signature process was successfully completed by user KING_P. Refresh the PI sheet. The icons Locked and Signature Process Not Yet Completed have disappeared. 9.
At last, print your test PI sheet in PDF format. Continued on next page
474
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Now sign with user KING_P and password PROCESS for authorization group PIP. You can choose the authorization group in the signature pop-up (field AGRP Dig.Sign.).
e r
You have to complete the signature process to unlock the process step. Several users with special authorizations have to sign with reference to a signature strategy. This strategy is defined in Customizing and assigned to the signature in the underlying XStep.
P a r t n
Refresh the PI sheet. The icons Signatures already Executed, Locked, and Signature Process Not Yet Completed are displayed for the phase.
S A P
Refresh the PI sheet. The icon Comment is also displayed for the phase.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet Enhancements
Choose button Print(PDF). In the print pop-up, choose output device P542 and then Print preview.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
475
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
SCM372
Solution 14: PI Sheet Enhancements (optional) Task 1: O n l y e r
1.
Choose the following Customizing activity: (SPRO: SAP Reference IMG: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Management → Control Recipes / PI Sheets → Activate Enhancements for PI Sheet) Activate Enhancements for PI Sheet
2.
---
The following enhancement objects have been activated:
U s e
P a r t n
a)
S A P
S A P
Parameter-Controlled Call Function Mod. Mand.-Entry Field w/o Process Messages Enhancements of XML for PDF Print New XLS Stylesheet with Enhancements a)
---
U s e
You have maintained a standard XStep (SXS) for test purposes. You assign this SXS to a master recipe.
I n t e r n a l
Select the production versions for 1100
Material:
T-SCM372-PI-##
O n l y
Plant:
Select production version 0009 and edit the master recipe (button → Recipe) for the today’s date (icon Continue with Today’s Date in pop up Parameters for Recipe Maintenance). a)
--Continued on next page
476
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
Choose transaction C223 (SAP menu: Logistics → Production-Process → Master Data → Production Versions) to enter the Mass Processing for Production Versions.
P a r t n
Task 2:
1.
I n t e r n a l
You have to activate some enhancement objects in Customizing before you can use the enhancements for the browser based PI sheet.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet Enhancements
2.
Choose the XStep icon to access the XStep editor of the recipe. Choose button XStep Tree to create a new additional XStep tree. Create a SXS Reference for the additional tree. Choose the context menu for the tree and then Create → SXS Reference.
O n l y
Save your recipe. a)
---
e r
Task 3:
P a r t n U s e
T-SCM372-PI-##
Production Plant:
1100
Process Order type:
PI01
Quantities / Total Qty:
100 PC
Dates / End:
Scheduling / Type:
Backwards
e r
Material Number:
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
Choose transaction COR1 (SAP menu: Logistics → Production-Process → Process Order → Process Order → Create → With Material) to create the following process order:
S A P
S A P
1.
U s e
You maintain a PI sheet which is based on your test SXS. You get familiar with the features of the enhanced style sheet, you test a mandatory input field, and you print the PI sheet in PDF format.
I n t e r n a l
Double click the new SXS reference and go to the Reference tab. Assign the standard XStep PI Sheet Enhancements.
Release your process order (icon Release). O n l y
Generate the control recipe (icon Generate Control Recipe). Save your process order. Order number: ____________________ a) 2.
---
Send the control recipe for control recipe destination DU in the control recipe monitor. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
477
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
O n l y
SCM372
Choose transaction CO53XT (SAP Menu: Logistics → Production-Process → Process Management → Control Recipe → Control Recipe Monitor) to enter the control recipe monitor.
Plant:
1100
Manufacturing order:
In the monitor, select your control recipe for control recipe destination DU and choose Send.
e r
To check whether the control recipe has been sent, choose Update if necessary.
a) 3.
---
Find and access your PI sheet.
Plant:
1100
Manufacturing order:
P a r t n
S A P U s e
Select your PI sheet:
4.
---
e r
I n t e r n a l
Access your PI sheet in change mode. a)
The phase is initially collapsed in the new style sheet.
5.
O n l y
The icon Signature(s) Initial is displayed for the phase. a)
---
Expand the phase. Try to sign the process step pH Value in the field Signature with strategy. Use your SAP user ID. You get the error message This step cannot be completed. Continued on next page
478
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
S A P
Choose transaction CO60 (SAP Menu: Logistics →Production-Process → Process Management → PI sheet → Find) to find the PI sheet for your process order.
U s e
P a r t n
The control recipe should have Sent status.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Select the control recipes for your process order:
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet Enhancements
Display the properties for the input field pH value. Choose the context menu for the field and then Display Properties. As you see, the input field is defined with reference to a characteristic PH_VALUE_MANDATORY. In the basic data of this characteristic, the indicator Entry required is set (see transaction O27C). For that reason you cannot sign off the process step or complete the PI sheet before you entered a value. O n l y
6.
---
Enter the value 3 for the pH value. You get the information that the value doesn’t comply with the validation rule.
e r
Adopt the value. You have to confirm this activity with your digital signature. Sign with your SAP user ID and your SAP password.
Refresh the PI sheet (menu Edit → Refresh Browser). The icon Deviation is also displayed for the phase. a)
S A P
Create a comment for the pH value. Choose the context menu and then Create Comment. The icon Comment is displayed for the table field.
S A P
7.
---
U s e
P a r t n
The icon Deviation is displayed for the table field.
I n t e r n a l
a)
Refresh the PI sheet. The icon Comment is also displayed for the phase.
U s e
8.
---
Again, sign the process step pH Value in the field Signature with strategy with your SAP user ID and your SAP password.
You have to complete the signature process to unlock the process step. Several users with special authorizations have to sign with reference to a signature strategy. This strategy is defined in Customizing and assigned to the signature in the underlying XStep. Now sign with user KING_P and password PROCESS for authorization group PIP. You can choose the authorization group in the signature pop-up (field AGRP Dig.Sign.). You get the information: Signature process was successfully completed by user KING_P. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
479
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
Refresh the PI sheet. The icons Signatures already Executed, Locked, and Signature Process Not Yet Completed are displayed for the phase.
P a r t n
a)
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 4: Appendix 1: PI Sheet/Work Instructions – Elements and Functions
SCM372
Refresh the PI sheet. The icons Locked and Signature Process Not Yet Completed have disappeared. a) 9.
---
At last, print your test PI sheet in PDF format. Choose button Print(PDF). I n t e r n a l
O n l y
In the print pop-up, choose output device P542 and then Print preview. ---
U s e
P a r t n
e r
a)
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
480
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: PI Sheet Enhancements
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Take usage of PI sheet enhancements
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
481
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit Summary
SCM372
Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the elements and functions of PI sheets/work instructions • Take usage of PI sheet enhancements
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
482
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
e r P a r t n S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
S A P P a r t n
U s e
S A P
U s e e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r P a r t n S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
S A P P a r t n
U s e
S A P
U s e e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit Summary
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
483
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit Summary
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
484
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5 O n l y e r
Process Messages – Structure and Settings Process Messages – Processing Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
Unit Objectives
U s e
• • •
P a r t n
Unit Overview
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
S A P U s e I n t e r n a l
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
485
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings ......................... 486 Exercise 15: Process Messages – Structure and Settings (PI) (Optional) ........................................................................ 503 Exercise 16: Process Messages – Structure and Settings (PP) (optional)......................................................................... 517 Lesson: Process Messages – Processing....................................... 531 Exercise 17: Process Messages - Processing (PI) (Optional)............ 541 Exercise 18: Process Messages - Processing (PP) (Optional)........... 545 Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System .................... 549
e r
Unit Contents
P a r t n
• • •
Describe the structure of process messages Create process message categories in Customizing Define different message destination types in Customizing and assign them to process message categories Describe the processing steps of a process message Create, send, monitor, and delete process messages Explain the predefined message categories in the standard SAP system
S A P
• • •
I n t e r n a l
Appendix 2: Process Messages
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings Lesson Overview You receive information about the structure and settings of process messages
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the structure of process messages Create process message categories in Customizing Define different message destination types in Customizing and assign them to process message categories
Business Example At your company, you want to use the process management and process integration functions to maintain your process and production orders.
S A P
To begin with, you familiarize yourself with how process messages are structured and processed.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
You then take a closer look at the message categories shipped in the standard SAP system.
S A P
When doing so, you have to report the actual data for your production processes in process messages.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
• • •
O n l y
486
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 139: Content of a Process Message – Example
S A P
Users can define their own process messages to meet their specific needs. Process messages for ECC components are predefined by SAP.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
The graphic shows an example of the content of a process message that reports the value of a temperature reading.
S A P
Process messages are data structures used to report actual process data from process control to one or more destinations.
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
487
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 140: Structure of a Process Message in ECC – Example
S A P U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
The characteristics together with their formats and value ranges are predefined in Customizing. Depending on the format, the value of a message characteristic may be a date, a time, numeric or alphanumeric key, short text, or a long text.
S A P
You define the content of a process message in ECC by assigning characteristics and characteristic values to it. Each characteristic may be used only once in a process message.
O n l y
488
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 141: Process Message Category – Process Message
S A P U s e
The diagram shows a message reporting the value of a temperature reading to illustrate the relationship between process message categories and process messages.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Process management/process integration checks every incoming process message against the predefined message category.
P a r t n
When you create a process message (for example, when reporting data in a PI sheet), you must use an existing process message category. This ensures that the characteristics are copied from the message category into the message. Process-specific characteristic values are added in the message.
S A P
Process messages are predefined in Customizing using process message categories. The message category specifies the characteristics a process message can or must contain, that is, the information it conveys.
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
489
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 142: Characteristics for Process Messages
S A P
To be able to assign a characteristic to a process message, you must first release the characteristics groups for use in process messages.
S A P
You create characteristics in Customizing and consolidate them into groups.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
490
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 143: Message Destination Types
S A P
S A P
Process messages can be sent to one or more destinations for further processing. They can be sent to the following message destination types:
• • • •
O n l y
U s e I n t e r n a l
R/3 function module type message destinations are predefined in the standard system. You can use these destinations to execute the following actions, for example:
e r
2010
R/3 function module SAPoffice mail system users ABAP tables defined by the user External functions (for example, a process control system) An alert category of the SAP Alert Management System
P a r t n
• • • • •
Enter confirmations for process and production orders Post goods movements Send inspection results to QM Update the status of control recipes/instructions
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
491
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l S A P
S A P
Figure 144: Message Destinations – Structure
You define message destinations in Customizing without reference to a specific process message or message category.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
With R/3 function module, ABAP table, and SAP Alert Management destinations, you can define destination-specific target fields. Target fields are fields within a message destination to which the value of a specific message characteristic is transferred.
P a r t n
The address you have to maintain for a destination depends on the destination type, that is, the way in which the data is transferred (within ECC or using a remote function call - RFC).
O n l y
492
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 145: Message Category – Message Destination
S A P
• •
Assign any number of destinations to each message category Assign any number of message categories to each destination
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
Process management/process integration transfers all incoming messages to the destinations defined for the relevant message category.
S A P
In Customizing, you assign message destinations to message categories. You can:
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
493
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 146: Message Characteristics – Target Fields
S A P U s e
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
• •
R/3 function module: Assignment is possible if required by the function module. ABAP table: Assignment is required. Otherwise, no message data is transferred. SAP Alert Management System: Assignment is required if container elements are to be used. SAPoffice user: No target fields External function: No target fields
P a r t n
• • •
S A P
By assigning message characteristics to destination-specific target fields in Customizing, you specify which characteristic value is to be transferred to which destination field. The destination type determines whether you can or must make this assignment:
494
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 147: Message Destinations, R/3 Function Type
S A P U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
If you want to transfer the values of the message characteristics to specific fields defined in the function module, you must define these fields as target fields in the message destination.
P a r t n
You can create function modules of your own and define them as message destinations. To do this, refer to the requirements regarding interface and error handling described in the Implementation Guide (IMG).
S A P
The graphic shows an R/3 function type message destination, which you can use to update the status of control recipes.
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
495
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 148: Message Destinations, ABAP Table Type
S A P
You can use an ABAP table as a message destination if the following requirements are met:
U s e
It is a transparent table. The table name is within the customer namespace (X* or Y*). The table is active in the ABAP Dictionary and stored in the database. The table contains the following fields: – –
You must define all table fields to which you want to transfer the value of a message characteristic as target fields in the message destination. The only exceptions are the MANDT, MSID, and WERK fields mentioned above.
496
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
–
MANDT (client): First key field, data type, and field length as in domain MANDT MSID (message number): Second key field, data type, and field length as in domain CO_MSID WERK (plant): No key field, data type, and field length as in the WERKS domain
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
• • • •
S A P
The graphic shows the relationship between an ABAP table and the definition of the corresponding message destination.
I n t e r n a l
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
I n t e r n a l
e r
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
Figure 149: Message Destination, SAPoffice User Type
U s e
The graphic shows an example of the SAPoffice user destination type.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Figure 150: Message Destination, External Function Type
With destinations of this type, a remote function call (RFC) is used to transfer the message data. The RFC destination of the message destination must be defined for a TCP/IP connection.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
497
O n l y
The graphic shows an example of the External Function destination type.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 151: Message Destination, SAP Alert Management Type
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 152: Message Destinations for Sending Alerts
As of SAP R/3 Enterprise SCM Extension 1.10 (EA_APPL 110), the process destination type 5 Alert Category is provided as standard. You can use this message destination to send alerts to one or more destinations, for example, from PI sheets/work instructions, external process control systems, or manually. The alerts can
498
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
be delivered to the destinations by e-mail, SMS, or fax. In this way, you can provide timely information to specific destination groups about unforeseen and potentially critical situations in the plant.
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 153: Sending Alerts: Settings (I)
U s e
Alert categories
I
n this process step, you define the following:
I n t e r n a l
•
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
499
O n l y
• •
an alert category
This is also the destination address for the process message destinations of type 5. a short text and long text for the alert category if required, a container with specific text variables
These are also destination-specific target fields for your process message destination of type 5. The system replaces the text variables with actual values at runtime. if required, hyperlinks for follow-up functions
e r
•
P a r t n
User master record
Depending on the means of communication, you enter an e-mail address or an SMS cell phone number, for example, in the user master record of the alert recipient .
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
he following options are provided for defining the alert Recipient assignments
T recipients: • •
O n l y
RFC destination
e r
•
U s e
P a r t n
•
If the SAP alert server is to be used as the alert management system in the SAP application system, enter NONE as the RFC destination. If the SAP alert server is to be used as an alert management system in another SAP system, enter the RFC destination of the relevant SAP system.
I n t e r n a l
•
Fixed recipients
You assign individual users to the alert category as recipients. Recipients via user roles
You assign individual roles to the alert category as recipients. All users in this role are automatically notified as soon an an alert in this category is sent. Role assignment for authorizations
With this option, you can use a role to define the authorization for subscribing to certain alert categories.
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n
If you have defined container elements for the alert category, you must define destination-specific target fields for these in the message destination. Enter the names of the container elements as target field names. Define and set up process message categories
You define a process message category, to which you assign both the process message destination and the destination-specific target fields.
500
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Define and set up process message destinations
You define a type 5 process message destination. You enter the alert category as the destination address.
e r
Figure 154: Sending Alerts: Settings (II)
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 155: Customizing for Process Messages
S A P U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
Hint: Sample data for Group 00 has been created for the exercises in this lesson.
S A P
The graphic illustrates the procedure and individual steps you need to carry out to define a process message category in Customizing.
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
501
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
502
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
Exercise 15: Process Messages – Structure and Settings (PI) (Optional) Exercise Objectives O n l y e r
Business Example
Hint: Complete this exercise if you want to use master recipes and process orders.
S A P
Task 1:
S A P
Complete the following exercise if you want to use routings and production orders.
U s e
P a r t n
You want to create message categories in Customizing and test them in the application.
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Customizing: Create message characteristics, message destinations, and message categories • Application: Create and send messages
2.
In Customizing, create characteristics group SCM372-##, name it characteristics group ##, and release it for use in process messages in plant 1100.
3.
Create the message characteristic LONG_TEXT-## in Customizing. Enter the following properties for the characteristic: Description
Long text group ##
Characteristics group
Characteristics group ##
Status
Released
Data type
Character format (for example, 30 characters)
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Go to Customizing (IMG) for Process Management and familiarize yourself with the IMG structure.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
1.
P a r t n
U s e
Process messages for mail recipients
503
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
In the additional process management data (Proc. Mgmt pushbutton), specify that the characteristic is to be assigned a long text. 4.
In Customizing, create process message category TEXT-## for plant 1100. Select the description Long text message group ##.
O n l y e r
Characteristic
Process order
Use the input help (F4).
Long text
LONG_TEXT-##
Date of event
Use the input help (F4).
Time of event
Use the input help (F4).
Hint: Using the input help and the Find and Find again pushbuttons, you can find the characteristics more quickly.
S A P
S A P
Mark all characteristics as required characteristics. Save your entries.
Description
Mail recipient group ##
Type
SAPoffice destination (03)
Destination address
SAPoffice destination of your group (corresponds to the user name)
e r
I n t e r n a l
In Customizing, define message destination M## for plant 1100. Enter the following properties for the destination:
P a r t n
U s e
5.
U s e
P a r t n
Information
I n t e r n a l
Assign characteristics to the message category. All messages of this message category should contain the following information:
Make the required settings. O n l y
Save your entries. 6.
Assign destination M## to message category TEXT-##. Save your entries.
7.
Go to the Process Management application menu and familiarize yourself with the menu structure.
8.
Create a message of category TEXT-## in plant 1100 manually. Continued on next page
504
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
Enter order number PI-ORDER-## and a long text of your choice. Save the message. 9.
Go to the message monitor and display the message of category TEXT-## created for order PI-ORDER-## (plant 1100).
Hint: Choose Send Message and not Start Send Job.
e r
Process Messages for Destination Table and Process Event Log 1.
In Customizing, examine message destination PI01, the process event log for plant 1100, and the target fields defined for it. Answer the following questions:
S A P
S A P
What is the destination type? __________________________________ What is the function of the target field?
Description
Table destination group ##
Type
ABAP/4 table (04)
Destination address
YMESS
e r
U s e
Define all table fields of the YMESS table, with the exception of MANDT, MSID and WERK, as target fields of the process message destination. To do so, start a second session and display a list of all table fields of the YMESS table (see solutions). Save your entries. 3.
In Customizing, display process message category MEAS-## for plant 1100. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
505
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Create message destination T## in plant 1100. Enter the following properties for the destination:
P a r t n
__________________________________ 2.
U s e
Task 2:
P a r t n
If all your settings are correct, you will soon receive an express e-mail. You can view the content of the message in your inbox (Office → Workplace).
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Send the message.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
Display the message characteristics. Assign destinations PI01 and T## to the message category. Assign the message characteristics to the target fields of the destinations as follows:
Characteristic
Target field
PPPI_PROCESS_ORDER
PROCESS_ORDER
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
PI01 destination:
S A P U s e
MEASURED_VALUE
READING
PPPI_EVENT_DATE
EVENTDATE
PPPI_EVENT_TIME
EVENTTIME
PPPI_OPERATION
OPERATION
PPPI_PHASE
PHASE
PPPI_PROCESS_ORDER
ORDERNO
PPPI_SOURCE
SOURCE
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
UOM
You can use the input help (F4) to select the message characteristics and the corresponding target fields.
4.
Go to the Process Management application menu and manually create a process message with the category MEAS-## in plant 1100.
Save the message.
506
5.
Go to the message monitor, display the message with category MEAS-## that was created for order PI-ORDER-##, and send the message.
6.
Call up the YMESS table and display the entries created for your message.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Enter any measured value, order number PI-ORDER-##, operation 0010, phase 0011, unit of measure °C, and enter measuring device Device-## as the data source.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Save your settings.
P a r t n
Target field
S A P
Characteristic
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Destination T##:
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
Solution 15: Process Messages – Structure and Settings (PI) (Optional) Task 1: Process messages for mail recipients O n l y
Go to Customizing (IMG) for Process Management and familiarize yourself with the IMG structure. a)
(SAP Menu:)
e r
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project / SAP Reference IMG pushbutton /
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide: Production Planning for Process Industries → Process Management 2.
In Customizing, create characteristics group SCM372-##, name it characteristics group ##, and release it for use in process messages in plant 1100.
S A P
Customizing: (...) → Process Management → Process Messages → Process Message Characteristics → Define Characteristics Groups for Process Messages / Define Characteristics Groups
P a r t n
SCM372-##
Chars Group:
Characteristics group ##
e r
Save your entries and choose Back twice. You can release the characteristics group in the same Customizing activity by choosing Release for Process Messages. 1100
Plant:
Choose New Entries and enter the characteristics group you have defined above. Then save your entries and choose Back to return to the IMG. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
507
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
Choose New Entries Group:
S A P
a)
U s e
P a r t n
(Customizing:)
I n t e r n a l
1.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
Create the message characteristic LONG_TEXT-## in Customizing. Enter the following properties for the characteristic: Description
Long text group ##
Characteristics group
Characteristics group ##
Status
Released
Data type
Character format (for example, 30 characters)
e r
In the additional process management data (Proc. Mgmt pushbutton), specify that the characteristic is to be assigned a long text. a)
Customizing:
P a r t n
Choose Create Characteristics for Process Messages. LONG_TEXT-##
S A P
S A P
Characteristic: Enter Enter the data provided in the exercise.
U s e
Save your entries.
I n t e r n a l
Assign characteristics to the message category. All messages of this message category should contain the following information:
e r
In Customizing, create process message category TEXT-## for plant 1100. Select the description Long text message group ##.
P a r t n
In the Additional Data for Process Instructions and Messages dialog box (Proc. mgmt pushbutton), select the Unlimited field.
4.
U s e
(...) → Process Management → Process Messages → Process Message Characteristics → Define Characteristics for Process Messages
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
3.
SCM372
O n l y
Continued on next page
508
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
Characteristic
Process order
Use the input help (F4).
Long text
LONG_TEXT-##
Date of event
Use the input help (F4).
Time of event
Use the input help (F4).
Hint: Using the input help and the Find and Find again pushbuttons, you can find the characteristics more quickly.
e r
Mark all characteristics as required characteristics. Save your entries. Customizing: (...) → Process Management → Process Messages → Define and Set Up Process Message Categories 1100
S A P
S A P
Plant:
Choose New Entries and enter the process message category with its description.
U s e
Select the entry and double-click Characteristics/Message categories in the dialog structure.
Description
Req
PPPI_PROCESS_ORDER
Process order
x
LONG_TEXT-##
Long text characteristic group ##
x
PPPI_EVENT_DATE
Date of event
x
PPPI_EVENT_TIME
Time of event
x
O n l y
Characteristic
Save your entries.
Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Assign the following characteristics (choose New Entries):
P a r t n
Enter
2010
U s e
P a r t n
a)
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Information
509
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
In Customizing, define message destination M## for plant 1100. Enter the following properties for the destination: Description
Mail recipient group ##
Type
SAPoffice destination (03)
Destination address
SAPoffice destination of your group (corresponds to the user name)
Make the required settings. Save your entries.
e r
a)
Customizing:
Plant:
U s e
P a r t n
(...) → Process Management → Process Messages → Process Message Destinations → Define and Set Up Message Destinations
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
5.
SCM372
1100
Choose New Entries
S A P
Save your entries.
U s e
Assign destination M## to message category TEXT-##. Save your entries. a)
Customizing:
I n t e r n a l
Choose New Entries, enter destination M##, and choose Save. 7.
Go to the Process Management application menu and familiarize yourself with the menu structure. a)
8.
SAP menu: Logistics → Production - Process → Process Management
Create a message of category TEXT-## in plant 1100 manually. Continued on next page
510
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Select process message category TEXT-## and double-click on Destinations/Message categories in the dialog structure.
e r
(...) → Process Management → Process Messages → Define and Set Up Process Message Categories (Plant 1100)
P a r t n
6.
S A P
Enter the name of the message destination and enter the data provided in the exercise.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
Enter order number PI-ORDER-## and a long text of your choice. Save the message. a)
Standard SAP menu:
Plant:
1100
Process message category
TEXT-##
e r
Enter order number PI-ORDER-## for characteristic PPPI_PROCESS_ORDER Process order. Save the message. Go to the message monitor and display the message of category TEXT-## created for order PI-ORDER-## (plant 1100). Send the message.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Hint: Choose Send Message and not Start Send Job.
S A P
S A P
9.
U s e
Choose Create Text for the LONG_TEXT-## characteristic, enter any long text in the editor, choose Save and then Back.
P a r t n
Enter
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Message → Create Manually
O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
511
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
If all your settings are correct, you will soon receive an express e-mail. You can view the content of the message in your inbox (Office → Workplace). a)
Standard SAP menu: Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Message → Message Monitor
O n l y e r
Plant
1100
Order
PI-ORDER-##
Process message category
TEXT-##
I n t e r n a l
Select the following selection criteria:
P a r t n
Enter
U s e
Select your message and choose Send Message. Hint: Choose Send Message and not Start Send Job.
S A P
A dialog box appears and informs you that you have received a mail. Click Inbox in the dialog box to display the message content. Alternatively, you can access the mail inbox from the
P a r t n
U s e
SAP menu: Office → Workplace
I n t e r n a l
S A P
Then check the message status by choosing the Refresh button.
e r
Task 2: Process Messages for Destination Table and Process Event Log In Customizing, examine message destination PI01, the process event log for plant 1100, and the target fields defined for it. Answer the following questions: What is the destination type? __________________________________ What is the function of the target field? Continued on next page
512
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
1.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
__________________________________ a)
Customizing: (...) → Process Management → Process Messages → Process Message Destinations → Define and Set Up Message Destinations (Plant 1100) Destination type: 01 = R/3 function module
O n l y
The PROCESS_ORDER target field is used to transfer the process order number to the function module.
Table destination group ##
Type
ABAP/4 table (04)
Destination address
YMESS
Define all table fields of the YMESS table, with the exception of MANDT, MSID and WERK, as target fields of the process message destination. To do so, start a second session and display a list of all table fields of the YMESS table (see solutions). Save your entries.
P a r t n
S A P
Description
S A P
U s e
Create message destination T## in plant 1100. Enter the following properties for the destination:
U s e
P a r t n
e r
2.
a)
Create the message destination as described in the previous exercise.
Now start a new session and choose the following from the SAP menu:Tools → ABAP Workbench → Development → ABAP Dictionary (SE11).
Define the eight table fields specified in the exercise as target fields for message destination T##. Use the description of the table fields or a similar text as the description for the target fields. Save your entries.
2010
In Customizing, display process message category MEAS-## for plant 1100. Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
513
O n l y
In the Database table field, enter table name YMESS. Choose Display. The Fields tab page is displayed.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Select message destination T##, double-click Target Fields/Message Destinations, and then choose New Entries.
3.
I n t e r n a l
Function of the target field: Select PI01 and double-click on Target Fields/Message Destinations in the dialog structure.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
Display the message characteristics. Assign destinations PI01 and T## to the message category. Assign the message characteristics to the target fields of the destinations as follows:
Characteristic
Target field
PPPI_PROCESS_ORDER
PROCESS_ORDER
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
PI01 destination:
S A P U s e
MEASURED_VALUE
READING
PPPI_EVENT_DATE
EVENTDATE
PPPI_EVENT_TIME
EVENTTIME
PPPI_OPERATION
OPERATION
PPPI_PHASE
PHASE
PPPI_PROCESS_ORDER
ORDERNO
PPPI_SOURCE
SOURCE
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
UOM
e r
I n t e r n a l
You can use the input help (F4) to select the message characteristics and the corresponding target fields.
P a r t n
Target field
S A P
Characteristic
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Destination T##:
O n l y
Continued on next page
514
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
Save your settings. a)
Customizing: (...) → Process Management → Process Messages → Define and Set Up Process Message Categories (Plant 1100) For message category MEAS-##:
O n l y
Dialog structure: Destinations/Message categories
e r
Choose New Entries to assign both the destinations to the destinations PI01, T## consecutively:
Choose New Entries to assign the message characteristics to the target fields of the destinations Save Go to the Process Management application menu and manually create a process message with the category MEAS-## in plant 1100. Enter any measured value, order number PI-ORDER-##, operation 0010, phase 0011, unit of measure °C, and enter measuring device Device-## as the data source.
U s e
a)
SAP menu:
1100
Process message category:
MEAS-##
O n l y
Plant:
e r
I n t e r n a l
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Message → Create Manually
Enter Assign values to the characteristics as described in the exercise. Save your entries and choose Back.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
Save the message.
S A P
S A P
4.
U s e
P a r t n
Dialog structure: Characteristics/destination-specific target fields
I n t e r n a l
Dialog structure: Select Characteristics/message categories to display the characteristics
515
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
5.
SCM372
Go to the message monitor, display the message with category MEAS-## that was created for order PI-ORDER-##, and send the message. a)
SAP menu: Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Message → Message Monitor
O n l y
6.
Call up the YMESS table and display the entries created for your message. a)
SAP menu:
e r
Tools → ABAP Workbench → Overview → Data Browser (SE16) Table name: YMESS
PLANT
1100
ORDERNO
PI-ORDER-##
U s e
P a r t n
Enter
I n t e r n a l
Select your message as specified and send it.
Choose Execute. S A P
S A P
Then select your table entry and choose Table Entry → Display.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
516
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
Exercise 16: Process Messages – Structure and Settings (PP) (optional) Exercise Objectives O n l y e r
Business Example
Hint: Complete this exercise if you want to use routings and production orders.
S A P
Task 1:
S A P
Complete the previous exercise if you want to use master recipes and process orders.
U s e
P a r t n
You want to create message categories in Customizing and test them in the application.
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Customizing: Create message characteristics, message destinations, and message categories • Application: Create and send messages
2.
In Customizing, create characteristics group SCM372-##, name it characteristics group ##, and release it for use in process messages in plant 1000.
3.
Create the message characteristic LONG_TEXT-## in Customizing. Enter the following properties for the characteristic: Description
Long text group ##
Chars Group
Characteristics group ##
Status
Released
Data Type
Character format (for example, 30 characters)
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Go to Customizing (IMG) for Process Integration and familiarize yourself with the IMG structure.
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
1.
P a r t n
U s e
Process messages for mail recipients
517
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
In the additional process management data (Proc. mgmt pushbutton), specify that the characteristic is to be assigned a long text.
e r
Information
Characteristic
Production order
Use the input help (F4).
Long text
LONG_TEXT-##
Date of event
Use the input help (F4).
Time of event
Use the input help (F4).
Hint: Using the input help and the Find and Find again pushbuttons, you can find the characteristics more quickly.
U s e
P a r t n
In Customizing, create process message category TEXT-## for plant 1000. Select the description Long text message group ##. Assign characteristics to the message category. All messages of this message category should contain the following information: I n t e r n a l
O n l y
4.
Mark all characteristics as required characteristics. S A P
S A P
Save your entries.
Description
Mail recipient group ##
Type
SAPoffice destination (03)
Destination address
SAPoffice destination of your group (corresponds to the user name)
e r
I n t e r n a l
Define message destination M## for plant 1000 in Customizing. Enter the following properties for the destination:
Make the required settings.
O n l y
Save your entries. 6.
Assign destination M## to message category TEXT-##. Save your entries.
7.
Go to the Process Integration application menu and familiarize yourself with the menu structure.
8.
Create a message of category TEXT-## in plant 1000 manually. Continued on next page
518
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
U s e
5.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
Enter order number PP-ORDER-## and a long text of your choice. Save the message. 9.
Go to the message monitor and display the message of category TEXT-## created for order PP-ORDER-## (plant 1000).
Hint: Choose Send Message and not Start Send Job.
e r
Process messages for destination table In Customizing, create message destination T## in plant 1000. Enter the following properties for the destination: Description
Table destination group ##
Type
ABAP/4 table (04)
Destination address
YMESS_PP
S A P
S A P
1.
U s e
Task 2:
P a r t n
If all your settings are correct, you will soon receive an express e-mail. You can view the content of the message in your inbox (Office → Workplace).
In Customizing, display process message category MEAS-## for plant 1000.
e r
U s e I n t e r n a l
Save your entries.
P a r t n
Define all table fields of the YMESS table, with the exception of MANDT, MSID and WERK, as target fields of the process message destination. To do so, start a second session and display a list of all table fields of the YMESS_PP table (see solutions).
2.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Send the message.
Display the message characteristics. O n l y
Assign destination T## to the message category. Assign the message characteristics to the target fields of the destination as follows: Destination T##:
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
519
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
Characteristic
Target field
MEASURED_VALUE
READING
PPPI_EVENT_DATE
EVENTDATE
PPPI_EVENT_TIME
EVENTTIME
PPPI_OPERATION
OPERATION
PPPI_PRODUCTION_ORDER
ORDERNO
PPPI_SOURCE
SOURCE
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
UOM
e r
You can use the input help (F4) to select the message characteristics and the corresponding target fields.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
3.
Go to the Process Integration application menu and manually create a process message with the category MEAS-## in plant 1000.
S A P
Go to the message monitor, display the message with category MEAS-## that was created for order PP-ORDER-##, and send the message.
5.
Call up the YMESS_PP table and display the entries created for your message.
e r
I n t e r n a l
4.
P a r t n
U s e
Save the message.
S A P
Enter any measured value, order number PP-ORDER-##, operation 0010, unit of measure °C, and enter measuring device Device-## as the data source.
U s e
P a r t n
Save your settings.
O n l y
520
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
Solution 16: Process Messages – Structure and Settings (PP) (optional) Task 1: Process messages for mail recipients O n l y
Go to Customizing (IMG) for Process Integration and familiarize yourself with the IMG structure. a)
(SAP Menu:)
e r
Tools → Customizing → IMG → Execute Project / SAP Reference IMG pushbutton /
SAP Customizing Implementation Guide: Production → Shop Floor Control → Integration → Process Integration 2.
In Customizing, create characteristics group SCM372-##, name it characteristics group ##, and release it for use in process messages in plant 1000.
S A P
Customizing: (...) → Process Integration → Process Messages → Process Message Characteristics → Define Characteristics Groups for Process Messages / Define Characteristics Groups
P a r t n
SCM372-##
Chars Group:
Characteristics group ##
e r
Save your entries and choose Back twice. You can release the characteristics group in the same Customizing activity by choosing Release for Process Messages. Plant:
1000
Choose New Entries and enter the characteristics group you have defined above. Then save your entries and choose Back to return to the IMG. Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
521
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
Choose New Entries Group:
S A P
a)
U s e
P a r t n
(Customizing:)
I n t e r n a l
1.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
Create the message characteristic LONG_TEXT-## in Customizing. Enter the following properties for the characteristic: Description
Long text group ##
Chars Group
Characteristics group ##
Status
Released
Data Type
Character format (for example, 30 characters)
e r
In the additional process management data (Proc. mgmt pushbutton), specify that the characteristic is to be assigned a long text. a)
Customizing:
P a r t n
Choose Create Characteristics for Process Messages. LONG_TEXT-##
S A P
S A P
Characteristic: Enter
Enter the data provided in the exercise.
U s e
Save your entries.
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
In Customizing, create process message category TEXT-## for plant 1000. Select the description Long text message group ##. Assign characteristics to the message category. All messages of this message category should contain the following information:
P a r t n
In the Additional Data for Process Instructions and Messages dialog box (Proc. mgmt pushbutton), select the Unlimited field.
4.
U s e
(...) → Process Integration → Process Messages → Process Message Characteristics → Define Characteristics for Process Messages
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
3.
SCM372
Continued on next page
522
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
Characteristic
Production order
Use the input help (F4).
Long text
LONG_TEXT-##
Date of event
Use the input help (F4).
Time of event
Use the input help (F4).
Hint: Using the input help and the Find and Find again pushbuttons, you can find the characteristics more quickly.
e r
Mark all characteristics as required characteristics. Save your entries. Customizing: (...) → Process Integration → Process Messages → Define and Set Up Process Message Categories 1000
S A P
S A P
Plant:
Choose New Entries and enter the process message category with its description.
U s e
Select the entry and double-click Characteristics/Message categories in the dialog structure.
Description
Req
PPPI_PRODUCTION_ORDER
Production order
x
LONG_TEXT-##
Long text characteristic group x ##
PPPI_EVENT_DATE
Date of event
x
PPPI_EVENT_TIME
Time of event
x
O n l y
Characteristic
Save your entries. Continued on next page
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
e r
I n t e r n a l
Assign the following characteristics (choose New Entries):
P a r t n
Enter
2010
U s e
P a r t n
a)
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Information
523
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
Define message destination M## for plant 1000 in Customizing. Enter the following properties for the destination: Description
Mail recipient group ##
Type
SAPoffice destination (03)
Destination address
SAPoffice destination of your group (corresponds to the user name)
Make the required settings. Save your entries.
e r
a)
Customizing:
Plant:
U s e
P a r t n
(...) → Process Integration → Process Messages → Process Message Destinations → Define and Set Up Message Destinations
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
5.
SCM372
1000
Choose New Entries
S A P
Save your entries.
U s e
Assign destination M## to message category TEXT-##. Save your entries. a)
Customizing:
I n t e r n a l
Choose New Entries, enter destination M##, and then save. 7.
Go to the Process Integration application menu and familiarize yourself with the menu structure. a)
8.
SAP menu: Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration
Create a message of category TEXT-## in plant 1000 manually. Continued on next page
524
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
Select process message category TEXT-## and double-click on Destinations/Message categories in the dialog structure.
e r
(...) → Process Integration → Process Messages → Define and Set Up Process Message Categories (Plant 1000)
P a r t n
6.
S A P
Enter the name of the message destination and enter the data provided in the exercise.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
Enter order number PP-ORDER-## and a long text of your choice. Save the message. a)
SAP menu:
Plant:
1000
Proc. Message Cat.:
TEXT-##
e r
Save the text and choose Back. For characteristic PPPI_PRODUCTION_ORDER production order, enter order number PP-ORDER-##. Save the message. 9.
Go to the message monitor and display the message of category TEXT-## created for order PP-ORDER-## (plant 1000).
S A P
Send the message.
S A P
U s e
Choose Create Text for the LONG_TEXT-## characteristic; enter any long text in the editor;
P a r t n
Enter
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Process Messages → Create Manually
Hint: Choose Send Message and not Start Send Job.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
525
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
If all your settings are correct, you will soon receive an express e-mail. You can view the content of the message in your inbox (Office → Workplace). a)
SAP menu: Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Process Messages → Message Monitor
O n l y e r
Plant
1000
Order
PP-ORDER-##
Process message category
TEXT-##
I n t e r n a l
Select the following selection criteria:
P a r t n
Enter
U s e
Select your message and choose Send Message. Hint: Choose Send Message and not Start Send Job.
S A P
A dialog box appears and informs you that you have received a mail. Click Inbox in the dialog box to display the message content.
S A P
Then check the message status by choosing Refresh.
Alternatively, you can access the mail inbox from the SAP menu: P a r t n
U s e
Office → Workplace
e r
I n t e r n a l
Task 2: Process messages for destination table 1.
Description
Table destination group ##
Type
ABAP/4 table (04)
Destination address
YMESS_PP
O n l y
In Customizing, create message destination T## in plant 1000. Enter the following properties for the destination:
Continued on next page
526
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
Define all table fields of the YMESS table, with the exception of MANDT, MSID and WERK, as target fields of the process message destination. To do so, start a second session and display a list of all table fields of the YMESS_PP table (see solutions). Save your entries. O n l y
Customizing: (...) → Process Integration → Process Messages → Process Message Destinations → Define and Set Up Message Destinations (Plant 1000) Create the message destination as described in the previous exercise.
e r
Select message destination T##, double-click Target Fields/Message Destinations, and then choose New Entries.
In the Database table field, enter table name YMESS_PP. Choose Display. The Fields tab page is displayed.
S A P
Save your entries.
U s e
In Customizing, display process message category MEAS-## for plant 1000. Display the message characteristics. Assign destination T## to the message category.
I n t e r n a l
e r
Assign the message characteristics to the target fields of the destination as follows: Destination T##: Target field
MEASURED_VALUE
READING
PPPI_EVENT_DATE
EVENTDATE
PPPI_EVENT_TIME
EVENTTIME
PPPI_OPERATION
OPERATION
O n l y
Characteristic
Continued on next page
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
P a r t n
2.
S A P
Define the seven table fields desired in the exercise as target fields for message destination T##. Use the description of the table fields or a similar text as the description for the target fields.
U s e
P a r t n
Now start a new session and choose the following from the SAP menu: Tools → ABAP Workbench → Development → ABAP Dictionary (SE11).
I n t e r n a l
a)
527
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
PPPI_PRODUCTION_ORDER
ORDERNO
PPPI_SOURCE
SOURCE
PPPI_UNIT_OF_MEASURE
UOM
O n l y
Save your settings. a)
Customizing:
e r
(...) → Process Integration → Process Messages → Define and Set Up Process Message Categories (Plant 1000)
Dialog structure: Select Characteristics/message categories to display the characteristics Dialog structure: Destinations/Message categories
U s e
P a r t n
For message category MEAS-##:
I n t e r n a l
You can use the input help (F4) to select the message characteristics and the corresponding target fields.
Pushbutton New Entries for assigning destination T##:
S A P
Choose New Entries to assign the message characteristics to the target fields of the destination
U s e
3.
Go to the Process Integration application menu and manually create a process message with the category MEAS-## in plant 1000.
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
Enter any measured value, order number PP-ORDER-##, operation 0010, unit of measure °C, and enter measuring device Device-## as the data source.
P a r t n
Save
S A P
Dialog structure: Characteristics/destination-specific target fields
Continued on next page
528
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Structure and Settings
Save the message. a)
SAP menu:
Plant:
1000
Process message category:
MEAS-##
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Process Messages → Create Manually
Enter
e r
Assign values to the characteristics as described in the exercise. Save your entries and choose Back. Go to the message monitor, display the message with category MEAS-## that was created for order PP-ORDER-##, and send the message. a)
SAP menu: Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Process Messages → Message Monitor
S A P
5.
Call up the YMESS_PP table and display the entries created for your message.
Tools → ABAP Workbench → Overview → Data Browser (SE16)
Enter
Table name
P a r t n
U s e
SAP menu:
I n t e r n a l
a)
YMESS_PP
e r
1000
ORDERNO
PP-ORDER-##
O n l y
PLANT
Choose Execute. Then select your table entry and choose Table Entry → Display.
2010
S A P
Select your message as specified and send it.
U s e
P a r t n
4.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
529
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
Lesson Summary
O n l y
U s e
P a r t n
e r
I n t e r n a l
You should now be able to: • Describe the structure of process messages • Create process message categories in Customizing • Define different message destination types in Customizing and assign them to process message categories
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
530
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Processing
Lesson: Process Messages – Processing Lesson Overview O n l y
I n t e r n a l
This lesson provides information about processing process messages.
Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the processing steps of a process message Create, send, monitor, and delete process messages
Business Example At your company, you want to use the process management and process integration functions to maintain your process and production orders.
S A P
To begin with, you familiarize yourself with how process messages are structured and processed.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
You then take a closer look at the message categories shipped in the standard SAP system.
S A P
When doing so, you have to report the actual data for your production processes in process messages.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
• •
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
531
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 156: Process Message Processing - Overview
S A P
S A P
The graphic provides an overview of how a process message is processed.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 157: Creating Process Messages
532
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Processing
Process messages are created as part of process management/process integration to report actual data for executing a process order/production order. Process messages can be created in one of the following ways:
•
The process messages created are transferred to process management/process integration where they are sent to the relevant destinations. Messages are transferred as follows:
S A P U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
•
Manually created messages are transferred immediately after they are saved. Automatically created messages are transferred after the event is reported. Messages created from a PI sheet/work instructions are transferred after you have executed the report function in the PI sheet/work instructions. Messages are transferred from the process control system to process management/process integration by means of a remote function call (RFC).
S A P
• • •
U s e
P a r t n
e r
•
For planned or expected process events, you can request the corresponding message using a relevant process instruction. The message is created automatically when the processor maintains the PI sheet/work instructions, or when the control recipe/control instruction is processed by the process control system. In exceptional situations that are not taken into account in the PI sheet/work instructions or control recipe/control instruction, you can also create process messages manually within process management/process integration. In addition, process messages may be automatically created either periodically or based on events. Events are defined in the SAP manufacturing data access system.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
533
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 158: Automatic Creation of Process Messages
S A P
You can use this transaction to specify that process messages are to be created automatically at certain time intervals or whenever an event occurs.
U s e
•
You can assign values to the message characteristics of the message as follows: • • •
534
no value any fixed value manufacturing data point
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
•
Start not permitted The job variant cannot be started. Manual individual execution
The job variant can only be started manually on the overview screen. The process message is only created once. Periodic startWith this condition, you enter time intervals at which the job variant is to be started automatically. The process messages are created automatically at the time intervals you have defined. Event-controlled startWith this condition, you specify the manufacturing event that will trigger the creation of a message. The manufacturing data access interface supplies events from the connected services.
e r
I n t e r n a l
• •
P a r t n
You create a job variant for the desired process message category in this transaction. You can select the following start conditions:
S A P
As of SAP R/3 Enterprise SCM Extension 1.10 (EA_APPL 110), transaction CO69 (Create process message automatically) is available.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Processing
The overview screen displays all of the defined variants in a plant. From this screen, you can start or stop the variants, which is the equivalent to setting the status of the corresponding job to Released or Planned. The system logs all start activities as well as any success or error messages that are issued for the variants.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P
Figure 159: Sending Process Messages
U s e
•
By means of a background job defined in Customizing. The send job is started:
–
Automatically (provided that you have made the relevant setting in Customizing) at predefined time intervals or whenever a new message is created Manually in the message monitor
•
Online for selected messages. You start the send function in the monitor.
Before sending a process message to its destinations, the system checks: • •
2010
Whether the message matches the message category defined in Customizing for the ECC system Whether a message can be processed by its destinations (except for external functions)
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
535
O n l y
The background job sends all messages with “To be sent”, “To be resubmitted” or “To be resubmitted with warning” status.
e r
I n t e r n a l
–
P a r t n
The function for sending process messages can be executed in the following ways:
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
You can correct messages containing errors if they have not yet been sent. Depending on the results of the checks, the message is sent to all destinations, only to those destinations where no error was found, or to no destinations. For each message category, you can specify whether the message is sent to all destinations that can process it or to no destination if an error occurs with at least one destination. O n l y e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
If the message destination is an external destination, the data is transferred using the PI-PCS interface using a remote function call (RFC).
On the basis of this information, you can execute the following functions from the monitor: • • •
536
Complete or correct incomplete or incorrect messages Send messages if they are not automatically sent by a background job defined in Customizing Delete messages
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
From the monitor, you can call logs that provide more detailed information on the processing of individual messages and any errors that may have occurred.
e r
The message monitor provides information on the current status of process messages.
P a r t n
U s e
S A P
S A P
Figure 160: Message Monitor
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Processing
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 161: Processing and Status of a Process Message
S A P U s e
•
• •
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
537
O n l y
•
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
To be sent: The process message is created but has not yet been sent. Sent: The process message has been sent to all its destinations. Sent with warning: The message log contains a warning message. The process message has been sent to its destinations despite the warning. To be resubmitted: One of the message destinations was temporarily unavailable because it was blocked, for example. However, the message has been sent to the other destinations. To be resubmitted with warning: One of the message destinations was temporarily unavailable. In addition, a warning message was issued by one of the other destinations to which the message was sent. Message incomplete: The process message does not contain all required characteristics of the message category. It has not been sent. Destination error: The process message could not be processed by one of its destinations. Processing terminated: Processing of the message was terminated due to an error. The message has not been sent to any of its destinations.
P a r t n
• • •
S A P
The diagram shows the sequence of statuses a message can have while it is being processed. The meanings of the individual message statuses are as follows :
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 162: Process Message Log
S A P
•
You can call all logs from the message monitor.
538
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
If a process message is sent to an external function, data is also entered in the tRFC log. This log documents all tRFCs carried out in your system.
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
Change logs containing the name of the user that changed the message as well as the characteristics that have been added, and the original and changed characteristic values One consistency log containing a list of all destinations assigned to a message as well as the results of the general checks Destination-specific logs containing the results of destination-specific checks as well as the transaction ID of the relevant RFC if the destination is an external function
P a r t n
U s e
•
S A P
The system creates the following logs while a message is being processed in process management/process integration:
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Processing
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 163: Deleting Process Messages/Message Logs
S A P
•
U s e I n t e r n a l
The data is only deleted within process management/process integration and not in the message destinations.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
539
O n l y
•
e r
•
– Message logs only or message logs and the corresponding messages – All messages or only those that have been sent successfully You can delete smaller datasets online. If you want to delete a large amount of data, use a background job. You can schedule this job directly or specify in Customizing that the job is to be started automatically at regular time intervals. If required, you can specify that a deletion log is to be created.
P a r t n
•
Delete selected messages together with their logs in the message monitor. If one of the messages has not yet been sent successfully, a corresponding warning message is displayed. Delete all data within a specified range Using this function, you can choose whether you want to delete:
S A P
The following functions are available for deleting process messages and their logs:
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
540
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Processing
Exercise 17: Process Messages - Processing (PI) (Optional) Exercise Objectives O n l y
Business Example
e r
You create process messages and change, send, and delete them.
Complete the following exercise if you want to use routings and production orders.
S A P
S A P
Task: Create process messages and display, change, send, and delete them in the monitor Create a message of category MEAS-## and TEXT-## for order PI-ORDER-## in plant 1100 manually. In the message monitor, display all messages you created today for order PI-ORDER-##.
2.
Change the measured value in the message of category MEAS-## that you created in the previous step.
e r
Send the message with the changed measured value online from the message monitor. Then check the status of the process message. You may have to refresh the monitor display. Analyze the message logs. 3.
2010
In the message monitor, select all messages of message category TEXT-## and delete them online. You may then have to refresh the monitor display.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
541
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Display the characteristics of the individual messages.
P a r t n
U s e
1.
U s e
P a r t n
Hint: Complete this exercise if you want to use master recipes and process orders.
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create, display, change, send, and delete messages
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
Solution 17: Process Messages - Processing (PI) (Optional) Task: O n l y
1.
Create a message of category MEAS-## and TEXT-## for order PI-ORDER-## in plant 1100 manually.
e r
In the message monitor, display all messages you created today for order PI-ORDER-##. Display the characteristics of the individual messages. Standard SAP menu: Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Message → Create Manually
S A P
To navigate to the message monitor from the SAP menu, choose:
U s e
Select your messages using process order number PI-ORDER-## (delete any entry in the Proc. Message Cat. field). In the message monitor, click on the Display Message icon to display the characteristics of a message.
Send the message with the changed measured value online from the message monitor. Then check the status of the process message. You may have to refresh the monitor display.
Continued on next page
542
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Change the measured value in the message of category MEAS-## that you created in the previous step.
e r
2.
P a r t n
Logistics → Production – Process → Process Management → Message → Message Monitor
S A P
Create a message of category MEAS-## and TEXT-## for plant 1100 (if necessary, refer to the exercises in the previous lesson, Process Messages – Structure and Settings).
U s e
P a r t n
a)
I n t e r n a l
Create process messages and display, change, send, and delete them in the monitor
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Processing
Analyze the message logs. a)
Select the message in the message monitor and choose Change Message. Change the value assigned to characteristic MEASURED_VALUE and save your changes.
O n l y
You can call up the message logs for the relevant messages by choosing the i (Send Log for Message) icon. 3.
In the message monitor, select all messages of message category TEXT-## and delete them online. You may then have to refresh the monitor display. Select the messages and choose the Delete Message icon. Confirm the dialog box that appears with Yes. Then choose Refresh.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
a)
I n t e r n a l
Send the message in the message monitor by choosing Send Message. Then choose Refresh. The send status is now Sent.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
543
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
544
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Processing
Exercise 18: Process Messages - Processing (PP) (Optional) Exercise Objectives O n l y
Business Example
e r
You create process messages and change, send, and delete them.
Complete the previous exercise if you want to use master recipes and process orders.
S A P
S A P
Task: Create process messages and display, change, send, and delete them in the monitor Create a message of category MEAS-## and TEXT-## for order PP-ORDER-## in plant 1000 manually. In the message monitor, display all messages you created today for order PP-ORDER-##.
2.
Change the measured value in the message of category MEAS-## that you created in the previous step.
e r
Send the message with the changed measured value online from the message monitor. Then check the status of the process message. You may have to refresh the monitor display. Analyze the message logs. 3.
2010
In the message monitor, select all messages of message category TEXT-## and delete them online. You may then have to refresh the monitor display.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
545
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Display the characteristics of the individual messages.
P a r t n
U s e
1.
U s e
P a r t n
Hint: Complete this exercise if you want to use routings and production orders.
I n t e r n a l
After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create, display, change, send, and delete messages
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
Solution 18: Process Messages - Processing (PP) (Optional) Task: O n l y
1.
Create a message of category MEAS-## and TEXT-## for order PP-ORDER-## in plant 1000 manually.
e r
In the message monitor, display all messages you created today for order PP-ORDER-##. Display the characteristics of the individual messages. Standard SAP menu: Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Process Messages → Create Manually
S A P
To navigate to the message monitor from the SAP menu, choose:
U s e
Select your messages using order number PP-ORDER-## (delete any entry in the Proc. Message Cat. field). In the message monitor, click on the Display Message icon to display the characteristics of a message.
Send the message with the changed measured value online from the message monitor. Then check the status of the process message. You may have to refresh the monitor display.
Continued on next page
546
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Change the measured value in the message of category MEAS-## that you created in the previous step.
e r
2.
P a r t n
Logistics → Production → Shop Floor Control → Process Integration → Process Messages → Message Monitor
S A P
Create a message of category MEAS-## and TEXT-## for plant 1000 (if necessary, refer to the exercises in the previous lesson, Process Messages – Structure and Settings).
U s e
P a r t n
a)
I n t e r n a l
Create process messages and display, change, send, and delete them in the monitor
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages – Processing
Analyze the message logs. a)
Select the message in the message monitor and choose Change Message. Change the value assigned to characteristic MEASURED_VALUE and save your changes.
O n l y
You can call up the message logs for the relevant messages by choosing the i (Send Log for Message) icon. 3.
In the message monitor, select all messages of message category TEXT-## and delete them online. You may then have to refresh the monitor display. Select the messages and choose the Delete Message icon. Confirm the dialog box that appears with Yes. Then choose Refresh.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
a)
I n t e r n a l
Send the message in the message monitor by choosing Send Message. Then choose Refresh. The send status is now Sent.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
547
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the processing steps of a process message • Create, send, monitor, and delete process messages
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
548
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
SCM372
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System Lesson Overview O n l y
Lesson Objectives
e r
Business Example
Explain the predefined message categories in the standard SAP system
At your company, you want to use the process management and process integration functions to maintain your process and production orders.
S A P
To begin with, you familiarize yourself with how process messages are structured and processed.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
You then take a closer look at the message categories shipped in the standard SAP system.
S A P
When doing so, you have to report the actual data for your production processes in process messages.
U s e
•
P a r t n
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
I n t e r n a l
This lesson provides an overview of the predefined message categories in the standard SAP system.
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
549
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
P a r t n
The standard system contains a number of predefined message categories enabling you to transfer actual data from process control to the ECC system. These messages allow you to execute the following functions, for example:
e r
U s e
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
P a r t n
• • • • •
Update the control recipe/control instruction statuses and the corresponding order status Confirm time events Confirm activities Post a goods issue for the order Post a goods receipt for the order Confirm summarized measurement results as inspection results to QM
S A P
•
U s e
S A P
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 164: Message Categories for Process Orders in the Standard SAP System (I)
550
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 165: Message Categories for Process Orders in the Standard SAP System (II)
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 166: Message Categories for Process Orders in the Standard SAP System (III)
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
551
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 167: Message Categories for Production Orders in the Standard SAP System (I)
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 168: Message Categories for Production Orders in the Standard SAP System (II)
552
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 169: Material Withdrawal (Goods Issue)
S A P
S A P
Goods are issued from the warehouse for the material components required for production.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 170: Goods Issue for Order
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
553
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
You can post material receipts manually by using the corresponding ECC transactions or by sending process messages from the PI sheet/work instructions or a process control system. When an order is opened, the system automatically generates a reservation for the required material components. Each material component of the order is assigned a separate item number within the reservation. O n l y
A planned withdrawal causes the reservation to be reduced. Only the costs are updated in the case of unplanned withdrawals.
e r
You can also post goods issues automatically during confirmation (backflushing).
U s e
P a r t n
Backflushes are used if you want to avoid order-related physical material staging from the warehouse, for example. It is assumed that the material is staged at the work center.
I n t e r n a l
You can carry out planned goods issues (that is, for the reservation items) and unplanned goods issues.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 171: Material Consumption Messages
554
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
You can trigger the posting of goods issues and goods receipts of by-products for the process/production order from process control using process messages of category PI_CONS/PP_CONS. •
O n l y e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
•
Goods issues: If material components are to be backflushed, the system ignores the message since the goods issue is automatically triggered by the order confirmation. Goods receipts for by-products: Based on the negative reservation item of the material component, the system recognizes that the material is a by-product and automatically selects the correct movement type.
S A P
S A P
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n e r
Figure 172: Material consumption message
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
555
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
You can post goods issues and goods receipts for by-products using a PI_CONS/PP_CONS process message. The following data can also be determined from the order if necessary:
•
e r
•
Reservation number and item: If these characteristics are not specified in the message, the system searches the order for a reservation item matching the material number as well as the operation or phase. If it cannot find an item there either, the system posts an unplanned goods issue for the order. Batch number: If the message for a batch-managed material does not contain a batch number, the system uses the batch number of the reservation item. If the message for a non-batch-managed material contains a batch number, it is ignored. Storage location: If no storage location is specified in the message, the system uses the storage location of the reservation item.
P a r t n
When the goods movement is posted, the system writes the number of the relevant material document to the message log.
U s e
If the batch number and storage location are missing, the system sets the message status to Destination error and writes a corresponding entry to the message log.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
•
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 173: Confirmations for Process Orders
556
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
Confirmations are used to enter intra-enterprise activities that are performed for the process order. Confirmations document the processing statuses of process orders, operations, phases, and secondary resources. Confirmations are created for phases and secondary resources. Since costing, scheduling, and capacity planning are based solely on phase data and secondary resource data, no operations are confirmed. O n l y e r
You can execute completion confirmations manually using the relevant ECC confirmation transactions or using process messages from the PI sheet or a process control system.
U s e
P a r t n
A completion confirmation allows backflush postings and an automatic goods receipt to be triggered.
I n t e r n a l
The diagram shows which data can be confirmed and which business operations are executed as a result of completion confirmations.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 174: Confirmation Procedures for Process Orders (I)
You can create completion confirmations for phases and secondary resources.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
557
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
You have the following two options for creating completion confirmations for a phase or secondary resource: To confirm durations and activities, you enter a time ticket confirmation. To confirm a specific point in time (for example, processing start or processing finish), you enter a time event confirmation. With time event confirmations, the system calculates the confirmed duration internally. Record type group 2 must be assigned to the parameters of event-dependent standard values. Event-dependent standard values can be confirmed as variable activities.
You can create confirmations as follows: Manually as part of order processing By sending messages as part of process management
U s e
P a r t n
e r
• •
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
• •
P a r t n
U s e
S A P
S A P
Figure 175: Confirmation Procedures for Process Orders (II)
•
Along with the aforementioned confirmation procedures, various other confirmation procedures are available, which are not mapped by means of process messages.
558
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
•
Quantity-dependent standard values of the phases/secondary resources are confirmed in relation to the proportion of the planned order quantity that is confirmed. In the case of standard values that are not quantity-dependent, the confirmed values correspond to the planned values.
e r
I n t e r n a l
If you create a confirmation for the order, the phases/secondary resources are confirmed according to the formulas defined for the standard values.
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 176: Message on Phase Status
S A P
•
U s e
The time event determines whether you can also confirm the yield for a phase: •
Start and Interruption: You cannot confirm a yield.
• •
Partial finish: You can confirm a yield. Finish: Yield is confirmed. If the message does not contain a yield, the system confirms the planned operation quantity.
If the resource you have used differs from the planned resource, you can confirm it with the Start time event.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
559
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
The system writes the confirmation number into the message log.
P a r t n
• • •
Start: The phase has started. You also need to confirm this event when you continue processing a phase after it has been interrupted. End: A phase has ended. Interruption: The phase has been interrupted. Partial finish: The phase has not yet finished, but you want to confirm the yield obtained so far, for example.
S A P
You can use process messages on the phase status (message category PI_PHST) to confirm the following time events (statuses) for the phases of an order:
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 177: Messages on Secondary Resources
S A P
When you confirm processing time events, choose message category PI_SRST; when you confirm variable activities, choose message category PI_SRACT.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
For the Start time event, you can also confirm that you have used a different resource to the one that was planned, if required. To do so, add the characteristics for the resource name and the plant of the resource in the process message.
P a r t n
The process messages for secondary resource confirmation are processed in exactly the same way as the corresponding message categories for phase confirmation.
S A P
You can use process messages to confirm time events for standard resources.
O n l y
560
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 178: Messages on Activities
S A P
S A P
You can use process messages in the PI_PHACT category to confirm activities for phases as part of a time event confirmation, provided that their creation is provided for in the standard value key of the phase and that they have no time event reference. When creating this message, note the following :
e r
U s e I n t e r n a l
•
In the message, you specify the type of activity to be confirmed by entering the parameter ID of the corresponding standard value (PPPI_STD_VALUE_PARAMETER_ID characteristic). In addition to the activity to be confirmed (PPPI_ACTIVITY characteristic), you can also confirm a short comment (PPPI_CONFIRMATION_SHORT_TEXT characteristic).
P a r t n
•
The system writes the confirmation number into the message log. O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
561
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 179: Messages on Activities (Secondary Resources)
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 180: Time Ticket Confirmations for Phases (I)
You use PI_PHCON process messages to execute a time ticket confirmation. This means that you only need one process message from production to confirm all activities performed for a phase and the resource used.
562
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
You can confirm the following data: • •
O n l y
Prerequisite: No time event confirmation has been created for the phase as yet.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
•
I n t e r n a l
•
Activities performed (for example, machine time, time and labor data, duration, or energy consumption) Yield and scrap quantity, provided that the use of scrap has been defined for the order type Resource
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n e r
I n t e r n a l
Figure 181: Time Ticket Confirmations for Phases (II)
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
563
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 182: Time Ticket Confirmation for Secondary Resources (I)
S A P
S A P
You use PI_PHCON process messages to execute a time ticket confirmation for a secondary resource. This means that you only need one process message sent from production to confirm all activities performed for a secondary resource and the resource used.
U s e
•
Prerequisite: •
No time event confirmation has been created for the secondary resource as yet.
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
Activities performed (for example, machine time, time and labor data, duration, or energy consumption) Secondary resources
P a r t n
When doing so, you can confirm the following data:
O n l y
564
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l U s e
P a r t n
Figure 183: Time Ticket Confirmation for Secondary Resources (II)
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Requirement for a process order confirmation: No confirmations have been entered for phases.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
565
O n l y
Figure 184: Process Order Confirmations
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 185: Production Order Confirmations
S A P U s e
You can execute completion confirmations manually using the relevant ECC confirmation transactions or using process messages from the work instructions or a process control system.
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
A completion confirmation allows backflush postings and an automatic goods receipt to be triggered.
P a r t n
The diagram shows which data can be confirmed and which business operations are executed as a result of completion confirmations.
S A P
Confirmations are used to enter intra-enterprise activities that are performed for the production order. Confirmations document the processing state for production orders, operations, and suboperations.
566
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 186: Confirmation Procedures for Production Orders (I)
S A P
You have the following two options for creating confirmations for an operation or suboperation:
U s e I n t e r n a l
e r
To confirm durations and activities, you enter a time ticket confirmation. To confirm a specific point in time (for example, processing start or processing finish), you enter a time event confirmation. With time event confirmations, the system calculates the confirmed duration internally. The relevant record type group (1 Set Up, 2 Process, 3, Tear Down) must be assigned to the parameters of event-dependent standard values. Event-dependent standard values can be confirmed as variable activities.
P a r t n
• •
S A P
You can create confirmations for operations and suboperations.
You can create confirmations as follows:
2010
O n l y
• •
Manually as part of order processing By sending messages as part of process integration
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
567
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
SCM372
e r
Figure 187: Confirmation Procedures for Production Orders (II)
•
Along with the aforementioned confirmation procedures, various other confirmation procedures are available, which are not mapped by means of process messages.
S A P
S A P
•
Quantity-dependent standard values of the operations/suboperations are confirmed in relation to the proportion of the planned order quantity that is confirmed. In the case of standard values that are not quantity-dependent, the confirmed values correspond to the planned values.
U s e
P a r t n
If you create a confirmation for the order, the operations/suboperations are confirmed according to the formulas defined for the standard values.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
568
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 188: Message on Operation Status
e r
S A P I n t e r n a l
• • •
Start Setup/Process/Teardown: The activity for the operation has started. You also need to confirm this event if you continue processing the activity after it has been interrupted. Finish Set Up/Process/Tear Down: The activity for the operation has finished. Interruption: The activity for the operation has been interrupted. Partial finish: The activity for the operation has not yet finished, but you want to confirm the yield obtained so far, for example.
P a r t n
U s e
•
S A P
You can use process messages for the operation status (message category PP_OPST) to confirm the following time events (statuses) for the operations of an order:
The system writes the confirmation number into the message log. The time event determines whether you can also confirm the yield (only for Process): Start and Interruption: Yield cannot be confirmed. Partial finish: Yield can be confirmed. Finish: Yield is confirmed. If the message does not contain a yield, the system confirms the planned operation quantity.
With the Start time event, you can also confirm the work center used if it differs from the one planned.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
569
O n l y
• • •
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 189: Message on Suboperation
S A P
When confirming processing time events, choose message category PP_SUST; when confirming variable activities, message category PP_SUACT.
U s e
e r
I n t e r n a l
For the Start time event, you can also confirm that you have used a different work center to the one that was planned, if required. To do so, enter the characteristics for the work center name and the plant of the work center in the process message.
P a r t n
When suboperations are confirmed, the process messages are processed in exactly the same way as the corresponding message categories for operation confirmations.
S A P
You can use process message to confirm time events for suboperations.
O n l y
570
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 190: Message on Activities (Operation)
S A P
S A P
With process messages of category PP_OPACT, you can confirm activities for operations when confirming a time event, provided that you can enter these operations in the standard value key and they do not refer to a time event. When creating this message, note the following :
e r
U s e I n t e r n a l
•
In the message, you specify the type of activity to be confirmed by entering the parameter ID of the corresponding standard value (PPPI_STD_VALUE_PARAMETER_ID characteristic). In addition to the activity to be confirmed (PPPI_ACTIVITY characteristic), you can also confirm a short comment (PPPI_CONFIRMATION_SHORT_TEXT characteristic).
P a r t n
•
The system writes the confirmation number into the message log. O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
571
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 191: Message on Activities (Suboperation)
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 192: Time Ticket Confirmation for Operation (I)
You confirm a time ticket using a process message of category PP_OPCON. This means that you only need one process message sent from production to confirm all activities performed for an operation and the work center used.
572
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
You can confirm the following data: • • •
Activities performed (for example, machine time, time and labor data, duration, or energy consumption) Yield and scrap quantity Work center I n t e r n a l
O n l y
Prerequisite: No time events have been confirmed yet for the operation.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
•
S A P
S A P
U s e
P a r t n e r
I n t e r n a l
Figure 193: Time Ticket Confirmation for Operation (II)
O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
573
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 194: Time Ticket Confirmation for Suboperation (I)
S A P
When doing so, you can confirm the following data:
U s e
Activities performed Work center
P a r t n
• •
Prerequisite: No time events have been confirmed yet for the suboperation.
e r
I n t e r n a l
•
S A P
You confirm a time ticket for a suboperation using a process message of category PP_SUCON.
O n l y
574
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 195: Time Ticket Confirmation for Suboperation (II) U s e
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 196: Confirmation for Production Order
Requirement for a production order confirmation: No confirmations can have been entered for operations.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
575
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 197: Goods Receipt
S A P
S A P
For the finished product to be delivered to the warehouse, a goods receipt has to be created.
e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 198: Goods Receipt
576
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
You can post goods receipts for a process/production order manually by using the corresponding ECC transactions or by sending process messages from the PI sheet/work instructions or a process control system. The diagram shows which business operations are executed as a result of goods receipt postings. O n l y e r
The inward delivery completed indicator indicates whether an order is completed from the point of view of the goods receipt. This means than no more goods receipts are expected for this order. The open quantity is zero.
If you have already entered a delivery for which the Delivery completed indicator has been set and still expect another delivery, you must reset the indicator.
U s e
P a r t n
You can still post goods receipts for remaining quantities. However, they do not change the open purchase order quantity.
I n t e r n a l
The goods receipt can also be posted automatically at the time of a confirmation (automatic goods receipt). If you use process management/process integration, however, do not use this function since goods receipts are posted using process messages.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 199: Goods Receipt Messages
With process messages of category PI_PROD_/PP_PROD, a goods receipt is triggered for the process/production order.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
577
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
In the case of a goods receipt, the following data can be determined from the order if it is not contained in the message. If the data is not contained in the order either, the message status is set to Destination error. •
O n l y
•
U s e
P a r t n
e r
When the system posts a goods receipt, it writes the number of the corresponding material document into the message log. If a termination occurs, the log specifies the reason for the error.
I n t e r n a l
•
Order item: The system searches the order for an order item that matches the material number and operation or phase. Batch number: For batch-managed materials, the system uses the batch number of the order item. If batch management is not required for a material, the system ignores the batch number specified in the message. Storage location: If the storage location is not specified in the message, the system uses the storage location specified in the order item.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 200: Messages on Control Recipe Status
578
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
Process messages of category PI_CRST are used to update the statuses of control recipes/control instructions and the corresponding orders. You can confirm the following control recipe statuses: •
O n l y
•
U s e
P a r t n
e r
Hint: In the PI sheet/work instructions, the system creates the relevant status message automatically as soon as you complete the PI sheet/work instructions (Processed status) or technically complete it (Discarded or Terminated status). For this reason, you must not define additional process instructions for PI sheets/work instructions for requesting a message on the control recipe status.
I n t e r n a l
•
Discarded The control recipe/control instruction was sent but cannot be processed. It is discarded before the start of its execution. Terminated Execution of the control recipe/control instruction has started but it cannot be completed. Processed Execution of the control recipe/control instruction has been completed.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
Figure 201: Picking and Material Identification
With the dynamic function call Picking, you manually pack the batches or materials to be used from a PI sheet into handling units (packaging units or HUs). The batches required for the process order are weighed, filled or measured, and packed into handling units. Batches can also be picked using an external weighing system.
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
579
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
O n l y
SCM372
Material identification is handled by dynamic function calls in the PI sheet and consists of the following elements:
• •
Consistency check of the staged HUs Sequence check of the staged HUs Automatic goods issue posting (GI posting) after successful completeness or sequence check Automatic transfer of data from the material identification to the batch log Check for the completeness of the picking
U s e
P a r t n
e r
The goods issue posting of the components is executed at HU level.
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
• • •
S A P
S A P e r
You can request process messages for creating batches using process instructions from the process control system or the PI sheet/work instructions.
580
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n
Figure 202: Messages for Batch Creation
I n t e r n a l
SCM372
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
S A P U s e
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r
The batch containing the characteristics to which you want to assign values must have been created in the system.
P a r t n
This may be useful if a characteristic does not have to be created in quality management (QM). In the case of characteristics that are taken into account in the quality inspections during production, you should transfer the inspection results from QM to the batch instead.
S A P
You can request process messages for assigning values to batch characteristics using process instructions from the process control system or the PI sheet/work instructions. For example, you can define a process data request to request a process message for a certain characteristic of the batch produced.
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 203: Messages for the Assignment of Values to Batch Characteristics
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
581
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Unit 5: Appendix 2: Process Messages
SCM372
S A P U s e
• •
Inspection data is maintained in the material master and the master recipe, routing, and inspection plan. An inspection lot has been created for the order. The inspection result is a summarized measured value.
P a r t n
•
I n t e r n a l
The confirmed data, that is, the inspection results, the number of inspections, and the short text for the inspection are available as default values within QM results recording.
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
O n l y
The process message must contain either the operation number or the phase number (process order only). Otherwise, it cannot be assigned to an inspection characteristic in the inspection lot.
e r
The inspection lot is created automatically when the order is released.
582
S A P
Using process messages of category PI_QMSMR/PP_QMSMR, you can confirm the results of the inspections that are performed during production to QM. The following requirements must be met:
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
Figure 204: Messages on Inspection Characteristics (Summarized Measured Values)
I n t e r n a l
U s e
SCM372
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Lesson: Process Messages in the Standard SAP System
Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the predefined message categories in the standard SAP system
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
583
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Unit Summary
O n l y
SCM372
Unit Summary
O n l y
U s e
P a r t n
e r
I n t e r n a l
You should now be able to: • Describe the structure of process messages • Create process message categories in Customizing • Define different message destination types in Customizing and assign them to process message categories • Describe the processing steps of a process message • Create, send, monitor, and delete process messages • Explain the predefined message categories in the standard SAP system
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
584
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
e r P a r t n S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
S A P P a r t n
U s e
S A P
U s e e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
e r P a r t n S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
S A P P a r t n
U s e
S A P
U s e e r O n l y
I n t e r n a l
U s e
I n t e r n a l
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
Test Your Knowledge
O n l y
SCM372
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
585
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Course Summary
SCM372
Course Summary You should now be able to: • •
Set up destinations for control recipes and control instructions Develop XSteps for PI sheets/work instructions and for external systems
U s e
P a r t n
e r
O n l y
I n t e r n a l
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
586
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
2010
I n t e r n a l
U s e
S A P
P a r t n e r
O n l y
Feedback O n l y e r
U s e
P a r t n
I n t e r n a l
SAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure the accuracy and completeness of the materials. If you have any corrections or suggestions for improvement, please record them in the appropriate place in the course evaluation.
S A P
S A P e r
I n t e r n a l
U s e
P a r t n O n l y
2010
© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
587